Home

R&S FSW K70 VSA User Manual

1. HUN INSTrument CREate DUPILICALG te iato cater INSTr ament CREate REPLACO nerit er ETES AEE SORE EEN EE A Deui INSTr ment CREate NEW oett INS TRuMent DELCO LC EM INS aU ENS IA c 303 INS Trumen edly 304 INSTr ment SELect iic rera EY EVE iaaa SAATON EKC TED 305 LAYOUEADD EWINDOW 423 LAYout GATalogEWINDOW cc sott praet tert 424 LAY out IDENtify WINDow x LAYOUCREMOVE WINDOW ricreare Ena E EE E EEE E EETAS EAYout REPLace WINDOW aseisiin LAY OURS Pile m C m 7 9 de UAM TIMIDI ASTRID 428 gt prete PER 428 EAYout WINDOWSmD2 REMOVE gt Ete ped te deg e rece Env er Ea E cart RAS Eu ORE LAYoutWINDow n REPLace MMEMory EOAD IQ STA T6 inesset to erro rt tnter rrr totae kir er py 456 MMEMery STOResms IG croire ma eigene rp teo tex
2. 443 CAL Gul tespn DDEM BURSELEENGI crei iiis dede iste sure v evt 444 lt gt lt gt 444 lt gt lt gt 445 lt gt lt gt 445 lt gt lt gt 445 lt gt lt gt 446 lt gt lt gt 447 lt gt lt gt 5 447 lt gt lt gt 448 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation 448 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
3. 394 SENSE 394 SENS amp DDEMod PRESSERLEMGI 394 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window on page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once in all windows then switched off again Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Scale All on page 218 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters lt Duration gt Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 217 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R
4. F f p N eee eee eee 4 4 p HL 1 c ce e N e T T 1 ap fsymbol Frequency in 25 H CPM 4 4 20 gp 1 lt 1 1 4 4 de shades 80 12 14 18 18 f ymbol 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 Frequency APCO25 H DQPSK 0 1 1 4 4 20 D 1 D D 1 D 1 1 4 D D D 1 D D 4 D 1 D 1 1 D 1 1 4 1 1 1 D 1 E 1 1 D D D D D i 0 8 D 0 4 1 r 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 4 1 141 0 80 100 gp Frequency in CDMA2000 1X Forward D 1 D 4 1 1 D 4 D 1
5. lt gt 468 468 STATUs QUEStonable SYNGC PTRansitlori 468 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String
6. 449 lt gt lt gt 5 449 lt gt lt gt 450 lt gt lt gt 5 451 lt gt lt gt 5 451 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor 452 lt gt lt gt 6 5 452 lt gt lt gt 5 452 lt gt lt gt 5 453 lt 2 lt gt 2 lt gt lt gt iid CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEF
7. 1 346 5 5 5 347 5 347 5 347 5 5 348 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling essere 348 EXPort WAVeform DISPlayoff lt FastExport gt Enables or disables the display update on the oscilloscope during data acquisition with the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 As soon as the R amp S FSW B2000 is activated see 82000 State on page 162 the display on the oscilloscope is turned off to improve performance during data export As soon as the R amp S FSW closes the connection to the oscilloscope the display is reacti vated and the oscilloscope can be operated as usual However if the LAN connection is lost for any reason the display of the oscilloscope remains deactivated Use this command to re activate it Parameters lt FastExport gt ON OFF ON Disables the display update for maximum export speed OFF Enables the display update The export i
8. lt gt 465 lt gt 465 lt gt 465 lt gt 465 lt gt 1 465 lt gt 465 lt gt 465 STATus QUEStionable POWher EVENItJ 2 2 cosciente hac zc 466 STATus QUEStIonable SY NSDEVENI ccr e Men eee tha e ee euet e eo ven edant 466 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle cccccccccecescecsseceecesccecseseeeeseeeceageceeeeseeeanees 466 STATUS QUESHGnable DIG ENABIB otia t eaaet 466 sessi nennen nennen nnns nnne 466 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt ENABI ccccccccceceseecsseeeece
9. 322 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with the optional Digital Baseband Interface Configuring VSA Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 154 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 154 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harm
10. 330 Band remote control 329 Bias remote control 330 Deleting remote control 330 External Mixer Remote control Harmonic order remote control Mixer type remote control 2 992 Selecting remote control 332 Copying Measurement channel remote 302 Couple Windows WEN cr 225 Coupling Input remote ero ere rettet teret Customized Measurement performing 243 D Data acquisition Capture length Configuration MSRA MSRT a tiet case Em Usable Bandwidth 183 Data source Capture DUM SM een ee 16 Display EQUAIIZEN e DER Emor VOCLOL uiis ee etre ie rait ei ies eere Evaluation method Meas o3 P Modulation 18 Modulation errors Multi SOURCE t inae tte I een siete Result types cci Symbols e I nolentes DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 341 Decimal separator Trace OX POM ete 223 Default values Preset iere 138 PE 178 Deleting
11. 2 467 5 5 5 467 5 5 467 STATUS QUESH Gna ble asx accu aces a rn ae ceder te ex nemen 467 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition cei esie seda an dd 467 5 5 lt gt 467 lt gt 4 467 5 5 lt gt 467 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency PTRansition ccce 467 lt gt 467 lt gt 467 lt gt 1 467 lt gt 467
12. 235 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue on page 417 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue page 419 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 417 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW on page 418 Import Export Functions I Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase 1 and the quadrature channel Such signals are referred to as signals signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the baseband Importing and exporting signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze the
13. NSTATe lt Name gt Order 2 any BPSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK 8 N3Pi8 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE 8 PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters lt PSKformat gt NORMal DIFFerential N3Pi8 808 5 RST NORMal Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 146 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate lt PSKNstate gt Together with DDEMod PSK FORMat this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 313 Setting parameters lt PSKNstate gt 218 5 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 146 SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat lt QAMformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for QAM Setting parameters lt QAMformat gt NORMal DIFFerential NPI4 MNPI4 NORMal Demodulation order QAM is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQAM is used 4 Demodulation order 11 4 16QAM is used MNPI4 Demodulation order 11 4 32QAM is used RST NORMal Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 146 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate lt QAMNState gt This command defines the demodulation order for QAM lt QAMNSTate gt Order 16 16QAM 16 Pi 4 16QAM 32 32QAM 32 Pi 4 32QAM 64 64QAM 128 128QAM 256 256QAM 512 512QAM 1024 1024QAM Setting parameters lt QAMNState gt numeric value RST 16 Manual operation See Modulation Order on
14. c 335 INPUEDIQ AUTO E nano Itn E 337 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIING 337 INPUEDI RANGE UPPER KP 337 INPut DIQ 3RANGe UPPerplf I T cai rotor teet eiae ia dae eant eren or eie 337 INP UDI QS RAT rM 338 NPU Oo ER 338 SUIT pn 338 UTP Ut DIG C DEVICE ce PE 338 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Configuring VSA For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt
15. lt gt 11 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK RESult 2 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent STATe essent lt gt 11 lt gt 1 5 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan STATe lt gt 11 lt gt 1 454 lt gt 11 6 2 lt gt 11 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent STATe lt gt 11 1 22 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent RESult eee eee 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan STATe 412 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue
16. 156 Input sources Analog Baseband terr 158 Digital Radio frequency ertet tor 153 Input Frontend Installation 2 es m Intersymbol interference ISI ee ern i 15 System nennt een erre Keys BW not used tette sett ntes 137 llc c ES 227 FUNCT not used ee 137 Peak ea 227 R N GONT enti bu 190 RUN SINGLE 190 191 SPAN not Sed 137 Known data a eet tts oe mu 151 Creating THES eee ite Dette olere bt i etae 250 Dependencies restrictions 133 ott E ED 152 File ceni s t e eite dr 489 lc 249 Fine synchronization 211 212 Loading TT 152 Recording tool ets 250 Symbol decisions WOrKING WII 249 L Limit lines Current mean peak values 229 Default ico ce RS LAN ada 229 er 229 Modulation issos innnan 228 Peak seare hreur e vertens ti meri i 226 Values Values checking cioe etes 230 Limits
17. 260 Offset Offset symbol mapping 85 Programming example 2 corp ci 470 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation SES QAM 90 Quadrature error arse me M 116 116 T 494 Preconditions for measurement 116 Quick Config yc ls 221 R R amp S DiglGOmMb 157 R amp S EX IQ BOX DiglGOhf nd 157 Range AAAS cedit semet dena rusa 178 Range per division ccm MH 177 Raw data e 222 Real Imag 1 inei I eoe ei mad 47 aeo e peii cues 61 Record length x erate ve 67 Relationship to sample rate 69 Recording tool Known data 250 Reference Result range oed ae etse 202 Reference deviation 121 eaten 147 Reference filter Reference level 170 174 Auto level Digital 1 Q url
18. 347 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip essen nennen 347 5 5 5 2 nennen 347 5 5 348 5 5 5 6 345 olem PRESSCCHANNEI tex bz EIU XM Y rhe 305 SEQUENCE chs ere 399 TRAGeO IQWBANG MBWIDTHEL 12 i crt tee atv rrr E e cob 363 TRAC eIOAWBANGI S FAT 362 TRAC e lt AF iQ BWIDUR cider aene eate cete Pe p gut Deep etr enemas 362 lt gt 439 TRIGger SEQuerice BBPowert oerte tapa 364 TRIGger SEQuerce D TIMa ottenere tree ere en ere enn nas 364 TRIGg er SEQuence DO TIME 222 toic tree tei rire ter Etre e nera 365 AOL DO fersen eneee eu RYE RU eH ete ae qe been cu not 365 TRIGger SEQuerice
19. 324 Threshold External Mixer remote control 324 Auto level 55 H 217 Reference level 22171 175 217 Roi D eer 171 175 217 Auto settings Meastime AUtO cn teri iere narrans 217 Meastime Manual osiris insana 217 Automatic Configuration n eec eri rire reri Configuration remote Averaging in 2000 Activating Deactivating 161 Alignmeht renes Connections Remote commands Settings ecrit eji m Band External Mixer Remote control 326 Bandwidth Coverage MSRA MSRT mode 135 Depending on sample rate 76 75 Extension Options 2 42 440 2 222 68 182 Maximum usable 67 182 Relationship to sample rate 69 Signal processing PENES Usable MaX 67 BB Power Tirigger Softkey x eer rorem 186 Bias External Mixer Remote control 323 Bit error rate BER Result VDO eret iron rant Fere etre eu eode 21 Burst GSM EDGE Measurement example nennen 267 Burst search
20. 0000 440 e DIa cd Feat edlen 441 e Polar DIagratms coti tee E bee 441 441 rror te pane netu nua dre tcd 441 6 0 442 Muli SOUE 442 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results For the result displays based on the capture buffer the command returns the y axis values of the data that is stored in the capture buffer The number of returned values depends on the size of the capture buffer and the sample rate For example a capture buffer size of 500 symbols in combination with a sample rate of 4 would return 2000 level values The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input Scaling is relative to the full scale level for I Q input The unit is dBm Retrieving Results Note that the trace results return only the values for the currently displayed capture buffer range see also chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 132 For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display this command returns a maximum of 25 000 values corresponding to the displayed trace points You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe
21. lt gt 11 5 454 lt gt 11 5 6 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESUlt eese lt gt 11 5 2 lt gt 11 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK RESult m GALCulate n LIMitMACCuracy DEFault 1 rrt entren rnnt rir i enn na lt gt 11 5 lt gt 11 1 lt gt 11 5 2 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan RESUlt essen 454 lt gt 11 5 2 412 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEa
22. 384 eret tirer e tee remite 384 SENSe IDDEMOS FS uite oh etuer erp Ru eet eur ean e eo cor e 384 ropes er a De ERSTE ei cus 384 SENSe DDEMGOS FSYNe RESUlE iau sieeve rta eee ne eee ceto ted cadi ea 385 528 385 SENSE TEASTA erar e dnbie Ron Romer Rs 385 SENSe DDEMod KDA Ta NAME 22 2 epe ee d ehe recu prater pte 386 SENSe DBEMod NORMalize ADROOD inci ccc 2 122 enne ei ated eun goa Ec eme a AE 386 SENSE DDEMod NORMalize CFDRIf t 55222 00 ne phe axe onn nx enu Rotten Ren eR seas 386 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel eee 386 SENSe DDEMed NORMalize FDERTOF tata iti e rrt nnde ctae 386 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOPFfset lt 2 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRE RIGF regeret 387 SENSe DBEMod OPTimization iins aei
23. 39 Impulse Response 39 Magnitude 40 Magnitude Overview Absolute aereum 41 Magnituds elatlVe etr etre rote emite dx adde P 43 Magnitude jio MEE 43 ENO cte citet edet 44 Phase 45 Phase URW aD RE eR ex a TE E 46 WO rS O 47 Result SUMINA Y E 48 Specium Capture Buffer 52 Spectrum Measurement 2 53 e 54 bue gg um 55 ueniet 56 Bit Error Rate BER A bit error rate BER measurement compares the transmitted bits with the determined symbol decision bits BER error bits number of analyzed bits As a prerequisite for this measurement the VSA application must know which bit sequences are correct i e which bit sequences may occur This knowledge must be provided as a list of possible data sequences in xml format which is loaded in the VSA application see chapter 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 133 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary
24. nue 17 Format patterns rodent onere ta 201 Highlighting 21 282 Patterns 201 ctr temere rrr ner 17 Window Configuration 4 232 Synchronization 25 141 C EY 211 Dermodulatiom epe 208 Demodulation process 100 la E aaa ee alee 211 Known data 4211 212 td 211 Remote 380 Symbol errorrat SER ceti 212 Syntax Known data Tiles 489 T Trace Export 222 Datta mode ottiene todas 222 Header information rssicon 223 Storage locallori i cierre 223 E 221 Averaging formulae icta rn einn tercera 497 Capture Buffer remote 440 Cartesian Diagrams remote 441 Configuratio aeaaea ioa a e n 219 Configuring remote control 400 Equalizer remote etienne 442 EValuatioty i uie ter vidis bcm stands 221 Export OMAt n s aeterne ee messen 223 Exporting 223 237 Exporting NEP RET 257 Measurement signal 221 oe tte B 220 Mode remote iti ti ei an ees 401 Multi Source
25. 420 IJeactlValilig disci om tenter tice enis eet 234 Multiple ModE 234 Multiple mode remote 421 420 Restoring original display 234 Single Tode aoctor 234 Single mode remote 420
26. 465 5 lt lt gt 466 5 lt lt gt 467 5 lt lt gt 467 5 lt lt gt 2 465 STATus QUEStionable MODulationn5 CONDItIOn eicere 465 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ENABle esses 466 5 lt gt E 465 STAT s QUEStionable MODu lati nsn gt 466 5 5 lt gt 00000 467 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVM PTRansition sss 467 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVM EVENIt sessi 465 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n FSK CONDition sese 465 5 lt gt aeai aii 466
27. eese 485 ASCII File Export Format for VSA 42120112 487 Known Data File Syntax 21 ns 489 gui 491 Data File Format 111 505 List of Remote Commands 512 523 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSW Vector Signal Analysis User Manual provides all the information spe cific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the VSA Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Typical applications Example measurement scenarios in which the application is frequently used Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to confi
28. ns 238 How to Perform Vector Signal 241 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 241 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements eene 243 How to Analyze the Measured Data eene nennen 252 Measurement nnana 259 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer eene 259 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK 260 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE 267 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 276 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting eese nnne nnn 276 Explanation of Error Messages eeeeeeeeeeeennnnnennnnn nnne 278 Frequently Asked Questions eese enne nennen nennen nn 287 Obtaining Technical 294 Remote Commands VS cactencccctescteueheceseteretacedenetenctenise 296 296 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 4 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 1 2
29. 17 Modulation order Known data Pattern symbols Modulation type FSK ierasts 120 MSK Emor model ae eas Modulation type MSRA Analysis siriy 181 360 Operating 134 BI 184 364 MSRA applications Capture offset 189 Capture offset remote MSRT Analysis interval 181 360 Operating mode Bc MSRT applications 189 Capture offset remote 419 Multi Source Data SOURCE 19 Multiple Measurement channels reete 12 Multiple ZOOM retener eres 234 N Next ccc eot nex etra sa cao enero duri N 227 Marker positioning Next Peak ctr p Marker POSITIONING e uci eren te notet Noise jl 120 Normalization Demodulatior 209 Offset Analysis Interval nerit 189 EVM Frequency Pattern iss QPSK QPSK symbol mapping 85 Reference level 171 174 Isesultraig6 EN ER 203 On Off Keying OOK Constellation diagram 95 OOK S
30. 180 Signal Description tnn 144 Sirigle SWeep nei tem rrr mtra hen etes 190 Trace 1 2 9 4 a 221 PR M EN 219 Trigger Offset ter tnt eei 188 Trigger Gate Config 183 Upper Level Hysteresis Window configuration eene 230 Specifics for Configulatioti uscite aseni reete 143 Spectrum Result type transformation 231 Spectrum Capture Buffer Error Fes ltUtype oreet nnt treten e reel 52 Spectrum Meas Error Result Ype eren ter P edel 53 SR see Symbol rate entm reete 13 Standards see Digital standards emm 139 Statistic count E Statistics oie te Here e Oversampling Result type transformation Status registers Descriptio irent etis 457 QUITVICIQU ue SEG have ead 463 STAT QUES POW crine ee tnr tete 320 Status reporting system siisii aiii ea 457 StdDev FORMULA ee do he e s 496 Storage location Secure ser mode ect titi ener 140 I e 140 Suffixes COMMON o Remote commands hg id A E N Swap REMOTE RE 362 DWa IG a 183 Sweep ADOMING ice e Rent Confi
31. Bit LVDS pin SDATAA P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4 P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 Signal Capture Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 366 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 367 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 366 For analog baseband or digital baseband input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 366 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement The time may be entered in s or in symbols offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the measurement time pretrigger max measurement time When using the optional Digital Baseband Interface the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See table 4 4 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 365 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger
32. aetna 186 Digital iier rtr 187 External iiit ti rein EE da REN RES 185 External GEI2 eios ino 186 Free RU sc on oerte eal aetna 185 VO POWER Rm 187 IF 186 Triggers MSRA MSRT Troubleshooting Burst Searcly ede cia ra Flow chart ares Frequently asked questions Input overload Pattern search Result display 1 Traces sieht U Units Reference level 170 174 XAS X axis y axis is hcc Updating Result display iret cci aa 192 Result display remote 397 Upper Level FHysteresis urere 217 Usable bandwidth M Result display Useful length m M 129 User filters EE 148 User mariuals ona dc 8 User QAM e de et 145 User sample rate Definiti ii 67 75 V Vector frequency o 55 Vector I Q ISesult 56 Video outpUut ttti mt a 165 349 Window configurati essesi cn tee oett re 230 231 Data SOURCE rice cer th Pe rr eec eres 231 FROMOUG cbe a rtm
33. 139 L Restore Standard FileS c ceccessescescessescesceccesececeecesseeecaccaseevaccercussareereesens 139 L Restore Pattern FileS 0 ccccccecsescescesceceescescecseseeecescesseaeceecateevancaeceesereareasens 139 Restore Factory Settings Opens a submenu that allows you to restore all standards and pattern settings on the instrument to the values predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Restore Standard Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 306 Restore Pattern Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the pattern files predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 306 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements Configuration According to Digital Standards For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 478 For detailed instructions see chapter 8 1 How to Perform VSA Accordi
34. lt gt 407 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK 407 lt gt lt gt 407 gt lt gt 407 lt gt lt gt 408 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee nnne 408 lt gt lt gt 2 408 lt gt lt gt 408 lt gt lt gt 408 lt gt lt gt 004 0000 se sen snas 408 lt gt lt gt 2 409 lt gt lt gt 409 lt gt lt gt 409 lt gt lt gt 409 lt gt lt gt 409 Analysis
35. E Defining remote Modulation Accuracy 256 Retrieving check results remote 454 Linear average dto t m nud a ma en e end 497 Lines uos ae 228 LO Level External Mixer remote control 324 154 Loading Settings 141 Low ISI filters Frequency TESPONSEC is 501 Lower Level Hysteresis rrr rete teres 217 M Magnitude Formula rre ro n P a E Ra 491 Magnitude absolute Res lt type cer en nien rnit er 40 Magnitude Absolute Result type 1er en eto cer reges 40 132 Magnitude error tte erred red 113 491 43 44 RMS peak formulae 494 495 Magnitude Overview Absolute Result TYPO 41 132 Magnitude Relative uini rene nere 43 Mapping see Symbol mappihg Mapping wizard mapwiz n Marker to e Markers Absolute peak A227 Assigned trace 211225 Configuring 1 223 COPING s ceret rre 225 Deactivating 225 Delta markers 228 General settings remote
36. si 104 425 991 x M 00 1898 19 ue2 33g E usng OOOL E a OL OH ZH 00 5 912 199912 _ _ 4 cS _ isd aundeo 06 n S 0 OW ZHI Oc 5 ZS ve cS amp eze sdvz 072 860 OW ZHI 02 INvOJesn ZS GAG ve 9L cS ye nas Meg 081 2 s S 0 OW ZHI 02 Wvo4esn cS ES MS ye1 OW cS _ eumde 06 Seo ZHIN Oc 5 8 ZS 25 I ouo dd Load N jeanyen 5 eumde 193 40 MSINO ZHW ZSV MSdc zed 1038 _ Sl dd 1030 Old dd 1930 9UON apax GZ 662 0 eumde dd 1930 40 MSINO ZHW 291 MSdc 1038 5 SUON 92272 09 01415118 9 6 40 MSINO ZHIN MSdc enig u16ue sang 19114 9je1 Buiddew 1426 10 joquiAs puepuejs Japjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings s ous e JO pJepueis SJOYI
37. 22 External Mixer Digital S tete eta Analog Baseband Input Settings netten Renan Probe TER Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S 5 82000 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is the radio frequency If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source 88 C rarterim E Input Probe Radio Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Direct Path Digital IQ High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Analog Baseband Preamplifier Input Connector B2000 Preview Spec RealImag CaptureBuffer Radio Frequency Direct Pat CE High Pass Fiker 1 9 epa tc Y IG PIeSBIBCIO ceeds REN Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 322 Input Output and Frontend Settings Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This func
38. 230 e ZOOM PUNCUOMS entree ceti nase 233 e Analysis in MSRA MSRT 235 6 1 Trace Settings The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed The Trace settings are displayed when you do one of the following Select the Analysis button from the Overview then select the vertical Traces tab e Select the TRACE key Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 6 2 Trace Export Settings on page 222 R amp S FSW K70 ay Mode Evaluation Clear Write View Blank Quick Config Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode 275741 l Const I Q Meas amp Ref Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 5 Trace 6 220 f 220 II Mcr 221 Predefined Trace Settings Quick 0 222 2 2100 04 6 nate 221 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Ttace 4 Softkeys sisse nr pee take 221 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only one trace is available Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRA
39. 5 s iecit rt ort ric ere rrr E ed 420 EXPO 345 FORMaEtDEXPort DSEPat alot ente ec vance eels Aveeno 438 FORMaEDEXPort HEADER ric er Per ori re eer 438 FORMat DEXPO 438 INITiate REEMOBS oett eret CH va prt pa eed EL ee 397 INItiate lt n gt CONMGAS 395 CONTINUOUS ae ese ce stem crs 396 INETiatesms REFS e ER PEE XE PRIM acne ed se EATUR 397 gt 5 5 398 1 lt gt 5 1 1 398 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE ns INITiatesn SEQuencer REFResh ALL one trt er enero rennen thin 397 IINITiatesnspIMMSGIaltel uoti eorr oreet 396 PR 353 INPUEAT Fenuationi AU TG E 354 Fa nET 320
40. Message Result Alignment Failed Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might 222 2 2 22 2 2 2 22 Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols 2 eene Message Sync Prefers Longer 0 2 1 0 12 2 11 Message Result Ranges R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Message Burst Not Found The Burst Not Found error message can have several causes Burst search is active but the signal is not bursted Start 0 sym 18 03 2010 09 53 45 Fig 10 1 Example for active burst search with continuous signal Solution Select Continuous Signal as the signal type For more information see Signal Type on page 149 Signal is bursted but bursts have not been captured completely The burst search can only find bursts that start and end within the capture buffer It ignores bursts that are cut off Man CapBuf 1 Start 0 sym Fig 10 2 Example for incomplete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 The current measurement is being performed on a burst that
41. Usage Event SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Configuring VSA Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS 760 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this co
42. faB IQ Imbalance j lin l je 5 1 8g B 20 10810 faB Gain Imbal g ance G Gin 20 Si G 20 88 Quadrature Error 4 8 180 0 On deg Amplitud Droop A 20 logio Ay JdB Sym FSK Modulation For FSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in section chap ter 4 5 2 FSK Modulation on page 120 The parameters of the FSK specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows Table 1 8 Evaluation of results in the FSK result summary Frequency Error RMS 1 J FREQ ERR T Peak max FREQ ERR n T Magnitude Error RMS 1 MAG_ERR a Tp Y Peak max MAG_ERR n T FSK Deviation Error A ERR rrr A yeas x per B 1 per Estimated FSK deviation error Hz FSK Measurement Deviation A MEAS Aygas B Estimated FSK deviation of the meas signal Hz FSK Reference Deviation A REF FSK reference deviation as entered by the user Hz Carrier Frequency Error fo j E The carrier frequency error of the measured signal Hz Carrier Frequency Drift _ 2 z T The drift in the carrier frequency of the measured signal Hz Sym d A 6 3 Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary The statistical evaluation
43. o rt teo n De D 207 BI 125 F rm la 495 Carrier frequency error POM mr PEL 495 erae 168 Analog Baseband B71 40 teat Ua d esa cb io IEP SIZE T Channel bandwidth MSRA MSRT titt tetti tcs 135 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay A aet 23 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude RY DG eod eR M ext 24 Clock rate PNE 75 Closing Channels remote 2 424 4 303 Windows remote seen 425 428 Synchronization 211 Compatible onc recen eec Ur tette ned da edes 198 Compensation 2 204 206 cione 112 PREM O16 E E 380 Constellation Frequency result type iiini 24 Constellation eerte eer t E nes Rotated Result type Constellation points Symbol MAPPING eret ott 7T Continue single sweep SOflKGy eee 191 Continuous Signal 149 Continuous sweep SOflKGy reete re nete tees 190 Conventions SCOPI comimiands n etre rrr rrt cte 297 Conversion loss External Mixer Remote control 327 328 Conversion loss tables Available remote control
44. Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Standard on page 141 Configuring VSA 11 5 Configuring VSA 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Signal DSSCHPN OM EUER 308 e Input Output and Frontend 8 2000 320 Signal amp aplile 360 e T ggetig Measureimefits rece p rite tri At EE 363 SWECDS 22 ecce i E hiss eset RARE DR UR AUR een naan 369 Configuring Bursts amd ern ea anh agno Rena dd 370 Defining the Result Rarige ete n Eco ETE 377 e IDamodt latiori PARU IAE X 380 e Measurement Filter 5 nennen 388 e Defining the Evaluation Rage deter et t ette Rer cene 390 e Adjusting Settings Automatically issis irois ee 391 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes pattern and burst detection and the calculation of the ideal reference signal Manual configuration of the signal description is described in chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 144 irene a a 308 Sra ON TON 317 Modulation The modulation settings va
45. L D 1 D D 20 eee o b al 60 80 gp 4 4 4 04 08 08 12 14 1 6 Frequency in 0 2 100 EDGE Wide Pulse Shape 4 gp 4 7 4 D q D D 4 4 4 Frequency in Q Data File Format iq tar Half Sine Magnitude dB D 4 D D J 1 D 1 i D 1 D 1 D i E 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 18 18 2 Frequency in fsymbol Linearized GMSK Magnitude dB Frequency in f ymbol A 7 VQ Data File Format iq tar data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar ig tar file contains data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard arch
46. Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 169 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 169 Note In MSRA MSRT mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master For MSRA MSRT applications only the query command is available Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 169 11 5 2 9 Amplitude Settings Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on 320 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 394 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel 352 lt gt lt gt 352 SENSe DDEMod PRESSURE EVel Huc cedere rate eet ege Eee qu ec 352
47. gt m O l O gt One O gt gt O k O O le e O e O Oje e e O O O Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM DDEM SYMB to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 4 Symbols on page 441 3 2 33 Vector Frequency The instantenous frequency of the source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 are drawn and connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Vector Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Cinw Fig 3 23 Result display for Vector Frequency User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 55 Result Types in VSA Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FORM COVF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 441 3 2 34 Vector I Q The c
48. lt gt 444 lt gt lt gt 5 2 445 lt gt lt gt 5 445 lt gt lt gt 5 445 lt gt lt gt 5 446 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRIft esses 447 lt gt lt gt 447 lt gt lt gt 5 448 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic F SK RDEViation lt gt lt gt 5 lt gt lt gt 5
49. AA date tea es bnc d x eode 428 LACO E M 429 TYPE 429 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow 2 query lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt Return values lt NewWindowName gt Example Usage Manual operation Configuring the Result Display LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH SYMB Adds a Symbol Table display to the right of window 1 Query only See Capture Buffer
50. lt gt lt gt 0 359 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 359 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue esses 359 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing eene 360 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command sets the x and y axis of the statistics measurement to measurement dependent default values Usage Event Manual operation See Default Settings on page 178 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram x and y axis To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted To get valid results you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Parameters ONCE Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 178 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt lt StatNofColumns gt This command defines the number of columns fo
51. nei SENSe DDEMod PRESetRLEVSel crt ene riy tek i ic rec E TR EFE ERE EE PERSA ISENS amp IDDE MOQ SENSe DDEMod PRESEt S TANdard retire rt tn rn 306 SENSe DDEMO d PSK F ORMAL at rrr riae rre rona rin repe Yo rne EE E e ER CY E ER ER EXER ERR RAE 313 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate SENSe DDEMod QAM NS Tate tho tre reet nth i SENSE DDE MOJ QPSK FORMAL oc scires mereretur Cre tees prever oder E egi de E Fue SENSe DDEMod RLEENGth AU TO SENSe DDEMod REENGIth VALUS rnt t ent SENSE eerren SENSe DDEMod SEARGI BURSEAUTQO ierra reden rrr cenar t C 5 5 5 2 5 5 5 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimun SENSe DBEMod SEARGIUBURSEMOPDE citi r
52. to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 3 2 25 Phase Error Displays the phase error of the measuremente signal with respect to the reference sig nal as a function of symbols over time PHASE _ERR t PHASE yras PHASE pep t with and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 44 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 26 1 Phase Error Clrw Fig 3 16 Result display Phase Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 CALC FORM PHAS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 Phase Wrap The phase or argument of the signal the display is limited to the phase value range of 180 180 Phase yras Z MEAS with and Tp the
53. 352 IN PUE GAINS nexu 353 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 170 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 171 SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 353 The command requires the
54. 365 1 366 lt gt 1 2 2 72 11114 06 366 TRIGger SEQuence EEVellP POWOF ere lap on er 366 367 SEQuence SLOPE 367 SOURCE svrsi eed aad ccs nas cuc eret eee a ee EE oes v RR 367 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 365 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Configuring VSA
55. 4 5 6 COMMON Suffixes cuiii eee iren naut 301 Activating Vector Signal 301 Digital Standards internen irr nexa 305 Configuring RR uaa 308 Performing a 394 e 400 Configuring the Result Display esee 422 Retrieving Results iieri cree teni rina asas 435 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results eee 455 Status Reporting System 1 reae ua Ape eras 457 Commands for Compatibility eese nnne nennen 468 Programming Exampl es 2 cenae renean innt suia 469 p e 477 477 Predefined Standards and 478 Predefined Measurement and TxFilters
56. Equalizer M Data 0 6 MSRA MSRT mode Res lt types e e ugs Error messages Explanation ite tte fre tits 278 Error model 122 QAM eit eed eae Fen 110 Error vector Date SOUICe e eio edi reir radio 17 Definition 112 491 Result tyDes eden mne trea eerte etr agn 17 Error Vector Magnitude EVM DEMHON ecc FOMU rat e Result type RMS peak formulae Errors IF OVED iia cit Eo osea Estimation Algorithims aeo ten rete nere enne 110 FSK 123 Points per symbol 111 131 210 QAM e ie 111 m 111 Evaluation iter ertet eat 191 Specific LANGE nre rrr nete rae 192 M 221 Evaluation methods Data SOUICe eee eere n nd etre ree eta 15 M 423 Evaluation range Configulatioti creto titre rer 215 Configuration remote 390 t 129 130 E
57. Gain Distortion Analyzer 0 01 02 03 04 Rew 05 06 07 08 The effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions on a 64 signal are illustrated table 4 19 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The second column shows the signal after scaling Table 4 20 Amplitude transfer functions Amplitude transfer function transmitter Amplitude transfer function analyzer Mtglbute Tiatster function Tars meien 08 05 04 02 42 04 Output input P ower 009 EL 2 9 x 2 DM 9 6 4 2 0 Hepat Pamer lag Tranefer Function Analyzer b m Output Power Input P ower lag o e 48 2 30 8 4 4 2 0 heut Power log A logarithmic display of the amplitude transfer functions is shown in table 4 20 The analyzer trace is shifted against the transmitter trace by this scale factor Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Phase Distortion Table 4 21 Effect of nonlinear phase distortions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortion analyzer Phase Distortion Tranarm ter 0 01 02 03 04 06 06 0 06 Phase Dianon Analyzer 0
58. 1 Q 1 D 1 D D 1 D i o I i i 5 i oz AL e T 2 4 B Rp 4 r i i D D D D 1 1 1 lt 1 1 D D 2 4 2 4 d e i e 1 D 1 D 1 D D D M E i e 1 1 1 D 1 i D D D D L IN IN 4 d 4 4 e D 1 D 1 1 1 i D D i D 1 1 n c e e ce c ce e eo e N N e co e i T T 1 T Y gp gp apnyubeyy f Frequency in 25 H D8P SK Wide See eee eee eee ee ee eee ee ee 20 D 1 T D 4 a 4 d 1 1 Li dae we hw e 1 1 LU LU 1 1 1 T 4 4 4 5 4 T LU 1 D 1 1 LU f LU N LU 1 D R 4 L 1 LI LU LU LU co See ee LU LU 1 D L LU odo ue D D L T L
59. 9 OH E 008 220 OH ZHN v8 9 dd9 1 19102 5 OH VMI3L _ 0 0 sng 992 3 vHlal S 0 OH ZH 8L MSdOG vr i _ ES yullumoq Oud Vaal snonunuoo 0 0 sng 9 LS vHl3l S 0 OH ZH 8L MSdOG v i o4 71081 Wvoc HSH 3904 esna 9pIM C 3903 esingepiM 2 00S1 WvoOZ adeys esind 3903 usu wv 5224 Y 0 241 YSH 3903 3903 ZH SZE 926 022 3903 ME asing LOSL WvOZ 3903 3903 esind 22 edeus 49 U99 0051 WvoZz asind 8908 usu wv S 7A4L v 241 3904 3903 ZH SZE 926 022 3903 Joy Buidde y 1829 u16ue sang 19114 9je1 10 joquiAs uone npo N puepuejs Jopjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings s ous e Jo OU SJOYIP si 425 991 x 2 poo IN Gig yoo 8 7982 Z 01jsung 0 82 90 MSINS ZHN A
60. Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Configuring VSA Parameters lt Average gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the fil
61. Digital VQ remote ien ette Unit digital remote G Gain distortion j m 118 Gain imbalance 115 Effect FORMU E EE 494 Preconditions for measurement 116 265 GSM Programming example rennen ntn 471 H Handover frequency External Mixer Remote control 325 Hardware settings Bispldyed RUE 13 Harmonics External Mixer Remote control 327 High pass filter Remote RF input Hysteresis Lower Auto level 217 TWIG GOR ead 188 Upper Auto level oo retten e tette rt 217 bandwidth Usable pete 60 183 correlation threshold PattertiSeatelt eniro op eene 196 data Export file binary data description Export file parameter description 245 Exporting remote eee teet ione rne 238 Importing Iraporting remote eee e 455 Importing Exporting retten tens 236 Maximum bandwidth eres 67 Sample ode eerte re 67 imbalance eot ert erster 206 Definition Formula offset Origi
62. POm 185 L External TNE 13 0 oss caves 185 d 017 Mc 186 LIR POWE X 186 cio eese ea Gael 186 o1 187 L Digital LUN 187 OVO 188 MOGE OffS Gb ec pe e ese pet 188 188 188 18 e rete unen re 189 POG 189 Tigger 189 ES 189 Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 188 Note The External Trigger 1 s
63. When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 394 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Performing a Measurement Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 217 SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example Parameters State ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without over
64. tert ttd eoi tt tnc ne eerte en te 365 TRIGger SEQuence LL EVel BBPOWeLr tnter erre retreat a ena er he Fe iot 366 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower TRIGger SEQuerice LE EVel IOQPOWer trt trt etre e trt tere rete eene etg 367 TRIGger SEQuence LL EVel EXTernalsports 21th tro eret retenir tnt erret 366 TRIGger sEQuernce roSCciloscope S OUPIiIrig cnr toe orte ttd ee epe teet scu erre pen 348 TRIG Ger SEQUENCE SLOBe 367 TRIGge r SEQuence SOURCe irr pm n e pen t e Exe oc x e en rege ea ae 367 Index Symbols 4ASK Constellation diagratri uc ico trn th erts 95 8PSK Constellation diagratr ucc trn rrt 80 16APSK Constellation diagram ccc cott ree 96 95 ile FORMU A we 496 A Aborting WEG ez 190 191 ACIDE COUPIING eta cec s 154 172 Activating VSA remote n rete cote anes 301 Active probe MICFODULEORI rto ret rn trente 161 Alignment VADE 163 Result range Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 173 PRU 169 Configuration remote asriga 351 Distortion effect 2 Settings certnm vereri e Amplitude droop 209 rrr eae rtr ree 206 Definition Formula Analog Baseband Amiplit de sett
65. Burst and Pattern Configuration Auto In single sweep mode captures the data once and evaluates it In continuous sweep mode captures data continuously for each evaluation the average is calculated over the last 10 capture sets moving average Manual In single sweep mode captures data until the defined number of evaluations have been performed In continuous sweep mode captures data continuously if trace averaging is selected the average is calculated over the defined number of capture sets moving average Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue on page 369 Select Result Rng Selects the result range from the capture buffer that you want to evaluate This function is available in single sweep mode only By default the application shows the results over all result ranges that have been cap tured in the signal capturing process and are in the R amp S FSW s memory By selecting a range number you can evaluate a specific result range e g a particular burst The range depends on the number of result ranges you have captured previously For more information refer also to chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 126 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC on page 369 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA or MSRT applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active applic
66. GAL Gulate n DELTamarkersm TISAGCe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X GALGCulate n DELTamarker m X ABSolute n rrr tnnt nnn tired dua GALGCulate n DELTamarkersm X RELative eoa tr reet nte rr rhe e EY EE ERR ERR 436 CALC latesn gt BB usnm M 405 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe GALCulate n ELINsstartstop S erre neni ttti rire reati i ER GALCulatespn s EbINsstartstop VALUE uice tenorem tr rre eh npn bene ba Fey eh terea pi eere nee pate repas lt gt gt ENTEVE Bess CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation COMPensation GALCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence RELative iini tenen ein CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue 52th iiia CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType STATe seen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt RESUIt m lt gt 11 5 lt gt 11 2
67. ree tern ata Piece 469 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation C OMPensation lt RefDevComp gt This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculat ing the frequency error for FSK modulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer remote programs use SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 386 Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue lt Normalize gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset and the compensation of amplitude droop on or off Programming Examples Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the more specific SENSe DDEMod NORMalize commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 5 8 Demodulation Settings on page 380 Setting parameters lt Normalize gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF No compensation for amplitude droop nor offset ON Compensation for amplitude droop and offset enabled RST 1 SENSe DDEMod SBANd lt SidebandPos gt This command selects the sideband for the demodulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the SENS SWAP IQ command for new
68. Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Carrier Frequency evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current value 1 Error in mean value 2 Error in peak value 3 15 These bits are not used 11 11 7 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n IQRHO Register This register comprises information about limit violations in offset or RHO evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RHO value 1 Error in mean RHO value 2 Error in peak RHO value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current 1 offset value 6 Error in mean 1 offset value Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 7 Error in peak 1 offset value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 8 STATus QUESTionable MODu
69. Input Output and Frontend Settings Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 352 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 352 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog base
70. Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 The R amp S FSW VSA application supports the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 For details on prerequisites and restrictions see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual The optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension is configured in the B2000 tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B2000 option is installed Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the B2000 Config softkey The following settings are available for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 161 LEE GG m 163 General Settings General settings are configured in the Settings subtab of the B2000 tab R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Eur o ng M Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes 82000 Settings B2000 State TCPIP Address or Computer name Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel f Hooo oooga The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box For details see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual B2000 State Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active When the B2000
71. Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Overview 00000 Std A SR 384 MRe Vector Signal Analysis Modulation Input Capture Length Symbol Rate Center Freq Sample Rate Tx Filter Ref Level Trigger Mode Signal Type A Trigger Offset Input Frontend Signal Capture Result Length Alignment Cut Result Ranges Start Stop Display Config Lu Specific Settings for In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 144 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 5 5 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 152 Signal Capture including Triggering See chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 Burst Pattern Configuration See chapter 5
72. essen 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan STATe lt gt 11 2 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan RESult lt gt 11 5 1 lt gt 11 lt gt 11 5 454 lt gt 11 5 412 lt gt 11 415 lt gt 11 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN RESUIt essen 454 lt gt 11 5 413 lt gt 11 2 415 lt gt 1 2 2
73. to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 3 2 29 Result Summary The Modulation Accuracy results in a table For details on the parameters see chap ter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 57 Basis of evaluation The majority of the values that are displayed in the Result Summary are calculated over the Evaluation Range see chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 215 They are evaluated according to the setting of the Display Points Sym parameter For example if Display Points Symbol is 1 only the symbol instants contribute to the result displayed in the result summary Table 3 2 Results calculated over the evaluation range PSK MSK QAM FSK EVM Frequency Error MER Magnitude Error Phase Error Power User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 48 Result Types in VSA PSK MSK QAM Magnitude Error FSK Rho Power The following results that are based on internal estimation algorithms see chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 110 are calculated over the Estimation range see also chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 111 Table 3 3 Results calculated over the estimation range PSK MSK QAM FSK Carrier Frequency Error Symbol Rate Error FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error Offset FSK Measurement Dev
74. 2 305 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA MSRT Master channel is selected Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 303 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 303 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional I Q Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer
75. 403 CALCulate n MARKer me STATe 2 22 c itte ue cU ua anc 404 lt gt lt gt 404 GAL Gulate ms MARKOFSETISIN das itus sect pnta nare oc ea nere DRRDRi sn aei Rw daa 404 CAL Culatesms DELTamarkersmo OFF cet oe ab tnn ta ce debe REI 404 lt gt lt gt 5 01 1 daa 405 lt gt lt gt 405 Culatesmes DELTamarkersmysX sue det 405 CAL Culate lt n amp DEL 2 405 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt MarkerCoupling gt With this command markers between several screens can be coupled i e use the same x value All screens can be linked with the marker x value scaled in symbols or time except those showing the capture buffer If several capture buffer measurements are visible their markers are coupled too Setting parameters lt MarkerCoupling gt OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See C
76. Fig 5 3 Demodulation settings for PSK MSK and QAM modulation User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 205 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Demodulation amp Measurement Filter LI E Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter LS Compensate for Carrier Frequency Drift FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error Equalizer State Mode Filter Length Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 21 888 MHz Stop 21 888 MHz Fig 5 4 Demodulation settings for FSK modulation rr rr Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values Note Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM val ues Offset default on User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 206 Demodulation Settings Imbalance Amplitude Droop default on Symbol Rate Error required to display the SRE in the Result Summary Channel default on Note that channel distortion can only be determined if the equalizer is on see State on page 207 Thus compensation can only be disabled if the equalizer is on By default channel compensation is enabled to improve accuracy of the error results If compensation is disabled the EVM is calculated from the original input signal with channel distortions
77. a User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 34 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 13 o This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but Frequency Error Absolute on page 33 1 Freq Error Rel 49 sym Fig 3 11 Result display Frequency Error Relative Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 435 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 3 2 15 Frequency Response Group Delay The Frequency Response Group Delay of the equalizer is the derivation of phase over frequency It is a measure of phase distortion User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 35 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 GroupDelay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page
78. lt gt lt gt 2 01 1 20002 0 4046 6 409 lt gt lt gt 410 lt gt lt gt 410 lt gt lt gt 5 410 lt gt lt gt 51 5 411 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt Th
79. n 170 174 MANUS Asc 170 174 Reference position X axis Y axis d Feferernc sigrial certat 111 Demodulation 5 eoi cha eet 100 Evaluating Generating Reference value X XIS istius ee A sd 178 pco 177 Refresh MeV ot 191 Refreshing MSRA appliCatloris ccepit tt 192 MSRA applications remote MSRE applications cnr irn np t teens MSRT applications remote TE 192 Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean values GapitaliZatiOIm tr ero Character data Data blocks m N meric Values 21er tuta i aras Optional n nant ti os on teens 298 Parameters ai ignem ES SUFIXES cto van das Resetting ISFInput protectione 320 Restoring Channel settings rte 143 Factory settings Patten files erret repe Standard Result display Configuration remote Troubleshooting retten Result displays Data SOURCES or errare terae retire rele 15 FROSUIE length nere rente e tante BIEN Known data zd QAM mod lationi 21 eee 90 acp 202 Result range Lentes E pere rediere 129
80. 406 Mil ATi e dra 227 Next minimum Next peak Peak ath 227 POSITIONING tre 227 Querying position remote 437 Retrieving values remote 436 Search settings 225 Settings remote 403 State us 224 Type 225 X value 224 Matched filter 61 ites tienen editis tue s 227 Maximizing Windows remote Ee eae 422 Mean cede 496 Meas 4 Ref Data SOURCE Ry ole 16 Result types 16 MEAS filter 61 Meas only if burst was found 194 Measurement bandwidth 61 Measurement channel Creating remote eie vi ee Deleting remote Duplicating remote Querying remote Renaming remote 5 Replacing Measurement example Burst GSM EDGE Signals 267 Cont n ous QPSK 260 Measurement examples Burst GSM EDGE signal remote Continuous QPSK signal remote 470 Measurement filler oen ire edet 62 Alpha BT 214 Configuration 213 Configuration remote 388 Demodulation process 100 Enabling ee 214 etr rem
81. Ee e hx ed uda 387 SENSe IDDEMOod SEARCh PAT Terni YNGO AD TO iter eco irure unen eure 388 0 5 5 388 SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE lt EvmCalc gt This command defines the calculation formula for EVM Setting parameters lt EvmCalc gt Manual operation Configuring VSA SIGNal SYMBol MECPower MACPower SIGNal Calculation normalized to the mean power of the reference sig nal at the symbol instants SYMBol Calculation normalized to the maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants MECPower Calculation normalized to the mean expected power of the mea surement signal at the symbol instants MACPower Calculation normalized to the maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants RST SIGNal See Normalize EVM to on page 209 SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet lt EVMOffsetState gt ConfigureS the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results for offset QPSK Setting parameters lt EVMOffsetState gt Manual operation ON OFF 1 0 ON VSA application compensates the delay of the Q component with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period OFF the VSA appli
82. FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace export file FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data not raw I Q data MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 AverageEVM Save the detected symbol values x values are not exported with trace data Results MMEM STOR5 TRAC 1 AverageEVM Save the EVM values window 5 to an ascii file Results 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard The following example describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in chapter 9 3 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals on page 267 Programming Examples Note that although this example uses the settings from a predefined digital standard the configuration is changed to demonstrate the possibilities of the VSA application A measurement that is performed strictly according to the standard requires much less programming efforts The rising and falling edges of a GSM burst are analyzed using the following result range settings Result Range Evaluation Range Length CERT IESU 200 sym 738 462 us Reference Capture Pattern Waveform Alignment 4 Right Offset Symbol Number at Burst Start 10 sym Visualization RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement ch
83. For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors on page 112 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset on page 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance on page 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop on page 386 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel on page 386 Compensate for FSK If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values Carrier Frequency Drift e FSK Deviation Error e Symbol Rate Error For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors on page 124 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift on page 386 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 386 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 387 Equalizer Settings The equalizer can compensate for a distorted transmission of the input signal or improve accuracy in estimating the reference signal For details see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 107 State Equalizer Settings Activates or deactivates the equalizer to compensate for a distorted channel Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe on page 384 Mode Equalizer Settings Defines the operating mode of the equalizer Normal Determines the filter values from the difference between the ideal reference signal and the measured signal Normal
84. Normal Evaluation in time domain X axis displays time values Display and Window Configuration Spectrum Evaluation in frequency domain X axis displays frequency values The usable I Q bandwidth is indica ted in the display Statistics Statistical evaluation histogram X axis displays former y values Y axis displays statistical informa tion Trace 1 the probability of occurrence of a certain value is plotted against the value Trace 2 the cumulated probability of occurance is plotted against the value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe on page 430 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 433 Highlight Symbols If enabled the symbol instants are highlighted as squares in the window for measured and reference signals in time normal display as well as error displays Only evaluations that are based on symbols e g constellations or traces support this function Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe SYMBol on page 435 Display Points Sym Defines the number of display points that are displayed per symbol If more points per symbol are selected than the defined Sample Rate the additional points are interpola ted for the display The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes For more information see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Sym bol on page 131 Note If the capture buffer is used as the signal sourc
85. PEDE ud et teers CE we SENSe DDEMod EQUalizet RESE 1 rrr rne hi rr CI EX ERR RAE SENS DBEMod EQUalizer SAVE cscs 2 EE eO recta eee SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer S ERG 5 bot i ce eerie ree Ser E D HERR E eI EIU anes SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa iis SENS amp DDEMOd FIETerES e itc tente cope tu dE Re hoch SENSe IDDBEMOGFORMAGal tere ret pe pasa cn m apa VERE HE MERECE YER SENS6 DBDEMod F SKINS T le triti e e e Pe e uu n HE s b nates SENS BDEMOG FSYNGAU TO i nie SENSe IDBEMOG FSYNCG DEVOl n rrr paier ter t Er cope ER ta E Geena heats SENSe IDDEMOdQ ESYNG RESUlt ite dece t ec bt e t e det 385 SENSe DDEMOG ESYNG MODE onec icu uae Meats 385 SENSe IDDBEMOQG KDATA STATO ci baie reri LEE dei RUNS 385 SENSe DDEMOGQ KDATa a 386 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CAT AlOG 312 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue SENSe IDDEMOd MFlEter ALEPEla e retta e v e
86. Points per symbol Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis y per div 0 22000000000000003 Y axis range per division Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 Y axis reference position Start of ResultRange in Capture Buffer 6400 sym Number of symbol at which exported capture buffer range begins Header section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace Meas Meas Signal Meas Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 800 Data section for individual trace Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Saying Measured values lt x value gt lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt is only available with detector AUTOPEAK and contains the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Header section for individual trace Trace 2 Next trace in same window Meas Known Data File Syntax Description File contents Meas Signal Meas Description Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demo
87. channel the x axis range is from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 Eye O Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Fig 3 6 Result display Eye Diagram Imag Q Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM QEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 29 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 10 Eye Diagram Real I 3 2 11 The eye pattern of the inphase 1 channel the x axis value range is from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 1 Eye I Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Fig 3 7 Result display Eye Diagram Real I Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM IEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 Frequency Absolute The instantaneous frequency of the signal source the absolute v
88. 4 80 L 100 14 16 18 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in f ymbol Rectangular 20 S 1 8 1 6 1 4 1 2 feymbol 0 8 0 6 0 4 8 Sere Cee ee Cee eee M 4 2 0 240 60 80 100 gp apnyiubepy Frequency ISI Filters Low The following frequency responses are obtained when using a low ISI measurment fil ter and the Transmit filter indicated in the title of each diagram APCO25 CAFM 4 4 20 N N i aaa D D i 1 m uim mm sys seen quen m Sse 1 1 D D D D 1 D 1 1 D 1 i 4 4 e 4 e 1 D 1 i rr 1 D 1 0 i D zi io Coed x 4 4 H E io NC i D ta c D D 1 D meme Jae L 4 gt Ve
89. 4499 Frequency Error Relative 34 Frequency Relative erre terne 32 Frequency Response Group Delay 230 Frequency Response Magnitude 2286 Frequency Response Phase 37 Impulse Response Magnitude 38 Impulse Response Phase 4599 Impulse Response Real Imag 39 Magnitude Absolute 1 2 re ren 40 Magnitude Error Magnitude Overview Absolute Magnitude Relative M as amp Ref Jii ace en tette rho od RR rns Modulation acc ragcy eerte rnnt Modulation errors Multi Source Overview Phase Error Phase Unwrap cud Phase Wrap i tritt f Rana Real Imag etit Result Summary SCGPlIiparatmieters Spectrum Capture Buffer Error 52 Spectrum Meas Error 52 59 Symbol Table 2 54 Symbols sud Vector Frequency S T M 56 Results Retrieving remote Updating the display Updating the display remote RF attenuation AUTO gs Manual Overload protection remote 320 beh asec eed ERES 320 322 RF overrange External
90. Calculate Threshold Find Next Rising amp Falling Edge Calculate Acceptable Burst Lengths Burst Length Okay Add to Burst List Fig 4 48 Burst search algorithm 4 4 2 19 Pattern Search The I Q pattern search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped The main benefit of the pattern search is that it enables an alignment of the result range to the pattern Furthermore this stage can function as a filter If the burst search and pattern search are switched on and the parameter Meas Only If Pattern Symbols Correct is set to true only bursts with the correct pattern are demodulated see Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 196 During the pattern search stage the capture buffer is searched for an pattern by trying different time and frequency hypotheses The pattern is generated inter nally based on the specified symbol number of the pattern and the signal description R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics i e modulation scheme and transmit filter The pattern search can also be refer red to as the waveform An 1 pattern is considered detected if the correlation met ric i e the correlation value between the ideal pattern and capture buffer exceeds a specified I Q Correlation Threshold see Correlation Threshold on page 196 If the burst search is switched on the pattern search only searches the pattern in bursts pr
91. Data File Format iq tar The following abbreviations are commonly used in the description of the R amp S FSW K70 option Abbreviation Meaning See section FSK Frequency Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted in the fre quency Frequency Shift Keying FSK ISI Inter symbol Interference ISI free demodulation Demodulation structure in which the signal is no longer influenced by adjacent symbols at the deci sion instants after signal adapted filtering System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MEAS filter Measurement Filter Weighting filter for the measure ment System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MSK Minimum Shift Keying Modulation mode Minimum Shift Keying MSK NDA Demodulator Non Data Aided Demodulator Demodulation without any knowl edge of the sent data contents Demodulation and Algorithms PSK Phase Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information lies within the phase or within the phase transitions Phase Shift Keying PSK QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted both in the amplitude and phase Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM Predefined Standards and Settings Abbreviation Meaning See section RMS Root Mean Square Averaging RMS Quantities RX filter Receive Filter System Theo
92. Example Example Manual operation Configuring VSA MSK PSK QAM QPSK FSK ASK APSK UQAM QPSK Quad Phase Shift Key PSK Phase Shift Key MSK Minimum Shift Key QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation FSK Frequency Shift Key ASK Amplitude Shift Keying APSK Amplitude Phase Shift Keying UQAM User defined modulation loaded from file see SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 316 RST PSK SENS DDEM FORM QAM See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 See Modulation Type on page 145 See Load User Modulation on page 146 SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate lt FSKNstate gt This command defines the demodulation of the FSK modulation scheme Setting parameters lt FSKNstate gt Manual operation 21418 2 2FSK 4 4FSK 8 8FSK RST 2 See Modulation Order on page 146 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog This command queries the names of all mappings that are available for the current modulation type and order A mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols Return values lt Mappings gt Example Example Usage Manual operation A comma separated list of strings with one string for each map ping name SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalo
93. SENSe IBDEMOGQ MEIBEter AU TQ aei Ero tetto est c a SENSe IDDEMOGC MEIE terNAME cott redii ri HERE FERE nase SENSe DDEMOQd MEIEter U SER 5 122 e d E e d itl Ree d eee SENSe IBDEMOGQ MElIkter SENS DDEMOd MSK F OR SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop SENSe DDEMod NORWMalize CF DRIft 5 12 1er ota tren tte ER SENSe DBEMod NORMalize GFIANEiel s trainee con epa eo alere RM SEX EYE SENSe DDEMod NORWMalize FDERTOE ettet eroe cnr ped e teo XO Rs 5 2 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQO nre reor AE cas 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERTOt nct rte tu te Pn tpe nca n 387 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue SENSE DDEMOG OPTIMIZALOMN SENSe DDEMOd PRATO cr thy tr
94. SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO lt AutoPattSearch gt This command links the pattern search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as patterned pattern search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoPattSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on page 196 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold lt CorrelationLev gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold for pattern matching in percent A high level means stricter matching Setting parameters lt CorrelationLev gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 100 0 RST 90 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 196 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that the measurement is performed only if the measurement was synchronous to the selected sync pattern The command is available only if the pattern search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 374 Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt MEAS SYNC MEAS The measurement is performed independently of successful synchronization SYNC The measured values are displayed and considered in the error evaluation only if the set sync pattern was found Bursts with a wrong sync pattern sync not found are ignored If an invalid or no sync pattern is found the measurement waits and resumes running only when a valid
95. SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 The following commands are required to use the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 For details on prerequisites and restrictions see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual See also the command for configuring triggers while using the optional 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling page 348 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to configuring the 2 GHz bandwidth extension EXPort WAVeform DISPlayolf 2 2 eei etapa secto ebat ie 345 5 5 345 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe 346 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE sss 346 5 0
96. See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 396 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt This command queries the first value of the x axis in the specified window in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note using the CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet com mand the burst is shifted in the diagram the x axis thus no longer begins on the left at 0 symbols but at a selectable value Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP This command queries the last value of the x axis in the specified window in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note If the burst is shifted using the CALC TRAC ALIG commands the x axis no lon ger begins at 0 symbols on the left but at a user defined value Example CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the screen display CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG CENT Position the burst at the center of the screen DISP TRAC X STOP Queries the stop
97. lt ResultLength gt 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 lt Data gt 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 7 Data 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 77 Data 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 177 717 717 111 615 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 Data 341 366 632 073 607 6 A 6 1 Formulae 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 67 Data lt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Formulae e Trace based Evaluatioris 2 5 corrente rtt cette tit a ieee etd d da 491 e Result Summary Evaluations 2 eniin ire edad eee dain 493 e Statistical Evaluations for the Result 496 ccce eere terno tene enn han 497 e Analytically Calculated 2 recen adnate 497 e Standard Speciflo Filt ts 1n e ect oer Ee Aa 498 Trace based Evaluations The trace based evaluations all take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t
98. oci seis dietas 16 rr error vemos Cen nde utm me ues 17 Ern ot VECON M 17 Modulation EOS seins cet teet ct edo E t e ed b rede elves 17 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 15 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Modulation ACCURACY Asch awe et aA ceed een ee es 18 xoig PER 18 19 Capture Buffer The captured data In capture buffer result diagrams the result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar 3 Mag CaptureBuffer ei Clr 8000 sym Fig 3 1 Result ranges for a burst signal Note You can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges using Select Result Rng function and analyze the individual result ranges in separate windows You can change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging the blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active the capture buffer is restricted to 256 000 samples thus all data is included in one single range The default result type is Magnitude Absolute The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 chapter 3 2 22 Magnitude Overview Absolute on page 41 chapter 3 2
99. 1 ore Pe 369 SENS COUNI MALUS udi utres onsec pe utu tro ttu 369 SENSE SWEep CODNEGCBIRBRJGDL aa eiue coiere a e x c ea ies 370 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURSt CALC lt SelResRangeNr gt Sets the result range to be displayed after a single sweep e g a burst number Setting parameters SelResRangeNr numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 1 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Select Result Rng on page 192 SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue lt SweepCount gt This command sets the statistics count For more information see Statistic Count on page 191 11 5 6 11 5 6 1 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt SweepCount gt numeric value 0 activates Auto mode numeric value gt 0 Activates Manual mode and sets the statistics count to the cor responding number Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 191 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent lt Counter gt This command queries the current statistics counter value which indicates how many result ranges have been evaluated For results that use the capture buffer as a source the number of used capture buffers can be queried Setting parameters lt Counte
100. 214 Predefinedi iis aetna th axils 214 486 Type ine 214 User defined enirdi dtc Poetis s 214 Measurement ranges Comparison reda haeo Measurement signal Eval atilig retenir rmn 221 Measurement time Auto SENGE eii 217 Microbutton Rs 161 Min Gap Length 194 Min max values d 177 Minimum oes 1227 Marker positioning 227 LS 227 Minimum shift keying MSK Symbol MAPPING 89 gt Key nem ModAcc Limits Modulation Configuration 144 Display 13 Errors FSK 124 Inverted remote 362 Inverted I Q 183 Mapping 147 146 Remote 308 Symbol Rate 147 2 145 WSer detined e ci 97 Modulation accuracy Date T E 18 Individual results 2 treten 51 Limit checking 228 Limit checking enabling 220 Limit lines remote 411 Limits Lie 256 Result ypes T 18 Modulation Error Ratio MER 113 Modulation errors 110 112 Data SUCS TER 17 Formula 494 PSK QAM MSK 440 e
101. 454 lt gt 11 5 413 lt gt 11 415 lt gt 11 454 gt 22 nennen 413 lt gt 11 415 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan RESult 2 454 lt gt 11 5 2 413 lt gt 11 415 lt gt 11 5 2 454 lt gt 11 5 413 lt gt 11 416 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURYrent RESult 0 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan RESUIt
102. Comment Remove from Standard All Patterns Prefix Show Compatible _ 5 EDGE_TSCO EDGE_TSC7 Pattern Search On Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Standard Patterns selecting an assigned 198 Removing patterns from a standard crier reae vere 198 Adding patterns to a stadald ec a ret rae kiere 198 Displaying available 2 198 oio Mee 198 L Show Compatible Show All 198 EE 198 5212 T 199 D I 199 SLUG 199 lupos 1 e 199 ciuem 199 Burst and Pattern Configuration Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern The Standard Patterns are the patterns assigned to the currently selected standard You can add existing patterns to the standard or remove patterns already assigned to the standard The highlighted pattern is currently selected for pattern search Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 374 Removing patterns from a standard Removes the assignment of the selected patterns to the standard The patterns are removed from the Standard Patterns list but not deleted Remote com
103. Frequency Response Phase Phase of the frequency response of the current equalizer Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 mum EP EL INN NCC SS UU aq User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 37 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 18 CALC FORM UPH to define the unwrapped phase result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442 Impulse Response Magnitude The Impulse Response Magnitude shows the magnitude of the equalizer filter in the time domain 3 ImpRespMag Equalizer Start 5 sym Stop 5 sym Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TR
104. MINimum eese 317 I SENSe DDEMod SEARGCh BURSESKIP FALELIYBG uta eit iubet oe o trad iaaa 318 SENSe IDBEMod SEARCR BURSESKIP RISID euadere iiti uoce 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATal og nin tnnt hne canna nn enar 318 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern esses nennen nnne nennen enn 319 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue eccentric 319 8 5 5 5 5 pennn 319 8 5 5 319 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum lt gt This command defines the maximum useful length of a burst Only those bursts will be recognized that fall below this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MaxLength gt numeric value Range 0 to 32000 RST 1600 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Min Length Length on page 150 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimum lt UsefulLength gt This command defines the minimum useful length of a burst Only those bursts will be recognized that exceed this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Note the difference to manual operation lt Min_length gt anuai Min Useful Length lt Run In gt lt Run Out gt Setting parameters
105. NDA estimators This means that they operate on an unknown data sequence Since the local oscillators LO of the transmitter device under test and the receiver R amp S FSW are normally not coupled User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 103 Overview of the Demodulation Process their phase offset with respect to each other is unknown The unknown transmission delay between DUT and R amp S FSW adds a further unknown phase offset Due to this unknown phase offset the result of the demodulation can be ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position because of the rotational symmetry of e g a PSK constellation For example in the case of non differential QPSK modulation the measurement signal the reference signal and the decided I Q symbols may have a constant phase offset of 0 11 2 or 317 2 This offset can only be detected and elimi nated if a pattern was successfully detected at symbol level see also chapter 4 4 4 Pattern Symbol Check on page 106 If modulation types are used where the information is represented by the phase transi tion e g differential PSK or MSK the absolute phase position is not an issue Thus the ambiguity of the starting phase does not have an influence on the symbol deci sions If the measurement signal contains a known pattern it is also possible to use a data aided DA estimator at this stage This means that the estimator operates on a known data sequence i e the pattern If the
106. esee 454 lt gt 11 5 413 lt gt 11 416 lt gt 1 2 454 lt gt 11 5 413 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent RESult esee 454 gt 2 413 lt gt 11 6 0 416 lt gt 11 454 lt gt 11 5 lt gt 11 6 nene enne rennen senes CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK RESult lt gt 5 CALC latesn MARKE MA eL lt gt
107. lt UsefulLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 32000 RST 100 Default unit SYM Configuring VSA Manual operation See Min Length Max Length on page 150 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP FALLing lt RunOut gt This command defines the length of the falling burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt RunOut gt numeric value Range 0 to 31990 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Run Out on page 150 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing lt gt This command defines the length of the rising burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in sec onds Setting parameters Runin numeric value Range 0 to 31990 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Run In on page 150 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog Patterns This command reads the names of all patterns stored on the hard disk The file names are returned as a comma separated list of strings one for each file name without the file extension Setting parameters Patterns CURRent ALL CURRent Only patterns that belong to the current standard ALL All patterns RST ALL Example DDEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Result GSM ABO GSM AB1 GSM AB2 GSM 5 1 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Exam
108. surement If the results do not meet your expectations the following tips may help you optimize or troubleshoot the measurement e Flow Chart for 9 nennen nnne 276 e Explanation of Error Messages d e ra e e n Y Ye a x 278 e Frequently Asked Questions entrent 287 e Obtaining Technical 294 10 1 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting If you experience a concrete measurement problem you might want to try solving it with the help of the flow chart Troubleshooting Overview Flow Chart for Troubleshooting Press Preset in order to start from a known state Y Check the following parameters at the DUT and the K70 Demodulation Failed dications are e g Sync Failed Unstable Message in the Status Bar The EVM is really bad The measurement Constellation does not look at all like a constellation Y To make sure you realize once the problem is fixed Switch on the EVM trace and keep an eye on it Center frequency Reference Level overload Symbol rate Transmit filter Check the Modulation Type measurement Sideband inversion Swap IQ Mag CapBuffer e colored bar Result Range in a range where you expect the signal to have the set modulation no Try to increase Run In and Run Out in the Signal Descr
109. ter 3 2 32 Symbol Table on page 54 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL SYMB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Error Vector The modulated difference between the complex measurement signal and the complex reference signal Modulation measurement signal reference signal For example EVM Mag meas ref The default result type is EVM The following result types are available chapter 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM on page 27 chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag I Q on page 47 chapter 3 2 34 Vector on page 56 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Modulation Errors The difference between the modulated complex samples in the measurement and the modulated reference signal Modulation measurement signal Modulation reference signal For example Magnitude Error Mag meas Mag ref The default result type is Magnitude Error The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 chapter 3 2 25 Phase Error on page 44 chapter 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute on page 33 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays M EEUU 2 2 chapter 3 2 14 Frequency Error Relative on page 34 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Modulation Accuracy Paraeters that cha
110. ters on page 244 NONE No measurement filter is used The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 499 R amp S FSW K70 Annex A 3 3 Typical Combinations of Tx and Measurement Filters Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 they can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 214 Table 1 4 Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters Transmit filter Measurement filter Remarks analyzer RC raised cosine filter combination without intersymbol interfer ence 151 RRC root raised cosine RRC filter combination without ISI GMSK filter combination with low ISI Linearized GMSK EDGE NSR standard specific filter filter combination with ISI Gauss filter combination with low ISI Rectangular filter combination without ISI Half Sine filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X FORWARD Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X REVERSE Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 C4FM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H CPM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H DQPSK Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI A
111. 1 1 1 D 1 5 4 4 4 4 4 20 0 4 4 4 4 19 1 40 D 1 14 4 4 4 4 60 80 100 feymbol Frequency in CDMA2000 1X Reverse 20 2 1 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 r 1 4 D D D 1 4 D r 4 4 4 D i 4 4 4 4 4 L D 4 D r 4 DL 4 D D ot 0 4 4 4 42 20 40 gp Pessac 14 4 4 4 80 100 f ymbol Frequency in EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape D 4 1 8 2 q
112. 14 213 Measurement Filter Settings Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto If the Auto option is enabled the measurement filter is defined automatically depend ing on the transmit filter specified in the Modulation settings see Transmit Filter Type on page 148 Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO on page 389 Type Defines the measurement filter type if the Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto setting is not enabled Predefined An overview of available measurement filters is provided in chapter A Filter gt 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 486 User User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For more information on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Cus tomized Filters on page 64 None No measurement filter is used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe on page 389 To turn off the measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER on 390 To use a user defined filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 389 To define the name of the measurement filter Load User Filter Type Opens file selection dialog box to select the user defined me
113. AIGO Rn re 102 AUTO CODI E Poor 194 Configuration Beriodulationpro6ess trees 99 e rm 194 P 278 194 Parameters 100 Process 100 Remote gt 310 Robustness 104 Tolerance 194 B rstsignal 149 Bursts e 13 Length min max 150 Programming example 471 Reference for result range 202 RUMI RE 150 Signal structure wi 190 Useful trt trn 129 Capture buffer Dalla SOURCES 16 BIET 132 Length s Navigating he dix RONDA 265 Reference for result range eerie 202 IResulttyp8S e i eii CEN Ret 16 Capture Buffer BIET cp T 131 Capture length ACQUISITION susti eee tri 181 BI 13 Capture offset not ine ees 189 MSRT applications roro cien rnt etre 189 Remote Softkey Capture oversampling see Sample rale e i Dee e 66 Capture fange S s e Pets 132 Carrier frequency drift
114. Cut Result Range and increase the Result Length to 200 symbols 2 To evaluate the rising and falling edges further display the absolute magnitude val ues of the measured signal in window 4 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Magnitude Absolute see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 264 3 Press RUN SINGLE The rising and falling edges of the burst in the selected result range are displayed in window 4 You could now add an average trace to evaluate the rising and falling edges further ________________________________________ User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 272 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 d amp m Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 24 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 SGL Stat Count 8 BURST PATTERN AEVM 1 Result Summary Phase Err RMS Gain Imbalance In I Q Capture Amplitude Droop Start 26 sym i 5 Stop 174 sym j Mag CapBuf D MagAbs Meas amp Ref 1 i I 1 1 1 j Pattern Search Start 0 sym Stop 10000 sym Start 26 sym 87 10 2010 13 32 07 Fig 9 10 Result range that exceeds the burst length 9 3 5 Setting the Evaluation Range In some scenarios such as in Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to be considered for the EVM or other calculated parameters that are displayed in the Result Summary Thus you would not in
115. Ie De A e 438 arido a 438 FORMaUCDEXPOIEMODBLE 2 438 MMEMory STORe sn s TRAQGS itat eoe eee ha dc ud ipaa Pad eaae 438 ISENSe JDDEMod SEARCh MBURSESTAIU erat Eoo a A ete ton 439 TA Ri DATA adu aetati da rcd ri Cu std 439 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X ABSolute This command queries the absolute x value of the selected delta marker in the speci fied window The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Usage Query only This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode
116. NPU GOUPO 320 INPUUDIQ ios ner A a neve c 335 ly gnelledzsidieruerotii s 337 INPut DIG RANGSEUPEet eene rtr ete reor eee een ee eve dep v d d n 337 INPuEDIQ RANGSLUPPBer AUTO etn nior et iar ne 337 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT 1 5 EON INPU DIG AUTO ra E PH S EEEa EET AERE a abar ly ioi a P M INPut FILTer HPASS STATe Tee WAG ie STDS te INPUtiGAINISTA eee v ddp EES INPut GAINEVALUS INPutIQ BALancedES TD ATe seiten E ep eene hp er ek CER XR EE INPUT AUTO m INPut IQ FULLscale E EVel eio t reor rt re rere tht e perpe INPut IQ TYPE n
117. Retrieving results for further result ranges gt DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC Query the number of result ranges current is last Use variable lt x gt to determine number of previous result range DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC lt x gt 11 13 3 Programming Examples Move to next result range and repeat section retrieving results for range specific results Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check In this example a user defined pattern is used to detect bursts and the calculated mea surement results are checked against defined limits The configuration settings are stored as a user defined standard RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named VSA DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST Create new pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00030001000000000003000200020001000300010001 DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM Customized pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT Special edge normal Burst DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST D Store customized pattern DEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD EDGE TSC CUST Add new pattern to current standard ecu Configuring the expected input signal DEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DEM MAPP CAT Query the availab
118. TOS eritis iced 141 Standards 141 Delta markers PIG FING e ES 225 Demodulation Advanced Bandwidth COMP6NSALION 204 206 Configuration rr ere er ecce 203 Estimation points per symbol 210 Known data ene 134 Normalization 209 Offset EVM 42212 iiec p 98 REMOTE iere te i apparire a 380 Synchronization rete 208 211 Diagram footer information 14 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 340 Analog Baseband B71 159 Differential PSK DPSK Symbol MAPPING trt tte rents 83 DiglConf see also R amp S DiglGort ees 157 Digital Baseband Interface 167 Gonnected instr meht 2 enr nen 168 Input settings 156 Input status remote 335 Output connection status remote 338 Outp t settiligs lt 166 167 Digital Bandwidtlis 75 Connection information 168 Enhanced mode 76 187 Input connection information 157 Inp
119. The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus In this section only the status registers bits specific to the VSA application are descri bed For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers In addition to the registers provided by the base system the following registers are used in the VSA application STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt provides information any limit violations that occur after demodulation in one of the 4 windows 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM limit violations in EVM evalua tion STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude limit violations in Mag nitude Error evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency limit violations in Car rier Frequency evaluation STATus QUESTionab
120. Trigger Slowl Q Softkeys Amplitude Config 169 Auto Level ix d 171 175 217 BB POWet 186 Capture Offset 189 168 Continue Single Sweep 191 Continuous Sweep 190 DiglCohf 25157 Digital tee me eee a 187 Display configuration 230 Export External Free RUN FREQUENCY rient 168 Gece 187 zo 186 MPOT P M 237 Input So rce Conflg 2 iiri 152 Iniput Froritend 152 IQ EXpOft Fer rote 237 237 Lower Level Hysteresis onn 217 Marker Config Marker to Trace rre ree trees 225 Meastime eei e e etuer 217 rrt rnt 217 eere rd iO aerae rec ed 227 ea terti rrr 229 MIT 227 Next Peak rent rtr trees 227 Norm Delta ener eb Peer ite reda ET 225 Outputs CONTIG eter rr ns 165 Peak sss erts 227 Preamp wis 1 171 Ref Level 170 174 Ref Level Offset 171 174 ij 192 RE Attem AUO s t ede 172 RF Atteri Manual iiec eee eene 172 Signal Capture
121. Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM ENABle BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt BitDefinition gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true
122. a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 466 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt NTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe NTRansitio
123. an enhanced mode for processing data from the Digital Baseband Interface is available This enhanced mode enables data transfer via the Digital interface with a data rate of up to 200 Msps 160 MHz bandwidth compared to the previous 100 Msps 80 MHz bandwidth The Digital enhanced mode is automatically used if the following prerequisites are fulfilled Digital Input The connected device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Msps Digital Output The R amp S FSW must supply the required bandwidth i e a bandwidth extension option greater than 160 MHz must be installed and active The connected device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Msps Restrictions for digital in and output The following table describes the restrictions for digital in and output Table 4 4 Restrictions for digital in and output Parameter Minimum Maximum Record length 2 complex samples 220 1024 1024 complex samples Input sample rate ISR 100 Hz 10 GHz Sample Rate SR Digital Max 100 Hz ISR 8388608 Min 10 GHz 2 ISR input Sample Rate SR Digital 100 Hz 200 MHz output Usable bandwidth Min 0 8 SR 0 8 ISR Digital input and filter active Bandwidths Depending on the sample rate the following bandwidths are available Symbol Mapping Usable bandwidth ISR Filter can be turned off BW 0 8 SR BW 0 8 ISR Fig 4 10 Bandwidths depending on sample
124. column the linear mean of the values that are in the Current column is displayed Note that if the values are a logarithmic representation e g the I Q Off set the linear values are averaged Peak value In the Peak column the maximum value that occurred during several evaluations is displayed Note that when the value can be positive and negative e g the phase error the maximum absolute value maintaining its sign is displayed The peak value of Rho is handled differently since its minimum value represents the worst case In that case the minimum value is displayed Standard Deviation The value for the standard deviation is calculated on the linear values and then conver ted to the displayed unit 95 percentile The 95 percentile value is based on the distribution of the current values Since the phase error and the magnitude error can usually be assumed to be distributed around zero the 95 Percentile for these values is calculated based on their absolute values User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 50 Result Types VSA Again the Rho value is handled differently Here the 5 Percentile is displayed since the lowest Rho value represents the worst case Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 CALC FORM RSUM to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the tra
125. d e EE B c cepi ve eas 343 SENSE PROBE lt p gt SETUP STAT Emanen ta io Eee ine ee iain 344 SENSe PROBSsp SETUP TYPES erri oco oet eere ege 344 SENSe RTMS GCAPTUre OFESet toc rt ecce Et nce Fee ttt ce de aides 419 SENSe SWAPigq SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent CALCulate lt n gt DDEM BURSELENGIN Gis icvscseccaccecancestseveceravscaesscestevecbecasecaetacsei nre trt ee oen Lr 444 GALCulatesn DDEM SPEGtr m STATE otrais Fa TE sre read GALGulate n DEL T amarkersm AOFEF eontra p entr ded n p en ee CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum APEAK essen nennen nnne neret enne CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT 2 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT essent CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt sees ener CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK esses CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT s lt gt lt gt adia itai lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt
126. lt gt 5 468 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe EVENIt J essent 465 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVENI J 2 en otn ttt trt 465 STATus QUEStionable POWer CON DIEIOTII cocta out tpe ep ere uc tee Reo E 465 STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle neenon rtr 466 STATus QUEStionable POWer N I Ransition croient renta eterna hte rrr tree rhe E te 467 STATus QUEStionable POWer P TRANSITION cons ern rnit tnr nr eo AAEE A ter e rng 468 STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENIt or rti rhe rnnt rre rene 466 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition STATu s QUEStion ble SYNG ENABIO ret tento spi qup et etuer noces RE pe aan eg apunte STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRarnsitiOh rrt rrr er ern rrr ce n nete nene toe STATus QUEStionable S YNC P TRansitiOn nter toner terat ttr does STATU s QUEStionable SYNGEEMENIE certo Erat tI pne ERE EE Y IP Y HERES UPS EEEE E 466 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE sse 346 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe sess 346 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState
127. lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 412 R amp S FSW K70 Rem
128. or a complex value close to zero is of limited significance but still influences the result of the instantaneous fre quency measurement 1 FreqAbs CaptureBuffer 1 Clrw 0 sym Fig 3 8 Result display Frequency Absolute uum EP S UU User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 31 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 12 Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 440 chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 Frequency Relative The instantaneous frequency of the signal source The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals FREQ lt ZMEAS 2 z dt with and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 Avail
129. see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 131 Typically this is one point per symbol symbol rate or a factor of 2 Channel EVM The equalizer not only compensates for distortions in the measurement signal but also improves the accuracy of the estimated ideal reference signal Thus it is usually rec ommendable to enable the equalizer once you have analyzed the original input signal on the R amp S FSW By default the error results are calculated using the compensated values if the equalizer is enabled However you can disable the compensation for channel results in order to analyze the actual error values obtained from the distorted channel User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 109 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors This section describes the signal and error models used within the VSA application The estimation algorithms used to quantify specific modulation errors are then outlined The descriptions vary depending on the modulation type e PSK OAM and ceo toes coh th e reo eme 110 e FSKMOSWlBllo iu t E 120 4 5 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation 4 5 1 4 Error Model Modelling Modulation Errors Modulated RF Signal Amplitude Quadrature Inbalance Offset VQ Offset Distorsion Noise Fig 4 54 Modelling Modulation Errors The measu
130. sese 415 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan RESult esent 454 lt gt 11 5 412 lt gt 11 2 415 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult 454 lt gt 11 5 412 lt gt 11 415 lt gt 11 2 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan STATe n lt gt 11 1 2 2 enr nennen CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan RESuIt esee 454 lt gt 11 6 lt gt 11 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent STATe CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue esent CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent RESult
131. 0 RST OFF Example DDEM EQU OFF Manual operation See State on page 207 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO lt FineSyncAuto gt This command selects manual or automatic Fine Sync Setting parameters lt FineSyncAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 211 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel lt SERLevel gt This command sets the Fine Sync Level if fine sync works on Known Data Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt SERLevel gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 0 RST 10 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See If SER lt on page 212 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult The result of this query is 0 if the fine sync with known data failed otherwise 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 211 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE lt FineSync gt This command defines the fine synchronization mode used to calculate results e g the bit error rate Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed See SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on 384 Setting parameters lt FineSync gt KDATa PATTern DDATa KDATa The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data PATTern The reference signal i
132. 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 190 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement For a statistics count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of mea surements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Performing a Measurement Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 190 INITiate REFMeas Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh non Multistandard mode on page 191 INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only
133. 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 Table 4 7 D8PSK GRAY Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 Table 4 8 D8PSK VDL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 315 270 180 225 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation Phase differential modulation is frequently combined with an additional phase shift e g 4 DQPSK 4 phase shift modulation differential modulated 4PSK The logical mapping diagram corresponds to the diagram for DPSK The physical constellation diagram shows the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation Symbol Mapping Fig 4 25 Constellation diagram for 77 4 DQPSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 Phase 2 NATURAL PDC PHS TETRA and TFTS the 774 rotation is already compensa ted for Table 4 9 7 4 DQPSK PDC PHS TETRA Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 Table 4 10 774 DQPSK TFTS Logical symbol mapping Modulation
134. 11 9 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the calculated VSA parameters Retrieving Results 11 9 1 All results that are not based the capture buffer data are calculated for a single result range only see chapter 4 6 1 Result Range on page 127 To retrieve the results for several result ranges use the SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC on page 369 command to move from one result range to the next Relrieving Trac Bata and Marker Values nre 436 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA lt gt 440 e Parameter Values tte ttt bt rie tnn te e cb 443 Retrieving Limit Check ReSulEs enciende 454 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values In order to retrieve the trace and marker results in a remote environment use the fol lowing commands lt gt gt 72 436 gt lt gt 436 GALOulate sn MARKersmo Y 15222 aa LN Re ADR EXP aa DRE 437 15 lt gt lt gt 5 5 437 lt gt lt gt 5 5 000000 437 FORMatDEXPortDSEPUaLralor 1
135. 267 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals To define the settings for the R amp S SMW200A 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 3 Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm 4 To define the standard Select the Baseband A block b Under TSMA standards select GSM EDGE 5 To configure the burst type in the GSM EDGE A dialog box a In the Framed Single Configuration tab highlight the first slot in the frame diagram Frame Select Slot To Configure Fig 9 6 R amp S SMW200A GSM EDGE frame configuration settings Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals b In the GSM EDGE Burst Slot0 dialog box select the Burst Type mal 8PSK EDGE GSM EDGE A Burst Slot0 e Save Recall Slots Slot Level Full Slot Attenuation dB 1 Multislot Configuration Number Of Slots 174 174 C Close the GSM EDGE Burst Slot0 dialog box 6 Inthe General tab toggle the State to On to switch the modulation on 7 Close the GSM EDGE dialog box 8 Select the RF A signal output to switch the RF transmission on 9 3 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement with a bursted signal It starts with step by step instructions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Frequency 1 GHz Ref Level 4dBm Sta
136. 423 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC FORM GDEL to define the group delay result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442 3 2 16 Frequency Response Magnitude Magnitude of the frequency response of the current equalizer Note that the frequency response of the equalizer is not a pure inverted function of the channel response as both functions are calculated independantly The frequency response is calculated by determining an optimal EVM for the input signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 36 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 17 1 FreqRespMag Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442
137. 5 ce rere Pe Fere Melee 217 Lower Level HySsieresls treten it edet ur maie 217 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale 218 AUTO SCAG Aull MM 218 Adjusting Settings Automatically Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 217 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 394 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on 392 Changing the Automatic Measurement
138. 7 Burst and Pattern Configuration on page 192 Result Range Definition See chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 201 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 9 Demodulation Settings on page 203 Configuration Overview 7 Measurement Filter Settings See chapter 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings on page 213 8 Evaluation Range Definition See chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 215 9 Display Configuration The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the window specific overview see Specifics for on page 143 See chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 230 10 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 219 To configure settings Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting For step by step instructions on configuring VSA measurements see chapter 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis on page 241 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel See chapter 5 1 Defaul
139. 7 2 Pattern Search on page 195 In case of bursted signals the pattern search finds only the first occurrence of the pattern within each burst If a false positive occurs in this situation cf case 1 the use of Meas only if pattern symbols correct will not provide a satisfactory sol ution In this case do the following Increase the Correlation Threshold Specify the expected position of the pattern within the burst by adjusting the Offset parameter Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols Note Note that this message does not necessarily indicate a problem Its purpose is to inform you that you might have the opportunity to get a more stable demodulation and or better measurement results by improving your setup Synchronization in the VSA application is performed in two stages coarse synchroni zation that precedes the reference signal generation and fine synchronization based on the reference signal The coarse synchronization stage can work data aided i e based on a known pat tern or non data aided i e based on the unknown data symbols The default is a non data aided coarse synchronization In the case that a pattern is part of signal the user can switch to data aided synchronization The fine synchronization stage always works data aided Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols indicates that one of the synchronization stages has too few symbols to ensure that the synchronization is robu
140. Burst Settings on page 150 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO on page 371 Search Tolerance Burst Configuration Defines the number of symbols that may differ from the burst length without influencing the burst detection A search tolerance of 5 for example with a minimum and maxi mum burst length of 100 will detect bursts that are 95 to 100 symbols long The mini mum and maximum burst length is defined in the Signal Structuresettings Note Due to the fact that the VSA does not have knowledge of the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Thus setting this parameter to 0 will result in a failed burst search for most signals Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance 372 Min Gap Length Burst Configuration Represents the minimum distance in symbols between adjacent bursts The default value is 1 symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other However in case the capture buffer does not contain very close bursts it is recommended that you increase the value This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted signals Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search It should not be used to explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement For example setting the minimum gap length to 100 symbols does not
141. CD The content of the parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 g xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt DateTime 2011 01 24T14 02 49 DateTime lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt Data File Format iq tar lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element RS IQ TAR
142. DELTamarker lt m gt STATe page 405 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 404 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 403 Couple Windows If enabled markers in all diagrams with the same x axis time or symbols have cou pled x values except for capture buffer display i e if you move the marker in one dia gram it is moved in all coupled diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 403 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Markers These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of
143. DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital I Q input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 156 OUTPut DIQ lt State gt This command turns continuous output of I Q data to the optional Digital Baseband Interface on and off Using the digital input and digital output simultaneously is not possible If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 100 MHz 200 MHz if enhanced mode is possible max 160 MHz bandwidth Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation See Digital Baseband Output on page 167 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface 11 5 2 4 Return values lt ConnState gt lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt NotUsed gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt lt PRBSTestState gt lt NotUsed gt lt Placeholder gt Example Manual operation Configuring VSA Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used b
144. Delay on page 35 chapter 3 2 3 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude on page 24 chapter 3 2 2 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay on page 23 The default result type is Frequency Response Magnitude Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 uum PEINE HCM UU User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 18 3 2 Result Types in VSA Multi Source Combines two data sources in one diagram with initially one trace for each data source This allows you to compare the errors to the captured or measured data directly in the diagram The default result type is Spec The following result types are available chapter 3 2 30 Spectrum Capture Buffer Error on page 52 chapter 3 2 31 Spectrum Measurement Error on page 53 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MCOM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Result Types in VSA The available result types for a window depend on the selected evaluation data source The SCPI parameters in the following table refer to the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 Table 3 1 Available result types depending on data source Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter Source Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Real Imag RIMag Frequency Absolute FREQuency Vector I Q COMP Magnitude Overview Absolute MOVerview Meas a
145. FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance 448 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance 449 lt gt lt gt 449 lt gt lt gt 450 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic 7 451 lt gt lt gt 451 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic 452 lt gt lt gt 452 lt gt lt gt 452 lt gt lt gt 453 CALCulate lt n gt BERate lt Format gt Queries the Bit Error Rate results The available results are described in chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 Query parameters lt Format gt Specif
146. For the Result Summary the number of display points corresponds to the estimation points per symbol By default 1 for QAM and PSK modulated signals and the sample 4 8 Capture Buffer Display rate for MSK and FSK modulated signals This value also controls which samples are considered for the peak and RMS values and the power result For all other result displays the default number of displayed points per symbol is iden tical to the sample rate Capture Buffer Display In previous firmware versions the capture length in the R amp S FSW VSA application was restricted to 256 000 samples As of firmware version 2 00 up to 200 million symbols can be captured and processed at a time If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active the capture buffer is restricted to 256 000 samples thus all data is included in one single range Processing large numbers of samples If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping capture ranges with a size of 256 000 samples each are created The maximum number of symbols that can be captured depends on the specified num ber of samples per symbol for example for the default sample rate of 4 symbol rate the maximum number of symbols to be captured is 50 000 000 see also chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and I Q Bandwidth on page 66 Only one capture range at a time can be displayed in the result displays based on the capture buffer except for the Magnit
147. Length e g to 10000 symbols In the preview area of the dialog box you see that more bursts are now contained in the capture buffer They are all marked with a green bar meaning that they are all evaluated User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 270 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Mag CapBuf Stop 10000 sym Fig 9 8 Preview of capture buffer 9 3 3 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer This example describes how to navigate through the capture buffer for a continuous signal This navigation feature is especially important for bursted signals Therefore we provide a further navigation example for the GSM EDGE signal 1 In order to see more details in the capture buffer close window 4 a Press the Display Config softkey or the Display Configuration button in the Overview b Select the Delete icon for window 4 Close the SmartGrid mode by selecting the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key 3 Inthe EVM vs Time display window 1 add a maximum hold trace by pressing the TRACE key and then selecting the Trace Config softkey see chapter 9 2 5 Averaging Several Evaluations on page 266 4 Re evaluate the whole capture buffer by pressing the SWEEP key and then the Refresh softkey 5 Use the Select Result Rng softkey to navigate through your capture buffer Thus you can determine which peak was caused by which burst e Ey User Manual 11
148. MIXET nere mere tct deans 329 RHO ecrire cei bu rere 494 RMS average Formula 497 Roll off factor Alpha Measurement 2 214 Transmit filter Rotating Differential PSK Symbol MAPPING 5 orte ertet 84 Rotating PSK Symibol MAPPING 81 RRO FIET oot eem cre eoa 61 RUN CONT 190 RUN SINGLE co 190 191 Run in I ep 150 S Sample Tate ere ice 61 131 rite a 59 Definition 66 67 75 DIG tO 156 Digital remote 338 Digital 1 Q data ma lO Max usable bandwidth 67 MAXIMOM tis Relationship to bandwidth 3s Relationship to symbol rat 67 oiu na ea 361 i r 182 Saving Selliligs ree peret reae ihn in tore bey Pu 141 Scaling Automatically t d 177 218 Diagrams changing CC E 175 255 X axis automatically X axis y axis default YAX Y axis remote control Y axis Statistics Search Direction Real or Im
149. Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 ONAN not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Configuring VSA Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 157 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 157 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Paramet
150. Model Estimation and Modulation 110 4 6 Measurement nnnm a anon na assu ao Ea ka aano auus 126 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per 131 4 8 Capture Buffer Display nre tenera 132 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and 133 410 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode eene nnne 134 NEU ULM 137 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis eee 138 5 2 Configuration According to Digital 2224 1 4 139 5 3 Configuration Overview inane 142 5 4 Signal DescriptlOn 144 5 5 Input Output and Frontend 4 0 4222 2 152 950 Signal Captute 4 tenete amet amiet es 180 5 7 Burst and Pattern nnn 192 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 3 R amp S9FSW K70 Content
151. OSCilloscope IDN on page 346 Alignment An initial alignment of the output to the oscilloscope is required once after setup It need only be repeated if a new oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW or if a new firmware is installed on the oscilloscope Alignment is performed in the Alignment subtab of the B2000 tab Mau ew Spectrum IQ Analyzer 3 Power Sensor External Generator Probes B2000 Settings Please connect Oscilloscope CH1 to FSW REF OUT 640 MHz Oscilloscope required connections between the R amp S FSW the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box For details see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Alignment consists of two steps The first step requires a temporary connection from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector on the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the oscil loscope To perform the alignment select the Alignment button self alignment is performed on the oscilloscope before the actual B2000 alignment o If necessary in particular after the firmware on the oscilloscope has been updated a starts This may take a few minutes If the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC are aligned successfully a new dialog box is displayed User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 163 _ R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Oscilloscope 1 to FSW REF OUT 640 MHz Please connect RTO CH1 to
152. P32 SR 1 152 MHz Att 1048 Freq 13 25 GHz Cap Len YIG Bypass BURST PATTERN 1 Freq Error Rel Analysis Interval 230 902778 us 616 319444 us Analysis Interval oe mm for P nn rw t eee nz 2 eBuffer mmi i a Date 15 0CT 2012 16140129 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual 9 Configuration Using the VSA application you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using predefined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the mea surement settings to your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file VSA application When you switch the application of a measurement channel to VSA the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application see chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Sign
153. PERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN RESulIt CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAKT RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType RESUIt This command queries whether the limit for the specified result type and limit type was violated For details on result types and limit types see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 454 Suffix lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt Return values lt LimitResult gt Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PERRor RHO CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only FERRor Frequency error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCURRent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPE
154. PPEsk RFEPesk PCURrent 9 RFEMean PRHo 2 RFECurrent CRHa RPEak STAT QUES MOD FSK RMEan IQRHo STAT QUES MOO IOR RCURrent STAT QUES MOO CFR MAGNitude STAT QUES MOO MAGN STAT QUES MOD PHAS STAT QUES MOD EVM STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Fig 11 2 Overview of VSA specific status registers e STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt 460 e STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt 460 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM 460 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe 461 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 461 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency 462 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO 462 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK 463 e Querying the Status ide lie a a ae ad 463 Status Reporting System 11 11 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Register This register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection for each window in each VSA channe
155. Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns Press Edit Pattern o Change the settings as required as described chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define New Pattern on page 246 To delete a predefined pattern 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns 4 Press Delete Pattern The pattern is removed from the lists of available and assigned patterns and can no longer be assigned to any standard Any existing assignments to other stand ards are removed as well To restore predefined patterns Default patterns provided by Rohde amp Schwarz can be restored 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Select the Restore Factory Settings softkey 3 Select the Restore Pattern Files softkey The patterns as defined by Rohde amp Schwarz at the time of delivery are restored How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 2 3 8 2 3 1 Restoring user defined patterns User defined patterns can only be restored if you have a copy of the pattern file cre ated during creation In this case copy the file named lt Patternname gt 1 back to the installation directory of the VSA application under vsa standards After a preset or after performing certain operations
156. Press the TRACE key 3 Press the Trace Config softkey 4 Select a second trace and choose the preferred Trace Mode e g Max Hold or Average Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mod m el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz ResLen TRG EXT Trace Trace Mode Evaluation 1 2 Avg Y rmi J ctear write Siegen Zen pu 2 pu Trace 4 2 1 f Y 1 x4 ee Stop 100 sym traces C Mag CapBuf 1 traces Blank Meas Ref Meas Ref 20 dBm Preset Select Select 40 dBm All Traces Avg Min ClrWrite Min 60 dBm Trace Wizard 80 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 535 Stop 2 535 15 03 2010 08 32 29 Trace Wizard Screen Measuring User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 288 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Solution e 1 Select the measurement window 2 Press the AMPT key 3 Press the Unit softkey 4 Press the Y Axis Unit softkey 5 Select dB Problem The Vector result display and the Constellation result display look different Spectrum VSA Ref Level 1 96 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 22 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 148 SGL BURST PATTERN i Crw Const I1 Q Meas amp Ref e 1M C
157. R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays _ _ _ gt Note that for very large numbers of samples gt 25 000 the samples are mapped to 25 000 trace points using an autopeak detector for display Thus this result display is not suitable to detect transient effects or analyze individual symbols closely For these purposes use the Magnitude Absolute result display instead The Magnitude Overview Absolute is only available for the source type e Capture Buffer 1 Mag Overview CaptureBuffer 220000 sym Fig 3 13 Result display Magnitude Overview Absolute for capture buffer data Restrictions Note the following restrictions that apply to this result display e Only one trace is available Only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available See also chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 219 Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FORM MOV to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 440 e _________________________________________________ User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 42 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements
158. STARt on page 437 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams For cartesian diagrams magnitude phase frequency real imag eye diagrams the command returns the y values of the trace The number of returned values is the product of the Result Length and the display points per symbol The unit depends on the specified unit See chapter 11 5 2 11 Scaling and Units on page 355 You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 437 The eye diagram result displays are the same as the real imag result display the results for eye diagrams are merely superimposed in the display 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams For polar diagrams the command returns a pair of values for each trace point The first value is the real part the second value the imaginary part The number of returned value pairs depends on the result type e Vector I Q evaluation range length display points per symbol Constellation evaluation range length Constellation Frequency and Vector Frequency one value for each trace point on the y axis 11 9 2 4 Symbols For the symbol table result diagrams the command returns one value for each num ber in the table The command always returns the values in the decimal format The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected 11 9 2 5 Result Summary For the Result Summary the command ret
159. Symbol numbers are displayed as a table Each symbol is represented by an entry in the table The symbols can be displayed in binary octal hexadecimal or decimal for mat Selected symbols using markers are highlighted by a blue frame Example 4 Symbols Hexadecimal RENI 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 ko ie e IN LJ IE 23 RJ I N 1 If GJ i IN IC GJ w J e g O IW 1 OIN IW IC IO IO lw w w IMN N IC 3 rie e e e GJ M I f IC hole Fig 3 22 Result display for Symbols in hexadecimal mode If a pattern search is active a found pattern is indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame necesse User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 54 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 4 Symbols s Hexadecimal les 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 98 100 110 120 130 140 Pattern Not Found 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 f m j
160. Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command specifies whether the marker search works on the real or the imag trace for all markers Setting parameters lt MarkReallmag gt REAL IMAG RST REAL Manual operation See Real Imag Plot on page 226 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range for markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or measure ment time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 0 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 226 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHT SearchLimit This command defines the right limit of the marker search range for a markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be an
161. additional preamplifier hardware option 11 5 2 10 Configuring VSA Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 155 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifier hardware This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 155 Attenuation INP UPA 353 354 dz 354 INPUT EAT T AUTO 355 22 355 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 355 If you set the attenuation m
162. all windows select Export Trace to ASCII File for all Win dows To export the traces only for the currently selected window select Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window To export the data from another window select it from the Specifics for list then export again In either case all traces of the selected window s are exported 5 Define a name and storage location and select OK The data is stored in a file and can be analyzed in an external application Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer 9 Measurement Examples Some sample measurements for the digital GSM and EDGE standards provide a quick introduction to typical vector analyzer measurements The individual measurements are in logical order and are meant to familiarize you gradually with the measurements required of general vector signal analysis The following equipment is required in addition to the R amp S FSW with option R amp S FSW K70 e 1 test transmitter GSM compatible for Measurement 2 preferably R amp S SMW200A 1412 0000 02 with the digital standard option GSM EDGE order number 1413 3684 02 e 1 RF cable with 2 male connectors 2 power cables Transmitter operation is only described as far as required for performing the measure ments For more details on the measurements refer to the test transmitter documenta tion 9 1 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer In order to perform measurements with the R amp S FSW K70 y
163. amp S FSW B500 is active 500000000 Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 182 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements The trigger commands define the beginning of a measurement Configuring VSA MSRA MSRT operating mode o In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the VSA application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis See Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Tasks for manual configuration are described in chapter 5 6 2 Trigger Settings on page 183 TRIGgei SEQuence BBPowerLlOLDDolf 2 nator ota t tr ree eere 364 TRIGgei SEQuerice DTIMB eicere trant eterne n tra eb Rear Rent dg i 364 TRIGSer SEQuence TIME ute ree ten ten 365 TRIGgei SEQueneelIFPowelt ElOLbDolf 2 2 rrr peret 365 Teresis 1 tinta rr t ene rH X Extras
164. amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Configuring VSA Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 392 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 217 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 217 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 394 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 217 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold
165. band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 323 Parameters Band KA QJUJ VI EIJW F DI GJ Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Table 11 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 E 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA
166. be swapped 1 lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband RST OFF Manual operation See Swap 1 0 page 183 TRACe lt n gt 1Q BWIDth This command queries the bandwidth in Hz of the resampling filter Usable Band width Usage Query only Manual operation See Usable Bandwidth on page 183 TRACe 1Q WBANd STATe State This command determines whether the wideband provided by bandwidth extension options is used or not if installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON If enabled installed bandwidth extension options can be used They are activated for bandwidths gt 80 MHz if the bandwidth is not restricted by the TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH command Otherwise the currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 67 This parameter corresponds to the Auto setting in manual operation with TRACe WBANd MBWIDTH 320 MHZ OFF The bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B500 B320 B160 are deactivated the maximum analysis bandwidth is restricted to 80 MHz This parameter corresponds to t
167. been ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position the extracted sequence needs to be compared to all possible rotated versions of the selected pattern For example in the case of QPSK modulation the rotational symme try has the order four i e there are four pattern hypotheses If the extracted sequence coincides with one of the hypotheses the pattern is declared as found and the abso lute phase corresponding to the appropriate hypothesis is passed on Both the symbol decisions and the measurement signal are then rotated with this pattern phase for the whole result range thus resolving the phase ambiguity For more information refer to chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 103 chapter 4 4 2 I Q Pattern Search on page 102 4 4 5 Overview of the Demodulation Process Patter Symbol Check Settings 1213 0 0 1 32 213101011312 101313127911 61211111312 0 270 Fig 4 50 Pattern Symbol Check algorithm The Equalizer A possible source of high modulation errors of the DUT with PSK and QAM signals is a non flat frequency response or ripple in frequency response within the modulation bandwidth This could be caused by the DUT s Analog filter sections Digital filter sections if a shortened filter length is used Digital arithmetic sections if a shortened bit length is used R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Analyzer DUT Meas Demodulation TX A
168. been stored allow ing a new comment to be entered for the next standard In this case a blank string is returned when a query is made Digital Standards Setting parameters lt Comment gt string Manual operation See Comment on page 141 SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a specified digital standard file in the vector signal analysis The file name includes the path If the file does not exist an error message is displayed Setting parameters lt FileName gt string File name including the path for the digital standard file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Delete Standard on page 141 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue This command restores the default settings of the currently selected standard Usage Event SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings of the vector signal analysis as a new user defined digital standard If the name of the digital standard is already in use an error message is output and a new name has to be selected It is recommended that you define a comment before storing the standard Setting parameters lt FileName gt string The path and file name to which the settings are stored Example DDEM STAN COMM GSM AccessBurst with Pattern Defines a comment for the settings DDEM STAN SAVE C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Stores the settings in the user defined digital standard USER_GSM
169. can enable or disable correction see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation on page 204 Estimation ranges The estimation ranges are determined internally according to the signal description For continuous signals the estimation range corresponds to the entire result range since it can then be assumed that the signal consists of valid modulated symbols at all time instants e For bursted signals the estimation range corresponds to the overlapping area of the detected burst and the Result Range Furthermore the Run In Run Out ranges see Burst Settings on page 150 are explicitly excluded from the estima tion range In the special case that the signal is indicated as a burst signal but is so highly dis torted that the burst search cannot detect a burst the estimation range corresponds to the pattern and if an offset of the pattern is indicated the useful part of the burst from its start to the pattern start Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors Error vector EV Q Fig 4 55 Modulation error error vector The error vector is the difference between the measurement signal vector Meas vec tor and the reference signal vector Ref vector Error Vector Magnitude EVM Q Fig 4 56 Modulation error EVM magnitude error phase error The magnitude of the error vector in the diagram is specified as the error vector magni tude EVM It
170. case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration Starting the VSA Application 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application The R amp S FSW K70 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform Vector Signal Analysis VSA to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW VSA application performs vector and scalar measurements on digitally modulated single carrier signals To perform the measurements it converts RF signals into the complex baseband Use of an optional external mixer is also supported The R amp S FSW VSA application can also use the optional D
171. compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 173 11 5 2 11 Configuring VSA INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 173 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 173 Scaling and
172. containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable L MARgin m EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 465 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel
173. corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal 4 Startthe VSA application by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA 5 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA 6 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics a In the Modulation Settings section ensure that the Type is PSK and that the Order is QPSK The Mapping defines the mapping of the bits to the QPSK symbols It is relevant if you are interested in a bit stream measurement but does not affect the other measurement results Hence you do not need to change it here b Enter the Symbol Rate 1 MHz R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples c Inthe Transmit Filter section select RRC as Type and enter the Alpha BT value 0 35 In the preview area of the dialog you should then see a non distorted QPSK constellation diagram as shown in figure 9 3 Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Modulation Settings Type Order Mapping Symbol Rate Transmit Filter Type Alpha BT Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 9 3 QPSK signal with RRC transmit filter 7 Close all open dialog boxes By default four measurement windows showing differ ent measurement results are displayed User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 263 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 1 0 MHz m el Att
174. cou pling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope This setting is only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension is active see B2000 State on page 162 DC 50 Direct connection with 50 termination passes both DC AC components of the trigger signal DC 1 MQ Direct connection with 1 MQ termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components Remote command TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling on page 348 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger only rising slopes can be detected For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 367 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 365 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA or MSRT operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time off Set between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted applicati
175. crie nr i cr esa 330 SENSe CORRection C VI GEEA Qe tte tr PI v e SENSe CORRection GVE GOMMBTIL 5 52 nto dean SENSe CORRScIiOn VIE DATA URGERE e EE Eder d SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic SENSe CORRection peri b otra e icr cea SENSe CORRection CVIEIPORI Ss in resta Ara Ee E ere deen a aii SENSe CORR6ection CVE SELGCL eniti ir eet re ret e ERE rea ne RR TERRE e SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMberv SENSe IDDEMOG APSICNS Tate ci dine cea Gets eee cuteness SENS DDEMod ASK NS Tate feeder Rie eee tee a 5 SENSe IDBEMOG ECALG MODBDPBE orat nied dines iic coe Ro aia ED ree SENSe DDEMOd EPRalte AUTO cnt heater Da t dec P ERES SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALUS te tpa b tid e eese Rua SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth SENSe DDEMod EQUAlizer ettet ee De Dip tete us SENSe H DbDEMod EQUalizer eiii n eso RES ecd nee IE
176. delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Analysis Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 224 See Marker Type on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta mar
177. e g changing the modulation settings the pat tern will be included in the list of All Patterns again How to Manage Known Data Files You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 4 46 and Fine Synchronization on page 211 Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 How to Load Known Data Files Known Data files are loaded in the Modulation amp Signal Description settings To load an existing Known Data file 1 In the Overview select Signal Description 2 Switch to the Known Data tab 3 Activate the usage of a Known Data file by enabling the Known Data option This enables the Load Data File function 4 Select the Load Data File button A file selection dialog box is displayed 5 Select the xml file which contains the possible data sequences of the input signal The file must comply with the syntax described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 489 The header information of the xml file is displayed in the dialog box Once a Known Data file has been loaded the Bit Error Rate result display becomes available If the Fine Synchronization setting in the Demodulation dialog box is set to Auto mode the known d
178. ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that have a very small gap Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum on page 371 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 7 2 Pattern Search The Pattern Search settings define when a pattern is detected in the evaluated sig nal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Pattern Search settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Burst Pattern button from the Overview e Select the Burst Pattern Search softkey from the main VSA menu Then switch to the Pattern Search tab Burst Pattern Search Burst Search Pattern Search E Auto according to Signal Structure 00 Advanced I Q Correlation Threshold Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Information Selected pattern for Search EDGE_TSCO Pattern Found Preview Mag CaptureBuffer 0 1500 Enabling Patterm SSasrcligs rires RU 196 VQ Correlation Tbiresti ld 196 Meas Pattern Symbols sa irre Lore t etd e to ds 196 Selected Pattern for Search ete tried iu barroco de 196 xum RT 196 User Manual 1173 9292 02 1 195 5 7 3 Burst and Pattern Configuration Enabling Pat
179. error data 3 2 31 Spectrum Measurement Error This display combines two diagrams in one The first trace displays the spectrum of the real image data from the measured signal The second trace displays the spectrum of the real image data of the error Optionally the data source of the traces can be switched Which source is currently displayed for which trace is indicated in the window tile bar see also figure 2 1 1 Spec Realimag Meas amp Ref 2 Spec Meas vs Error 1M 2E Crw 3 Spec Realimag Error 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MCOM to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 53 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 32 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS ERR to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC TRAC MEAS CALC TRAC2 ERR to define trace1 to be based on the measurement data and trace 2 on the error default see CALCulate n TRACe t VALue on page 401 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results for measurement data see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 4 Symbols on page 441 TRAC DATA TRACE2 to query the trace results for error data Symbol Table
180. folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import I Q Data 4 Drag the parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser al gt file xml e D xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 1 Using the VSA option you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using pre defined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the mea surement settings t
181. for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary 11010 11110 01011 0111 Fig 4 37 Constellation diagram for 32QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary Symbol Mapping e e e e 001000 001001 001101 001100 e e e 001010 001011 001111 001110 e e e 000010 000011 000111 000110 e e e 000000 000001 000101 000100 Fig 4 38 Constellation diagram for 64QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary the binary form shows the upper right section of the diagram only 0011010 0011011 0001011 0001010 0011000 0011001 0001001 0001000 e e 0010000 0010001 0010101 0010100 0011100 0011101 0010010 0010011 0010111 0010110 0011110 0011111 0000010 0000011 0000111 0000110 0001110 0001111 0000000 0000001 0000101 0000100 0001100 0001101 Fig 4 39 Constellation diagram for 128QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal and binary the figure shows the upper right sections of the diagram only Fig 4 40 Constellation diagram for 256QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only Symbol Mapping 5 5 a S Rm 5 56 Be Ze Be Ee Re 55 Ee ge Ze e Ze Ze Fe Ge Ze Ye Ge fe Ge Eo Ee Be ge ge ge Le Ze te Se Yo Se De Uo ie
182. ge Be Ze ge ge fe Ze 9 5 Se 2 ge 9 Be Ze Re ge 1 o a 5 5 Be Ze Ze Be Be Be 2 5 e Be be Ze De je Ye Se Be e Be Se 5e 38 Se pe Se Se Ge Ge e Se fe Je Ge e 1 Se Ze Ze 2e 5 8 3 3 3 gt 5 8 di 2 Ss Ze Go Ce Se Be Ee De Re 58 de He Be de Yo be de Bo be De S ge ge 5 S S3 e e Be Ge Ze ge De Le Be Ze Be be Ze Me He Me ES ge ge ge ge ge De Le Ge Ge Ge z aide 22 Se Be He Ge He Go Se Do De 5 fe De HE de Be Yo be Be He De De De Se be 3 n gt Be Se 55 3e je de je Be Be Be Bo 09 Ue Eo Le ve amp amp de de ie 5 3e 3e Se 3e Be Be Be Be Be De Le Be Eo Le Ee Eo ibe S de de de de De Be ije be 2 Fig 4 42 Constellation diagram for 1024QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only Symbol Mapping 4 3 9 ASK 2ASK OOK ASK stands for Amplitude Shift Keying 2ASK binary is often also referred
183. gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRAGeG lt t gt 7 SCALE rentre een DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO 392 lt gt lt gt 5 392 DISPlay iWIND owsn gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe 435 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision eese nennen enne 359 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel esses eene 352 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sse rne 352 DISPlay WiNDow lt n gt lt gt 5 359 01 5 lt gt lt gt 8 359 1 lt gt lt 5 402 BISPlayEWINDOowsn 2 ZOOM AREA 5 rete erre er erre e e e D e Een 420 lt gt lt 2 gt 421 DISPlayi WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MUL lt 200 gt 5 2 421 215
184. gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM PPEak RESUIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FDERror PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent RESUIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy 0OFFset MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy
185. has not been captured completely e 2 2 1 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 279 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Mag CapBuf 1 NI Start 0 sym Fig 10 4 Example for measurement on complete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings or increase the result length Note however that in this case the results are actually correct and the message can be ignored e The settings do not match the signal In order to allow you to select certain bursts the burst search only searches for bursts that have a length between Min Length and Max Length plus a tolerance that you can set in the Burst Search Dialog In case the burst is e g shorter than the Burst Min Length the burst search fails Mag CapBuf I Modulation amp Signal Description Modulation Signal Description Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 738 462 Max Length 300 sym 21 108 m Start 0 sym Ll 1300 sym _ Run In S sym 11 077 Gsym _______ 11 077 Fig 10 5 Example a failed burst search due too burst that is too short SSS INN NCC SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 280 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Solution try one of the following Switch on the Magnitude Capture Buffer result display Move a marker to the start of the burst Move a delta marker to the end o
186. iin iron ttr rh eere hh rt hehehe Pa ARE ETES cere oie 404 CAL Culate lt n gt MSRAZALING SHOW siae ensnare i A EEN Siar ENN maaa 417 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALING VALUC irisi i 417 CALGulatesn gt MSRAWIND Ww s A gt co cr e aaa EEES EE TANEN 417 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW GCulatesn RTMS AUINGEVAL UG ttp rettet ai texere teet 419 GALCulatesn RTMS WINDOwsnes IVAL ne ieee inei ih estet bac cene ve vea hein 419 lt gt 5 2 4022242 01 15000000 AT EENE 433 GCulatesn S l ATistics MODE detinere tp rte ed Deep ntu ce a cepere ta oa 433 GAL GCulate sn STATistics PRESOL nr iie c n emi ir 356 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO 356 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt CAL Culate lt n gt S TAMistics Y LOWO ned do er eene eoe dvo apa He gt 5 CALCulatesn gt STAtistics SCAM 6 Y UPPE cnnan nera cta ese ee ce cue du e uan CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFF Set CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEF CALGCul
187. information on result ranges see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 132 In the Magnitude Absolute result display the actual signal amplitude is displayed User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 40 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 22 Mag uras t MEAS with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the defined sample rate defined by the dis play points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal Displays the actual signal amplitude for the selected evaluation range 3 Mag CaptureBuffer 8000 sym Fig 3 12 Result display Magnitude Absolute for capture buffer data Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 440 Magnitude Overview Absolute Magnitude of the source signal in the entire capture buffer the actual signal amplitude is displayed Mag mras 8 with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 41
188. information on the used modulation and on the signal s structure e eese eee AT POE METRE 144 e A t EE adie eae 148 KONN 151 5 4 1 Modulation The Modulation settings contain modulation and transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation trace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings The preview area is not editable directly The modulation settings vary depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings The Modulation settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Signal Description button in the Overview Select the Signal Description softkey in the main VSA menu R amp S9FSW K70 Configuration Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Modulation Settings Mapping FSK Ref Deviation 1 0 SR Symbol Rate Transmit Filter Alpha BT Preview Preview Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref Start 30 758 MHz Stop 30 758 MHz Fig 5 1 Signal modulation settings for FSK modulation Modulation Type Defines the modulation type of the vector signal The following types are available PSK e e QAM User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 145 Signal
189. lt 2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm MU CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 234 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 234 See Restore Original Display on page 234 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on 234 T User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 420 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA p h H s 11 7 6 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 421 015 lt gt 20 g
190. maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the evaluated data Thus if a wrong file was mistakenly loaded or the file proves to be unsuitable it is not used for synchronization Otherwise the results would be strongly distorted If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 384 Offset EVM The offset EVM is only available for Offset QPSK modulated signals Unlike QPSK modulation the Q component of Offset QPSK modulation is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain The symbol time instants of the and the Q component therefore do not coincide The offset EVM controls the calculation of all results that are based on the error vector It affects the EVM Real Imag and Vector I Q result displays as well as the EVM results in the Result Summary EVM and MER You can configure the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results If Offset EVM is disabled the VSA application substracts the measured signal from the reference signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component If Offset EVM is enabled however the VSA application compensates the delay of the Q component with r
191. measurements If necessary increase the Statistics Count defined in the Sweep menu 7 Press the SWEEP key and select the Selected Result Rng softkey to select a specific burst to be evaluated The result displays are updated to show the results for the selected burst Tip You can use a capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges and analyze the individual result ranges in another window The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display 8 Optionally zoom into a diagram to enlarge an area of the displayed data 9 Optionally change the display scaling for diagrams see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 254 10 Optionally check the modulation accuracy against specified limits see chap ter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy on page 256 11 Optionally export the trace data of the measured signal to a file see chapter 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File on page 257 R amp S9FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 3 1 8 3 1 1 How to Change the Display Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling func tions are available to adapt the result display to the current data How to Scale Time and Spectrum Diagrams The range of the displayed y axis for time and spectral diagrams can be defined in the following ways e manually by de
192. mode is sufficient for small distortions and performance remains high 5 9 2 Demodulation Settings Tracking The results of the equalizer in the previous sweep are considered to calculate the new filter until adaquate results are obtained This learning effect allows for powerful removement of larger distortions within a minimum of sweeps During the tracking phase calculation of the equalizer requires additional processing time Freeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer values are used for subsequent sweeps User A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used Averaging The results of the equalizer in all previous sweeps since the instru ment was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start a new averaging process select the Reset Equalizer button Calculation of the equalizer requires addi tional processing time Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 383 Filter Length Equalizer Settings Defines the length of the equalizer in symbols The longer the equalizer the more accurate the filter becomes and the more distortion can be compensated However this requires extended calculation time The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth on page 382 Reset Equalizer Eq
193. named MyVSA DEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DEM MAPP CAT DEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DEM SRAT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate DEM TFIL NAME RRC DEM TFIL ALPH 0 35 Select the RRC transmit filter D D D Query the available symbol mappings for QPSK modulation D D D D LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVEC Create new window to the right of I Q constellation window 1 with error vector as data type Result 5 CALC5 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 5 to magnitude EVM DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe2 MODE AVER Add a second trace in average mode DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe3 MODE MAXH Add a third trace in max hold mode SWE COUN 10 Calculate an average over 10 sweeps Programming Examples INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished DISP WIND1 SIZE LARG Display the I Q Constellation result display window 1 in full screen HCOP DEST MMEM Define the destination of the screenshot as a file HCOP DEV LANG BMP Select bmp as the file format MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER IQConstellation bmp Select the file name for the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Print all screen elements HCOP Store the printout in a file called IQConstellation bmp DISP WIND5 SIZE SMAL Restore the I Q Constellation result display to one subwindow
194. nee RET EE RES EET EX 456 MMEMory STORe ns IQ STA T6 rentrer rere neret d ne en P era v a abe FEED E VER ea 456 MMEMory STOResn TRAGS irr terrre rhe tir o ehe ERE ED CREE FER ERR Ke DX c RSEN 438 T OUTPut DIQ CDEVice ERKENS RENACE ESENE 349 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit iCONDINON r eventa eds 465 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition STAT s QUEStionable ACPLEimit EVENIE i irren bae eerie trt eh re ette rec eet etae 465 STATus QUEStonable DIO CONDIEIOTI2 tas coti tet na tt citroen tt tenait ed 465 STATus QUEStonable DIQ ENABIe ctt rettet ce t tte re ect eene cedet C i 466 STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRamsition sds gansen a EA E ECERS 466 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition STATUS QUEStionable DIQ FEVENE P rere rte b rrr ere 465 STATus QUEStionable FREQ uency CONDItIOmI enean ETEEN 465 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle ret rrt nn rn rre rn rene
195. on page 377 Burst and Pattern Configuration Save As Saves a copy of an existing pattern under a new name Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY on page 375 New Opens the Pattern dialog box to create a new pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pattern Definition on page 199 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 247 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 376 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 375 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 377 Delete Deletes the selected patterns Any existing assignments to other standards are removed Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete on page 375 Pattern details Pattern details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed at the upper right hand side of the dialog box You can refer to these details for example when you want to add a new pattern to the standard and want to make sure you have selected the cor rect one Pattern Search On If enabled the VSA application searches for the selected pattern This setting is identi cal to the setting in the Pattern Search dialog box see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 196 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 374 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a
196. or discrete Bursted signals commonly have several discrete result ranges at the bursts with intervals during the noise periods which should not be inclu ded in the results see figure 4 68 Continuous signals on the other hand have result ranges that cover the entire or a specific part of the capture buffer without intervals Mag CapBuf A CUBA ITA 40 dBm 60 dBm 80 dBm Fig 4 69 Result ranges for a continuous signal Result Range Length The result range length is defined by the number of symbols that are to be demodula ted All traces over time are displayed over the result range For example if you have a User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 128 4 6 2 Measurement Ranges burst of 100 symbols and you define the result length as 200 symbols you can exam ine the burst ramps in detail by selecting the alignment Burst Center The maximum result length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 sam ples Result Range Alignment By defining the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment ref erence source burst capture buffer or pattern you can define an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the signal structure see Offset on page 151 For example if you align the result to the center of the pattern and set the Symbol Number at Pattern Start to 0 you can easily find the pattern start in the EVM mea surement simply b
197. output If Digital Baseband output is active see Digital Baseband Output on page 167 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable bandwidth The figure 4 6 shows the maximum usable I Q bandwidths depending on the output sample rates 4 2 1 3 Relationship Between Sample Rate Record Length and Usable I Q Bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate Regarding the record length the following rule applies Record length Measurement time sample rate Maximum record length for RF input The maximum record length that is the maximum number of samples that can be cap tured depends on the sample rate Table 4 2 Maximum record length without l Q bandwidth extension options B320 U320 B500 Sample rate Maximum record length 100 Hz to 200 MHz 440 MSamples precisely 461373440 440 1024 1024 samples 200 MHz to 10 GHz 220 MSamples upsampling Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth The figure 4 6 shows the maximum usable I Q bandwidths depending the output sample rates Usable bandwidth bandwidths for RF input 160 MHz Activated option B160 U160 150 140 130 120 110 100 eeen SCE Cee Without BW extension options or B8 Output sample 10000 fan MHz 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Fig 4 6 Relations
198. page 146 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat lt QPSKformat gt This command defines the demodulation order for QPSK Setting parameters lt QPSKformat gt NORMal DIFFerential 4 DPI4 OFFSet NORMal Demodulation order QPSK is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQPSK is used NPI4 Demodulation order 4 QPSK is used DPI4 Demodulation order 4 DQPSK is used OFFSet Demodulation order OQPSK is used 4 Demodulation order 31 4 QPSK is used RST NORMal Example DDEM FORM QPSK Switches QPSK demodulation on DDEM QPSK FORM 4 Switches 1 4 DQPSK demodulation order on Configuring VSA Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 146 SENSe DDEMod SRATe lt SymbolRate gt This command defines the symbol rate The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on the defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 66 Setting parameters lt SymbolRate gt numeric value Range 25 to 250e6 RST 3 84 6 Default unit Hz Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 Example See cha
199. pattern search The offset of the pattern would be the offset of the pattern start with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst However if the entered offset is not correct within about 4 sym bols of tolerance the pattern will not be found VSA Ref Level 22 00 dim Mod Modulation amp Signal Description m el Att 10 0 88 Freq 1 0GHz Cap Ler SGL TRG EXT BURST PATTERN Modulation Signal Description AEVM Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 Length 148 sym 546 462 Run In sym 11 077 Run Out sym 11 077 w Pattern 1 7 Start 3 sym Stop 151 sym Mag CapBuf 1 Cirw Name DGE_TSCC 5 0 0s Descriptio e Burst Lengthi Offset Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym 09 09 26 Fig 10 7 GSM EDGE burst Pattern is actually located in the middle of the burst The correct value for Offset here would be 58 Solution Try one of the following Remove the offset unknown Enter the correct offset within about 4 symbols of tolerance For more information see Offset on page 151 e The specified pattern does not coincide with the pattern in your signal In the R amp S FSQ K70 it is possible to search for multiple patterns at the same time For example in a GSM measurement the capture buffer can be checked for al
200. rate for active digital input 4 3 Symbol Mapping Mapping or symbol mapping means that symbol numbers are assigned to constellation points or transitions in the I Q plane e g PSK and QAM In the analyzer the mapping is required to decode the transmitted symbols from the sampled or frequency time data records The mappings for all standards used in the analyzer and for all employed modulation modes are described in the following Unless indicated otherwise symbol numbers are specified in hexadecimal form MSB at the left Symbol Mapping 4 3 1 Phase Shift Keying PSK With this type of modulation the information is represented by the absolute phase position of the received signal at the decision points All transitions in the diagram are possible The complex constellation diagram is shown The symbol numbers are entered in the diagram according to the mapping rule BPSK NATURAL Fig 4 11 Constellation diagram for BPSK including the symbol mapping QPSK Fig 4 12 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for CDMA2000 FWD and DVB S2 Symbol Mapping Fig 4 15 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for WCDMA Symbol Mapping 8PSK 2 N 3 Fig 4 18 Constellation diagram for 8PSK including the symbol mapping for DVB 52 Symbol Mapping 4 3 2 Rotating PSK A rotating PSK modulation is basically a PSK modulation in which additional ph
201. remote control programs see SENSe SWAPiq on page 362 Setting parameters lt SidebandPos gt NORMal INVerse NORMal Normal non inverted position INVerse Inverted position RST NORMal 11 13 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to perform vector signal analysis in a remote environment These examples are meant to demonstrate the use of the most common remote com mands for vector signal analysis Note that not all commands executed here are actually necessary as they may reflect default settings e Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal Avr eru vb ovvio pur Pete eer Ova adve dee dese es 470 e Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital 8 2 ro E AT1 e Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check 475 Programming Examples 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continu ous QPSK Signal The following example describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in chapter 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal on page 260 Configuring the measurement RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM MyVSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis
202. result displays for VSA measurements are available Which result types are available depends on the selected data source You can define which part of the measured signal is to be evaluated and displayed The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces For background information on the result and evaluation ranges see chapter 4 6 Mea surement Ranges on page 126 e Evaluation Data Sources If i coni eco tet e iiri te tic oe et do eo teas cea pee ces vend 15 e Result Types In VSA cer reno e aac eco oc resa He aa oa 19 e Common Parameters in 0 0 1 40 2044 57 3 1 Evaluation Data Sources VSA All data sources for evaluation available for VSA are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The data source determines which result types are available see table 3 1 For details on selecting the data source for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Display and Win dow Configuration on page 230 In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Transformation on page 231 the usable bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines 3 Spectrum RealImag CapBuf usable IQ Bandwidth Start 7 68 MHz Stop 7 68 MHz elo M 16 Measurement amp Reference Signal
203. rn teres 466 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRarisition nter rennen rhet 466 STATus QUEStionable FREQu ency P I RansitiOni uu cuan oraret t iret oer rae 467 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENI eee decay trt te eee trn treat io e er nen 465 STAT s QUEStionable EIMitems EMENt Eri E P RE 465 lt gt 0 465 STATus QUEStionable LIMit m ENABIe eapite enne tege 466 S TATus QUEStionable EIMiteme eai erect coe trice rre 467 STATus QUEStionable LIMit m PTRansition eese eene nennen nnne nnne 467 5 5 lt gt 22 0 465 STATus QUEStionable lt gt 466 STATus QUEStionable lt gt 467 STATus QUEStionable lt gt 467 _ lt gt 2 0 465 5 lt lt gt
204. signal contains a pattern it is possible to choose between the above described non data aided estimator and the data aided estimator with the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern If the data aided estimator is employed the phase ambiguitiy can be resolved at this stage Overview of the Demodulation Process Demodulation amp Symbol Decision Setings IQ Samples From Result Range Extract Result Range IQ Meas with corrected timing IQ Meas with corrected timing phase frequency offset scaling Symbol Decision IQ Meas corrected IQ Symbols Passed on to Pattern Symbol Check Fig 4 49 Demodulation and Symbol Decision algorithm Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4 4 Pattern Symbol Check This stage performs a bit by bit comparison between the selected pattern and the demodulated bits It is important to note that this comparison is only performed at posi tions that have been identified by the I Q pattern search as possible pattern positions The algorithm and a simple example are illustrated in figure 4 50 First the pattern candidate bits are extracted from the whole bitstream calculated by the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions stage This means that the symbol stream is cut at the position that has been detected by the 1 0 Pattern Search as the start of the pattern The extracted sequence is then compared to the selected pattern If the demodulation has
205. specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode Retrieving Results In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace ASCII Export on page 223 See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 237 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURSt STARt This command queries the start of the current result range within the capture buffer Return values lt StartValue gt Symbol or time at which x axis starts Example INIT CONT OFF switch to single sweep mode INIT WAI perform single sweep SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC 1 switch to first result range SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR START query start of current first result range in the capture buffer SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC 2 switch to second result range SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR START qu
206. switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a measurement channel has been set to VSA or after a Preset Channel Table 5 1 Default settings for VSA channels Parameter Value Digital standard 3G_WCDMA Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Modulation QPSK WCDMA mapping Transmit filter RRC a 0 22 Measurement filter Transmit filter Signal type Continuous no pattern Symbol rate 3 84 MHz Sample rate 4 Symbol rate 15 36 MHz Capture length 8000 symbols Usable Bandwidth 12 228 MHz Result length 800 symbols Configuration According to Digital Standards Parameter Value Result Range alignment Left at capture buffer start Evaluation range Entire result range Demodulation Compensation for offset and amplitude droop Estimation points per symbol auto 1 Evaluations Window 1 Constellation Meas amp Ref Window 2 Result Summary Window 3 Magnitude absolute Capture buffer Window 4 Symbol table hexadecimal Display points per symbol Sample rate 4 Apart from the Preset Channel function see Preset Channel on page 143 the fol lowing functions are available to restore factory settings to the VSA application via softkeys in the MEAS menu Restore Factory Settirigs ee err
207. sym i Stop 800 sym Fig 9 5 Several traces in one window 4 Press RUN SINGLE again The current capture buffer is evaluated for this trace setup In the channel informa tion bar you can see the number of completed evaluations Stat Count Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod Att 24dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen SGL Stat Count 10 AEVM 1 5 To change the number of evaluations press the SWEEP key and select Statistic Count Config Select Manual and enter the desired number of evaluations e g 12 When you press RUN SINGLE the VSA application will capture data until 12 evaluations are completed 9 3 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals In this measurement example a bursted GSM EDGE signal will be measured and eval uated The goal of this section is to familiarize you with the VSA application features that are relevant specifically for the analysis of bursted signals 9 3 1 Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMW200A If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user manual of the R amp S SMW200A which can be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smw200A html Frequency 1GHz Level 0 dBm Standard GSM EDGE Burst with normal symbol rate User Manual 1173 9292 02 14
208. symbol rate EDGE Wide Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate Half Sine Half Sine filter APCO25 C4FM APCO25 H CPM Filter for the APCO25 C4FM standard Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H DQPSK Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard CDMA2000 1X Forward Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X forward link http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 CDMA2000 1X Reverse Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X reverse link http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period None USER No filter is used User defined filter Define the filter using the SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER command A 3 2 Measurement Filters Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters The most frequently required measurement filters are predefined in the VSA applica tion Table 1 3 Overview of predefined measurement filters EDGE NSR Measurement filter required for the EDGE Normal Symbol Rate standard see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 6 Modulation Accuracy The resulting system is NOT inter symbol inte
209. that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 200 0 to 0 0 RST 40 0 mean 45 0 Default unit DB CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 415 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean phase error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept iden tical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 360 RST 3 5 RMS 1 5 Default unit deg CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean Rho limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric v
210. the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search Settings tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab mum Maine Markers Search Peak Search Real Imag Plot IMA Search Mode for Next Peak neca neds 226 Real Imag trt de diese peed re MES 226 Search Limits Left IGM dte Eden e er apis 226 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 11 7 2 2 Marker Search and Positioning Settings on page 406 Real Imag Plot Defines whether marker search functions are performed on the real or imaginary trace of the Real Imag measurement Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m SEARch on page 410 Search Limits Left Right If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STA
211. the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1 9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1 9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parame
212. to as On Off Keying OOK With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Fig 4 43 Constellation diagram for 2ASK 4ASK 4ASK is a 4 ary Amplitude Shift Keying mapping type With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Symbol Mapping Fig 4 44 Constellation diagram for 4ASK 4 3 10 APSK With Amplitude Phase Shift Keying APSK modulation the information is represented by the signal amplitude and the signal phase 16APSK Fig 4 45 Constellation diagram for 16APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 16APSK mappings the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y R2 R1 depends on the utilized code rate and complies with figure 4 45 4 3 11 Symbol Mapping Table 4 17 Optimum constellation radius ratio y linear channel 18APSK Code Rate Modulation coding spectral Y efficiency 2 3 2 66 3 15 3 4 2 99 2 85 4 5 3 19 2 75 5 6 3 32 2 70 8 9 3 55 2 60 9 10 3 59 2 57 32APSK For DVB S2 32APSK mappings the ratio of the middle circle radius to the inner circle radius R2 R1 and the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y2 depend on the utilized code rate and comply with table 4 18 Table 4 18 Optimum constellatio
213. valid pattern has been found When measuring signals that contain a pattern and are aver aged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 373 5 7 4 Pattern Definition New patterns can be defined and then assigned to a standard Patterns are defined in the New Pattern dialog box which is displayed when you select the New button in the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box Burst and Pattern Configuration Description Mod Order Symbols Format Binary Hex Decimal Remove Size 31 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 247 DSC E BE EL NER T L Removing symbols niic tei r2 ipM irn HR DE De ERR RA eni M Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 376 Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 377 Result Range Configuration Mod order The order of modulation e g 8
214. value of the x axis Retrieving Results Usage Query only FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 223 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt Header gt This command defines if a file header including start frequency sweep time detector etc is created or not A small header with the instrument model the version and the date is always transferred Setting parameters lt Header gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Header on page 223 FORMat DEXPort MODE lt Mode gt This command defines which data are transferred raw data or trace data Setting parameters Mode RAW TRACe RST TRACe Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Data Export Mode on page 222 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the
215. which of the captured data is to be demodulated see chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 251 9 Select the Demodulation button to configure and optimize the synchronization process 10 Select the Meas filter button to select a different or user defined measurement fil ter to improve the accuracy of the error vector see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 244 11 Select the Evaluation Range button to define which part of the demodulated data is to be evaluated and displayed 12 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous sweep and start a new sweep with the new configuration The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on page 252 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSW VSA application However you can also load user defined filters To load a user measurement filter 1 In the Overview select the Meas Filter button 2 In the Meas Filter tab of the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box select Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick To load a user transmit TX filter 1 In the Overview select the Signal Description button 2 In the Modulation tab of t
216. 00 Description Number of symbols in each Data element The number must be identical to the Result Length setting in the Result Range dialog box i e the number of symbols to be demodulated Data Data One character per symbol in the sequence Possible characters are 0 to n 1 where is the lt ModulationOrder gt Spaces tabs and line breaks are ignored One possible sequence of symbols that can be demodulated from the input signal Up to 6000 different sequences i e lt Data gt elements can be defined in total lt RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE gt as specified File End the exact number also depends on available memory space Sample xml file for known data lt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Version 01 00 gt Comment Standard EDGE 8PSK Base 16 lt ModulationOrder gt 8 lt ResultLength gt 148 lt Data gt 777 511 727 242 206 Data Data Data 7 Data 77 770 173 705 631 011 177 177 171 117 777 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 1 337 231 35 770 17 177 17 527 04 241 26 727 242 206 705 631 011 171 117 777 104 004 106 773 1 337 4 0 1 7 511 727 242 206 770 173 705 631 011 177 177 171 117 777 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 1 331 777 511 727 242 206 770 173 705 631 011 177 177 171 117 777 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 1 331 777 511 727 242 206 lt Comment gt lt Base gt lt ModulationOrder gt
217. 00 Hz to 200 MHz proportional up to maximum 160 MHz 200 MHz to 10 GHz 160 MHz Restricting the maximum bandwidth manually By default all installed bandwidth extension options are activated allowing for the maximum possible bandwidth for measurements on the R amp S FSW However in some cases this may not be necessary For example due to the correlation of both parame ters high sample rates automatically lead to an extended analysis bandwidth How 4 2 1 9 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth ever while a high sample rate may be necessary for example due to postprocessing in an OFDM system the wide bandwidth is not really required On the other hand low sample rates lead to small usable bandwidths In order to ensure the availabilty of the required bandwidth the minimum required bandwidth for the specified sample rate can be selected via remote command only Thus if one of the bandwidth extension options is installed the maximum bandwidth can be restricted manually to a value that may improve the measurement see Maxi mum Bandwidth on page 182 In this case the hardware of the regular RF path is used rather than the hardware required by the R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 band width extension options The following improvements may be achieved longer measurement time for sample rates under 300 MHz e Power trigger is available data processing becomes up to 10 times faster Ma
218. 02 03 04 05 05 07 08 The effect of nonlinear phase distortions 64QAM signal is illustrated in table 4 21 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected These effects are caused for instance by saturation in the transmitter output stages The sig nal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The second column shows the signal after scaling Table 4 22 Phase transfer functions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortions analyzer Phase Transter Function Tranentler 02 015 Phase ae amp o 915 34 42 3 4 2 90 Input Power 029 Phase Tianster F unetoe Anayzer 02 015 Phase I e b e m o e 9 8 w 2 0 6 6 4 2 0 Input Power A logarithmic display of the phase transfer functions is shown in table 4 22 The ana lyzer trace is shifted by the phase described above as against the transmitter trace Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Mele uw EA fia 5p mua ong ges t Logs 1 P gj Imaginary Fig 4 62 Additive noise A 64QAM signal with additive noise is shown in figure 4 62 only the first quadrant is shown The symbol decision t
219. 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 303 Activating Vector Signal Analysis lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 303 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measuremen
220. 20 4 08 Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 800 A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw B Result Summary Phase Err Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 2 43 Stop 2 43 C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym Fig 9 4 Default window layout for Measurement Example 1 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration 1 To change the window layout i e the display configuration do one of the following e Select the Display Config softkey in the main VSA menu e Select the Display Configuration block in the Overview only if Specifics for option is disabled Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar 2 Replace window 1 by an eye diagram of the inphase component of the measure ment signal a Select the Meas amp Ref data source from the SmartGrid selection bar and drag it over window 1 i Close the SmartGrid mode by selecting the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar c Select the Window Config softkey d Select the result type Eye Diagram Real 1 3 Close the dialog to take a look at your new display configuration ME CIC I MM User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 264 Measurement Examples R amp S9FSW K70 E M 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer Using the R amp S FSW VSA application you can navigate through the capture buffer i e control which part of the capture buffer is currently analyzed Note In the Spe
221. 203 Alignment known data 134 Configuration 201 Defining 24291 AE 127 Demodulation process 99 Display ne 2127 tradira 216 Length 128 202 9 1 e 203 Overlapping 287 ace REMOTE acute ep eese tree Run In out m Selecting Result Summary a 51 Display points per symbol T Evaltiatioris tr es xerit M Formulae FSK mA PRESUME type rrr entr ten t her peret Result type Display hri rene ene 14 Transformation EP Window configuration 231 Result types Bit error tate BER i iae estne 21 Capture buffer eae tre rrr eror rade 16 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay 23 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude 24 Constellation Frequency enne 24 Constellation VQ win carat ets 25 Constellation Rotated 26 EQUALIZER me 18 17 Error Vector Magnitude EVM 27 Eye Diagram Frequency 28 Eye Diagram Imag Q 29 Eye Diagram Real l 4 30 Frequency Absolute 2 30 Frequency Error Absolute
222. 28 Real Imag I Q on page 47 chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 chapter 3 2 34 Vector on page 56 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL TCAP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Measurement amp Reference Signal The measurement signal or the ideal reference signal or both The default result type is Magnitude Relative The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 chapter 3 2 23 Magnitude Relative on page 43 chapter 3 2 26 Phase Wrap on page 45 chapter 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap on page 46 chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 16 Evaluation Data Sources in VSA chapter 3 2 12 Frequency Relative on page 32 chapter 3 2 28 I Q on page 47 chapter 3 2 10 Eye Diagram Real 1 on page 30 chapter 3 2 9 Eye Diagram Imag Q on page 29 chapter 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency on page 28 chapter 3 2 5 Constellation on page 25 chapter 3 2 34 Vector I Q on page 56 chapter 3 2 4 Constellation Frequency on page 24 chapter 3 2 33 Vector Frequency on page 55 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL REF see LAYout ADD WINDow on 423 Symbols The detected symbols i e the detected bits displayed in a table The default result type is a hexadecimal symbol table Other formats for the symbol table are available but no other result types see chap
223. 3 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Offset on page 151 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Configuring VSA Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup Manual configuration of the input and frontend is described in chapter 5 5 Input Out put and Frontend Settings on page 152 320 Using External MIXGIS ice teeenece za epu te cta eu tecto cba Ionas aspera Ce Ran 322 e Configuring Digital VQ Input and 335 e Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 339 uel 342 e Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 344 e DUGO SENS 348 Re 350 e Amplitude rere te ten iesus erc a pena e 351 353 Scaling and SIT PE 355 RF Input 2 1 00 21 011 6 rere 320 tre aei cte Pei anda ead anata eee 320 ds MELDE 321 INPut FIETerHPASSESTATe iiiter rtr RAO erue nce n REPREOE 321 IPE Se YIGESTATS 322 lll macmE
224. 30 SENS CORR amp ction CVL CATAlOg iiia iiio n E Ta ia raria 330 SENSeJCORRectiom CVO COUENT nn a E Dec aA 330 SENSE JCORRection CVLCOMMBRPI riara aae tere ten 330 SENSe CORReEctioniCVLIDA TA naa a E NE RN E aaa 331 SENSe J CORRection CVLHARMOM 331 331 CYL PORT Scorri aii eu ene tete ee 332 SENSe CORRa amp ction CVUL SELEC iirinn ianari inini auia ni aa 332 5 332 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still availab
225. 5 1 Inphase Fig 4 59 Effect of gain imbalance The gain difference in the and Q channels during signal generation in the transmitter is referred to as gain imbalance The effect of this error on the constellation diagram and the unit circle are shown in figure 4 59 In the example the gain in the channel is slightly reduced which causes a distortion of coordinates in the direction The unit cir cle of the ideal constellation points has an elliptic shape User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 115 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The gain imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the gain imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal The distortions gain imbalance and quadrature error can only be measured without ambiguity if the following two conditions are fullfilled o Preconditions for Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Error measurements e a pattern is detected the modulation is a non differential non rotating QAM PSK Otherwise only the measurement parameter Imbalance which is a combination of the gain imbalance and the quadrature error is significant Quadrature Error Fig 4 60 Effect of Quadrature Error The quadrature error is another modulation error which is shown in figure 4 60 In this diagram the and Q components of th
226. 500 bandwidth extension option is installed Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 600 MHz proportional up to maximum 500 MHz 600 MHz to 10 GHz 500 MHz bandwidths for RF input Usable bandwidth MHz 800 Activated option B500 Output sample 10 rate fout MHz Fig 4 8 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B500 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode with active B500 bandwidth extension the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz 4 2 1 11 Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option B2000 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 provides measurement bandwidths up to 2 GHz MSRA operating mode MSRA operating mode is not available if the R amp S FSW B2000 bandwidth extension option is active Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 10 kHz to 10 GHz proportional up to maximum 2 GHz bandwidths for RF input Usable bandwidth GHz Activated Output sample rate fout GHz Fig 4 9 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B2000 4 2 2 Sample Rates and Bandwidths for Digital I Q Data Definitions Clock rate the rate at which data is physically transmitted between the R amp S FSW a
227. 6 2 Trace Export Settings The captured trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file The format of these files can be configured Traces Std 3G WCDMA SR 3 84 MHz mm Traces Trace Export Mode Header Off Decimal Seperator Point Export Trace to ASCII File for all Windows Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window 7 seine 1 Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref Data Expo Mode 222 uic MMC 223 DecimalSep elo eee Dx eds ee eee sena en 223 Trace ASCI io m 223 Data Export Mode Defines whether raw data as captured or trace data evaluated is stored Remote command FORMat DEXPort MODE on page 438 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 222 Markers Header If enabled a header with scaling information etc is included in the file Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 438 Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 438 Trace ASCII Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the traces of the captured data in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Either the traces for the selected window only see Specifics for on page 143 are export
228. 70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result dis play Spectrum VSA Ref Level 22 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 10 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz ResLen 200 SGL TRG EXT A Freq Error Abs 1Clrw Phase Error Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 5 13 09 30 16 Solution These spikes are usually uncritical and are caused by zero transitions in the Plane Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative to Answer Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref calculates the FFT of the result Reall mag Meas amp Ref Reallmag Meas amp Ref has the unit none In this case none means the measured signal has been scaled such that it matches the ideal corresponding ref erence signal as well as possible The reference signal in turn is scaled such that max abs at symbol instants 1 0 Question How can get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote control Answer Use the following remote commands SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load the GSM standard SENSel1 DDEMod RLENgth 10000 SYM Enlarge the capture buffer length such that all the bursts you want to demodulate can be seen within the capture buffer INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Go to single sweep mode Use
229. 73 9292 02 14 271 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples spectrum VSA Ref Level 25 00 dBm Std EDGE 6PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 10 GHz ResLen 148 SGL Stat Count B BURST PATTERN AEVM 1 Crw 2 Result Summary Continuous Sweep 0 25 V 0 67 29 deg Continue 1 Select Result Range eg 9 Carrier Freq Error Sweep 2 Gain Imbalance L Quadrature Error 4 Amplitude Droop 2 Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Mag CapBuf 1 Statistic Count Auta Select Result Rng 2 cem Start 0 sym Stop 10000 sym Fig 9 9 Navigation through the capture buffer 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges The Result Length is the number of symbols that are to be demodulated and ana lyzed together In most common applications only the parts of the capture buffer con taining the bursts need to be analyzed Hence for bursted signals the Result Length usually coincides with the burst length However there are certain scenarios where the rising and falling edge of a burst are also of interest e g checking the power ramping of the device under test For this measurement task it is useful to choose a Result Length that exceeds the burst length 1 In order to include the rising and falling edges of the bursts in the EVM vs Time display window 1 you need to increase the Result Length In the Overview select
230. 83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename Digital Standards lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN IQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt Selects the application channel type for the current channel See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 302 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt VSA VSA R amp S FSW K70 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel
231. ACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442 uum EE INN a User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 38 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 19 3 2 20 Impulse Response Phase The Impulse Response Phase shows the phase of the equalizer coefficients in the time domain ImpRespPhas Equalizer Start 5 sym Stop 5 sym Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC FORM UPH to define the phase result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442 Impulse Response Real Imag The Real Imag diagram of the impulse response is a stem diagram It displays the filter characteristics in the time domain for both the and the Q branches individually Using this information the equalizer is uniquely characterized and can be recreated by other applications mum EP S NU User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 39 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 21 1 Real ImpRespReallmag Equalizer 1 Imag ImpRespReallmag Equalizer Available for source types Equalizer
232. ALCulatesmsDDEM SPECtFUl STAT itte et Retenir 430 CAL illo 430 lt FORMA cite uet eaae EN E ia tea dux ede scu 431 CALOCulate n STATistics CCDF STATe cessere neret tenete 433 CAL Culatesn gt STAl istics MODE oi ii eate atu Lore etn et eter evo teat 433 DISPlay WINDow n ITEM LINE VALue cessere 433 DISPlay WINDowsn PRATe AU TO nonii iriiria nipa iiiaae ina bawiin aaa 434 bISPlayDWINDowens PRA Te 435 BISPlay WINBowsnsETRAGeSYMBDOL ecrit o ideae deed iot EE Rae aii 435 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essen 435 This command switches the result type transformation to spectrum mode Spectral evaluation is available for the following result types MAGNitude PHASe UPHase e FREQuency Real Imag RIMAG The result types are defined using the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the meas signal CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase measurement CALC 5 ON Selects the spectral display of the phase Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 231 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Feed gt
233. CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean EVM peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean center frequency deviation error Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1 kHz Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 414 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA ee CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command define
234. CPI parameters 57 58 Pattern search COMMQUFATON 195 Demodulation process SIE 13 Enabling 196 199 RED D 278 Found socio e ot tieni les e t 196 correlation threshold 196 Performing Process Remote Selected pattern Patterns Adding to Standatd cci cernere toa trei 198 Assigning to standard 245 Available Coarse synchronization Gomipatible recepta eet ae ee oh c gua Configuration Copying Creating Definition Definition remote prb ES Displaying Editing Enabling 5 nues Fine synchronization Managing cud OMS CE EE Reference for result range Removing from standard Restoring che Selected Standard Symbol CHECK isie ot roce deese rede Symbol check demodulation process Symbol format Symbols WOFKING ei nie b aee Peak search Peaks c Formula Marker positioning Distortion effec ui re rte Formula Wrap resu
235. Ce t STATe on page 402 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe t commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all trace modes For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available For the Magnitude Absolute result display the trace modes Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual result ranges and thus may not provide useful results User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 220 Trace Settings Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several measurements The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures View The current contents of the tr
236. Description FSK ASK APSK User Modulation Uses the selected user defined modulation loaded from a file For more information on these modulation types see chapter 4 3 Symbol Mapping on page 77 Remote command SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 310 Load User Modulation Modulation Type This function is only available if the modulation type User Modulation is selected Opens a file selection dialog box to select the file that contains the user defined modu lation vam file For details on user defined modulation files see chapter 4 3 11 User defined Modula tion on page 97 Remote command SENS DDEM FORM UQAM see SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 310 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 316 Modulation Order Depending on the Modulation Type various orders of modulation are available Type Available orders PSK BPSK 3Pi 4 QPSK Pi 8 D8PSK QPSK 8PSK DQPSK Offset QPSK 3Pi 8 8PSK Pi 4 DQPSK Pi 4 QPSK D8PSK MSK MSK DMSK QAM 16QAM Pi 4 32QAM 256QAM Pi 4 16QAM 64QAM 512QAM 32QAM 128QAM 1024QAM FSK 2FSK 4FSK 8FSK Signal Description Type Available orders ASK 2ASK 4ASK APSK 16APSK 32APSK Remote command PSK SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on 313 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 313 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat on page 314 MSK SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat on page 312 QAM SENSe DD
237. E rz Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event Configuring the Result Display LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow 2 command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a win
238. EMod QAM FORMat on page 313 SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate on page 314 FSK SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate on page 311 ASK SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate on page 309 SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate on page 309 FSK Ref Deviation FSK only The FSK Reference Deviation sets the deviation to the reference frequency In case of 2FSK it indicates the distance from the reference frequency to the positive negative deviation frequency and in case of 4FSK the distance to the outer positive negative deviation frequency To set the deviation as a multiple of the symbol rate x SR select Relative mode To set the deviation as an absolute value in Hz select Absolute mode Note that this parameter is available only for FSK modulated signals Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue on page 309 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative on page 309 Modulation Mapping The available mapping types depend on the Modulation Type and Modulation Order For more information on the modulation mapping refer to chapter 4 3 Symbol Map ping on page 77 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue on page 312 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog on page 312 Symbol Rate The symbol rate also determines the bandwidth of the data recording and demodu lation You can change the default rate by entering a value in Hz The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on t
239. Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 143 11 4 Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements Manual configuration of digital standards is described in chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 139 SENSeJDDEMod BEAGTetry uiri dtt eatenus 306 SENSe DDEMod PRESet S TANdard ecce 306 SENSe DDEMod S TANGardiCOMMen be titu caeco tetro t xr eren eus 306 SENSe IDDEMod STANdard DELete 2 2 o acta 307 4 5 307 SENS amp IDDEMoGd STANGA SAVE aa eter tr 307 Digital Standards SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue lt Factory gt This command restores the factory settings of standards or patterns for the VSA appli cation Setting parameters lt Factory gt ALL STANdard PATTern ALL Restores both standards and patterns RST ALL Usage Setting only Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on pag
240. F on page 159 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENSe PROBe lt p ID PAR TNUMDE notet ct 342 SENSe PROBesp IDISRNumbeE 342 SENSe PROBesps SETUpIMODBE 343 SENSe PROBesp SE lupiNAME 2 5 2 1 erret rei ge eet ttr renes ded 343 ISENSe PROBaesp SETUp S TA Te9 iudicet a di na etre Ere e A NS E 344 SENSeJPROBesp SETupiTYPE rte A te Sem RYE RC 344 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt SerialNo gt Usage Configuring VSA 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Serial number in a string Query only SENSe PROB
241. FSW B2000 Alignment Signal Source Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel a a a a i gt TRIG IN optional sd Eus Continue Alignment For the second alignment step the connector must be disconnected from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector and instead connected to the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE connector on the R amp S FSW To continue the alignment select the Continue Alignment button After the second alignment step has been completed successfully a new dialog box is displayed REF OUT 10 MHz TRIG IN optional In order to switch from alignment mode to measurement mode move the cable from the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE back to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connec tor so that it is then connected to the CH1 input on the oscilloscope If UNCAL is displayed alignment was not yet performed successfully User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 164 5 5 2 Input Output and Frontend Settings If both alignment steps were performed successfully the date of alignment is indicated For a description of possible errors see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and 1 0 Input User Manual Remote commands SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe on page 346 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE on page 346 Output Settings The R amp S FSW VSA application can provide trigger output to other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FS
242. File Format Description The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Clock Contains the number of samples of the data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the data A signal gen erator typically outputs the I Q data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and values interl
243. For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 SENSETDDEMGQ PRA EG aa E ORARE 361 SENSe IDBEMod REEBgthAD oec eoi ope doc eive Pc perpe opos 361 SENSeJDDEMsd REENgSIBEVALEUuS a ena tau E ecc 361 dca ta dr delle stt ir d 362 TRACe lt sn gt IQ jupe 362 TRACedOWBANd STAT rrr 362 TRAGe IQ WBANGd MBWIEDTH i neis 363 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod PRATe lt CaptOverSmplg gt Defines the number of samples that are captured per symbol i e the factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate This parameter also affects the demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable bandwidth The sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 66 Setting parameters lt CaptOverSmplg gt 418116132 The factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate e g 4
244. For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range 0 sto 10 05 RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters lt Offset gt The allowed range is 0 s to 30 s RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 189 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger so
245. GL The sweep is set to single sweep mode In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in VSA application 1 Window name 2 Result type 3 Data source type 4 Trace color 5 Displayed signal for Meas amp Ref or multi data source M Meas R Ref C Capture buffer E Error 6 Trace mode Diagram area The diagram area displays the results according to the selected result displays see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop symbols or time of the evaluation range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 Measurements and Result Displays Various different
246. HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Configuring VSA Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA 1 11 5 2 3 Configuring Digital Input and Output Useful commands for digital data described elsewhere INP SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 322 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower page 366 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital data input and output
247. IXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 324 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDOVEF 2 2 cda vea d ua ed ias idi 325 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARI cerent eterno gne Rn dran 325 SENSeJ MIXer FREQuency S TOP ue 325 ISENSeTMIXer HARMonIcBANDJPRESGl 2 brute eran na Dre nre ch ads 326 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue eese 326 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STA
248. L pezueeur ZHM 228 022 9 O9L 3903 13snqjeuu 3983 251 2008 YSN 39d3 aN 3933 _ 7 3983 E N GLivvl e weyed 871 0061 3903 pezueeur 247 228 022 548 8 548 3903 cav WSS 8v Ws9 0 7 ANON ZH WSS ysungss 98 8 weed 98 WSS 0 MSND 22228 022 MSIAG 159 84 WS9 jsung 191095 Logs ISO 3NON ZH INSO S9 J 0 MSND lt 80 2 314 159 ZIENS 86 159 m jsunguon 2 7 ANON ZH NSO 221001 2 08S WSS 0 MSND lt 80 2 MSING UAS WS 2051 59 0499 ANON ZH WSO 9227 90 Srl 05 1 WSS 0 MSND 22228 022 MSING 159 ws Sea u16ue sang 19114 9je1 Budden 1425 ulayed 10 10 YOIeAS 19 5 Joquis pyepuejs pue 5 Jo 3517 L L Predefined Standards and Settings s WOUS e JO OU SJOYIP eSeuw si Jo 425 991 x 2 71061 9 MSH 3503 lesna 7 2983 esingepiM 1ejue2 0051 W
249. L SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Configuring VSA Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return usef
250. Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 153 See Digital Input State on page 156 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 158 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA MSRT mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual Configuring VSA SOUNNGS 323 e Miker uices sats NAR SX NX YES SNR Reed SPA XXE SR Vk 324 e Conversion Loss Table 329 e Programming Example Working with an External 333 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer ISENSeJMIXer S DATE p Eno nane debian dea 323 SENSe IMIXeCBIAS HIGHL ponere Rp bp Sot npn ue uude 323 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW eec ttttttet tet tnte te 323 SENSE MIX er EOPONW
251. Mod QAM NSTate eeeeseeeee nennen emnes ness nsn sess ias 314 SENSe DDEMOG GPSK FORMAL ertet te rtt reet udo rutas Rp 314 SENSE J DDEMOJ SRA TO 1 1 e ere E a E aAa A ERA 315 SENSe DDEMod TFILter ceci rho te rite nbn tun hk Ronan ka 315 I SENSedDDEModg TFIEter NAME torre ert Ea e tt Eoo online za 315 Configuring VSA ISBNSeTDDEMaed STAT ecc adu ai Unit trae ene de e a elie 316 SENSEJDDEMObdTFIEIGEUSER eae oon ER et e E FERREA Rak Ry 316 SENSe DDEMad DSERIINANIE 2 reo sped a omne rp br eaae dedere ner 316 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative FSKRefDev This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as a multiple of the symbol rate For details see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 147 Setting parameters lt FSKRefDev gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 15 RST 1 Default unit NONE Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as an absolute value in Hz Setting parameters lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 64e9 RST 100e3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on pa
252. NC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COPY GSM PATT Copies GSM TSCO to GSM PATT Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save As on page 199 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete This command deletes a sync sequence The sync sequence to be deleted must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 376 Usage Event Manual operation See Delete on page 199 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA lt Data gt This command defines the sync sequence of a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 376 Important The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation e g for an 8PSK modulation the value range is from 0 to 7 The degree of modulation belongs to the pattern and is set using the DDEM SEAR SYNC NST command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 376 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt Data gt string Four values represent a symbol hexadecimal format The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation With a degree of modulation of 4 all symbols have a value range of 0000 0001 0002 0003 With a degree of modulation of 8 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Example DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00010000FFFF Defines the pattern data Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User De
253. OF enin e a beide are qe EXER AREE n NE aad 324 eoo eit rir ue ata pae eve Gute dt ca Re 324 SENSeTMIXeETERShaOlg accade dere vac ettet ertet cot eaae retten 324 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 323 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 323 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm SENSe M
254. P si Jo 425 991 x WL us 5 5 338 0 ysung 000 euis ZHW SHO OIZ 009 10916 19 ue2 SUON 33g 0 ysung 000L 0L ou ZH 009 sdg 912 19 4 Seo wiayed ysung Joy ayes Buiddew 1425 uonenjeag ynsey ulayed 10 youeag 20 yoseas 1g eudiv joquiAg uonejnpow _ Jopjo4 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 1 The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSW VSA application For general information on the use of these filters see chapter 4 1 Filters and Band widths During Signal Processing on page 59 Transmit Filters The transmit filters required for common standards are predefined in the VSA applica tion Table 1 2 Overview of predefined Transmit filters RC Raised cosine RRC Root raised cosine Gauss Gauss filter GMSK Gauss filter convolved with a rectangular filter typically used for MSK Linearized GMSK Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE 3GPP TS 45 004 normal symbol rate EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher
255. PCO25 H D8PSK Wide Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Narrow standard specific filter filter combination with Pulse ISI EDGE Wide Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Wide Pulse standard specific filter filter combination with ISI User Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination with low ISI A 4 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on the result type which are also separated by a semico lon If several traces in several windows are exported to one file the data for each window is listed subsequently Within the data for a single window the data for the individual traces is listed subsequently User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 487 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data For details on which data is stored for which result display see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 439 Table 1 5 ASCII file format for VSA trace data export File contents Description Header Type FSW Instrument model Version 1 40 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2012 Date of data set storage Header section for individual window Screen 1 Window name Points per Symbol 4 x Axis Start 13 sym
256. Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is signif icantly different Solution e sure that the position of the Evaluation Lines is reasonable The Result Summary only evaluates sample instants that are within the evaluation lines Hence in the case the Result Range covers the burst ramps it is important to adjust the Evaluation Range appropriately mum EP EIN NM HC User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 290 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 sym C Mag CapBuf Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN e 1Clrw Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 syn C Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 dBm Start 0 sym Fig 10 13 Solution Result Summary with correct evaluation range setting Make sure that the same samples are evaluated By default the EVM trace dis plays all sample instants e g if the sample rate is 4 the EVM trace shows 4 sam ples per symbol The Result Summary does not automatically evaluate all sample User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 291
257. R amp S FSW K70 Vector Signal Analysis User Manual Start 0 sym 25000 sym 5 1173 9292 02 14 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 22 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000 08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000K85 The following firmware options are described R amp S FSW K70 1313 1416 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S SMW200A is abbrevi ate
258. R amp S FSW with option B80 or 080 1 Bandwidth Extension 71 e R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Extension 71 e Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option ZO EE 72 e Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option 8500 X 73 e Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option M 74 4 2 1 1 Bandwidth Extension Options Max usable Required B option Required U option s Q BW 10 MHz 28 MHz B28 U28 40 MHz B40 U28 U40 or B28 U40 80 MHz B80 U28 U40 U80 or B28 U40 U80 or B40 U80 160 MHz B160 U28 U40 U80 U160 or B28 U40 U80 U160 or B40 U80 U160 or B80 U160 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Max usable Required B option Required U option s Q BW 320 MHz B320 U28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B40 U80 U160 U320 or B80 U160 U320 or B160 U320 500 MHz B500 See data sheet 4 2 1 2 Relationship Between Sample Rate and Usable I Q Bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Digital Baseband
259. R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement instants E g for a PSK modulation by default only symbol instants contribute to the EVM result Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm m t el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 100 SGL ResRange Count 0 Start 3 Const I Q Meas amp Ref Start 2 535 Mod Offset QPSK SR 1 0 MHz Y Settings Overview Cirw Result Summary ___ 2 Unit Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop power Stop 103 sym 1M Clrw D Vector I Q Error 1 Restore Factory Settings Stop 2 535 Start 0 254 Stop 0 254 Tri tal 12 03 2010 5 09 44 29 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSW K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S FSQ K70 Solution The FSK deviation error in the R amp S FSW K70 is calculated as the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 147 What is referred to as the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is calculated differently see the R amp S FSQ K70 Software Manual and is comparable to the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSW K70 However while the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is given in Hz the Freq Err 5 in the R amp S FSW K70 is given in percent i e relative to the FSK Meas Devi ation User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 292 R amp S FSW K
260. REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display in the active measurement channel Configuring the Result Display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display i
261. RF input ccr once nenne 154 Measurement 61 62 486 Measurement formulae 499 Predefined i RECEN rani Signal PROCESSING 59 Standard specific 498 Transmit e 61 485 Transmit formulae cierres 498 Typcial combinations 487 YIG remote eene ridotte tete teet 322 Bc 64 Fine Synchronization entretien t hes 211 Folders Digital StanGardS cc rot ies tre tb tegere 140 Formulae Analytically calculated filters 497 gt 55 xo oti mei D Pe x edidi n 491 Measurement filters 2 cite chere bres 499 Parameters 491 Result Summary parameters 494 Result Summary parameters FSK 495 Standard specific filters 498 Statistics 496 Tirace averagilig e e tinci tne 497 MME soe ertet io e rie rt eee 498 Free Run Ea 185 Frequency Absolute result type eene 30 Configuration is Configuration remote 350 Formula EUM 491 Offset TA Relative result type 32 Frequency error Ab
262. RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 220 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State OFF 0 1 RST 1 TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed 11 7 2 11 7 2 1 Analysis Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 220 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 221 Working with Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Manual configuration of markers is described in chapter 6 3 Markers on page 223 Individual Marker Setlhgs e eee lane ERE RR ERR ieee ade ean 403 e Marker Search and Positioning 406 Individual Marker Settings In VSA evaluations up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time GALGulate n MARKersm AQOFEF Eaa 403 gt gt
263. RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Configuring VSA Manual operation See Y Axis Reference Value page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180 11 5 3 Signal Capture The signal capture commands define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the VSA application in MSRA MSRT mode define the application data extract and analysis interval
264. Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC FORM RIM to define the real image result type see CALCulatecn FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442 Magnitude Absolute Magnitude of the source signal in an individual capture buffer range max 256 000 samples If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping result ranges with a size of 256 000 samples each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Magnitude Absolute result display To scroll through the samples in different ranges use the Sweep Select Result Rng function or directly after a sweep turn the rotary knob When you scroll in the dia gram the right edge of the current range or the selected result range is displayed in the center of the next range if possible To display the entire capture buffer with all ranges in one diagram use the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display Note that trace modes that calculate results for several sweeps Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual ranges and thus may not provide useful results in this result display For more
265. S FSW see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual e Filters and Bandwidths During Signal 59 e Sample Rate Symbol Rate and I Q 66 Symbol Mapping 77 Overview of the Demodulation 5 98 e Signal Model Estimation and Modulation 110 e Measurement Rango 5 nein eat EE Pr ELLE AY RERO 126 e Display Points vs Estimation Points per 131 e Capture Buffer 132 e Known Data Files Dependencies 133 e VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating 134 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing This section describes the used filters in vector signal analysis with an R amp S FSW as well as the bandwidth after each filter The relevant filters for vector signal analysis are shown in figure 4 1 IQ Demodulation Bandwidth Bandwidth Optional Equalizer Filter Halfband Filter Decimation Filter IF Filter i i Measurement Filter i Digital IF Baseband Baseband Baseband Analog Section Digital Hardware Section DSP Sectio
266. SAZ enig yaque9 SUON IN yoo GL6LOL Z 0 Jung 2291 90 MSINS ZHN ASAZ enig 19082 SUON IN HG uoo GLEQE Z 0 sung 99 90 ASNS ZHW ujoojenig 2 eseud Sc _ 08 ANON ZH 9 MSdv Zd OOdV 2 eseud oDueiJ 191 Ndo 92 INQO H 894 H S ZOOdV ZH 9 MSdv Zd OOdV W49 82094 002 GZOOdV ZH 8v MSdv 2 ScOOdV ANON GZOOdV 002 20 OH 2 48 7 MSdOG 2 STOOdV GZOOdV SEO ISI ye 90 008 0002 VINGO ZHW 8822 1esgo 0002742 X L ISI _ a913 XL 3 MeVWOD 008 0002 VINGO ZHIN 8822 540 J Seo N u16ue sang 19114 9je1 Buiddew 1426 10 5 joquiAs Predefined Standards and Settings s ous e JO PJEPUE S OU SJOYIP
267. SCilloscope COUPling lt CoupType gt Configures the coupling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope Parameters lt CoupType gt Coupling type DC Direct connection with 50 termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal CDLimit Direct connection with 1 MQ termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components RST DC Manual operation See Coupling on page 189 11 5 2 7 Output Settings The following commands are required to query or provide output at the R amp S FSW con nectors OUTPut IF SBANd Configuring VSA This command queries the sideband provided at the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector com pared to the sideband of the RF signal The sideband depends on the current center frequency Return values lt SideBand gt Example Usage NORMal The sideband at the output is identical to the RF signal INVerted The sideband at the output is the inverted RF signal sideband OUTP IF IF2 Activates output at the IF OUTPUT 2 GHZ connector OUTP IF SBAN Queries the sideband provided at the connector Query only OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW Parameters Source Example Manual operation IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connec
268. STAT s QUEStionable MOD lati nsn gt FSK NTRanSiiOM akaaka EA 467 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK PTRansition cc ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeseeeeesesneeeseeteeeees 467 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt 465 5 5 lt gt 1 0 2 465 5 5 lt gt 1 1 02002 022001006000 466 5 5 lt gt 1 467 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo PTRansition esses 467 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo EVENI essessssssssssssseeee 465 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n MAGNitude ENABle esee 466 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n MAGNitude NTRansition sese 467 5 5 lt gt 2 467 lt gt 466 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe NTRansition esses 467 5
269. Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics If the input data is largely known in advance define files with the known data to compare the measured data to see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 249 This can improve demodulation significantly 4 Select the Input Frontend button to define the input signal s center frequency amplitude and other basic settings 5 Select the Signal Capture button and define how much and which data to cap ture In MSRA MSRT mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 10 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode on page 134 e Capture length the duration or number of symbols to be captured e Sample rate how many points are to be captured for each symbol 6 Optionally select the Trigger tab and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted In MSRA MSRT mode define a Capture Offset instead see chapter 4 10 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode on page 134 7 For bursted signals select the Burst Pattern button and define the criteria to detect the individual bursts within the input signal see chapter 8 2 2 How to Per form Pattern Searches on page 245 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 Select the Cut Result Ranges button and define
270. Selects the signal source and for the equalizer and multi source diagrams also the result type for evaluation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 8 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 423 Only for the Equalizer Impulse Response and Equalizer Frequency Response as well as the multi source diagrams this command is required Configuring the Result Display Setting parameters lt Feed gt string XTIM DDEM MEAS Measured signal XTIM DDEM REF Reference signal XTIM DDEM ERR VECT Error vector XTIM DDEM ERR MPH Modulation errors XTIM DDEM MACC Modulation accuracy XTIM DDEM SYMB Symbol table TCAP Capture Buffer XTIM DDEM IMP Equalizer Impulse Response XFR DDEM RAT Equalizer Frequency Response XFR DDEM IRAT Equalizer Channel Frequency Response Group Delay XTIM DDEM TCAP ERR Spectrum of Real Image for capture buffer and error vector XTIM DDEM MEAS ERR Spectrum of Real Image for measurement and error vector CALCulate lt n gt FORMat Format This command defines the result type of the traces Which parameters are available depends on the setting for the data source see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 and table 3 1 Whether the result type shows absolute or relative values is defined using the DISP WIND TRAC command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt
271. Switches the transmit filter off ON Switches the transmit filter specified by SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command automati cally switches the filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 148 SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects a user defined transmit filter file Setting parameters lt FilterName gt The name of the transmit filter file Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 148 See Load User Filter on page 148 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME lt Name gt Selects the file that contains the user defined modulation to be loaded Setting parameters lt Name gt string Path and file name of the vam file 11 5 1 2 Configuring VSA Example SENS DDEM FORM UQAM Define the use of a user defined modulation SENS DDEM USER NAME D MyModulation vam Select the file name to be loaded Manual operation See Load User Modulation on page 146 Signal Structure The signal structure commands describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instrument can be synchronized thus adapting the result range 5 317 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSEtLENGth
272. Symbol Check The I Q Pattern Search stage can only detect whether the similarity between the pattern and the capture buffer exceeds a certain threshold and in this way find the most likely positions where a pattern can be found Within this stage the VSA application checks whether the pattern symbols bits really coincide with the symbol decisions at the pre detected position For example if one out of 20 symbols does not coincide the I Q Pattern Search stage might detect this I Q pattern but the Pattern Symbol Check stage will decline it Note that this stage is only active if the pattern search is switched on If individual symbols do not match the pattern these symbols are indicated by a red frame in the symbol table Reference Signal Generation The ideal reference signal is generated based on the detected symbols and the specifi cations of the signal model i e the modulation scheme and the transmit filter Tx filter Measurement Filtering Both the measurement signal and the reference signal are filtered with the specified measurement filter Synchronization In this stage the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated For PSK QAM and MSK modulated signals an estimation algorithm is used in order to obtain estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error phase error offset gain imbalance quadrature error and the amplitude droop Alterna tively it is possible to d
273. TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442 rum EP ED gt e a User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 23 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 3 3 2 4 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude The frequency response magnitude of the channel indicates which distortions occurred during transmission of the input signal It is only determined if the equalizer is activa ted 2 ChanFreqResp Equalizer ei 07 Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz The bandwidth for which the channel transfer function can be estimated is not only limi ted by the usable bandwidth but also by the bandwidth of the analyzed input sig nal Areas with low reception power e g at the filter edges may suffer from less accu rate estimation results Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FEED XFR DDEM IRAT to define the channel frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 442 Constellation Frequency The instantaneous frequency of the source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the symbol decision instants are
274. TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 379 5 9 Demodulation Settings During demodulation of the vector signal some undesired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroni zation process e Demodulation 204 e Advanced Demodulation 208 Demodulation Settings 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation o Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM values The Demodulation settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Demodulation button from the Overview e Select the Demod Meas Filter softkey from the main VSA menu A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation settings depend on the used modulation R amp S9FSW K70 Configuration Demodulation amp Measurement Filter EE Compensate for I Q Offset Amplitude Droop Equalizer State Mode Filter Length Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter I Q Imbalance Symbol Rate Error Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref Start 0 002 Stop 0 002
275. Te ieri rani 327 2 327 SENSE MIX HARMONIG TYPE va 2A ROO VEND 327 HARM onic LOW ta 327 SENSE MIX LOSSHIGH 327 SENSe MIXenLOSS TABLESEHIGEL hiat pad e cass aad cr pei 328 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW eene 328 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW eene 328 IRI bier M PP 328 329 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 323 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer
276. Te on page 411 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 410 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 410 Markers 6 3 3 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Peak 2 ODIO E mM 227 Search 227 Max 227 Searc REPETIT TESTOR RE 227 Search Next 2 eee 227 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 409 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 407 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 408 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 407 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 408 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of th
277. The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 192 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA or MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Performing a Measurement Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on 398 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 399 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This co
278. This command defines the format of the input signal Parameters lt DataType gt 1 IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF 1 Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Manual operation Q Mode 158 CALibration AlQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals For more information see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual 11 5 2 5 Configuring VSA Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 110 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF Example CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON Manual operation See High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband R
279. Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 392 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on 392 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 393 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 393 Adjusting Settings Automatically Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current mea surement r
280. Tiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 421 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 420 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n Z00M MULTiple czoom STATe on page 421 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 420 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 421 for each multiple zoom window Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode 6 7 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA MSRT Master can be analyzed in the VSA application The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA MSRT mode are those descri bed for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA MSRT applications To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box tap the AL icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA MSRT mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon 235
281. To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port can be used to trigger a measurement R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt For more information see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 341 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input 1 or only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 350 5 5 1 5 Prob
282. Units Useful commands for scaling described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 392 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 379 Remote commands exclusive to scaling and units CAL Culatesmm S TA PRESel eite de teet 356 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE AUTO 356 lt gt 5 5 356 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y L 2 356 eALbCulatesmeSTATIstics SCALeY UPPE rne o cet eb e ice alerted 357 GALOCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT 357 GALGulate n UNIT AN GLe riui creer totnm Te rbed 357 CAL CulatesmeocDNITS TIME utn Enea t nen cae t 357 CAEGulatesmssv INIT 358 lt gt lt gt 5 358 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RPOSition csse 358 Configuring VSA DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue esses 358 lt gt lt gt 5 359
283. W Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Trigger 2 Trigger 3 IFVIDEO DEMOD teen te nnm 165 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and additional information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer Input User Manual IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector Input Output and Frontend Settings IF 2 GHz Out The measured IF value is provided at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output con nector if available at a frequency of 2 GHz If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option is installed and active this is the only option available for IF output When the B2000 option is activated the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output is automatically deactivated It is not reactivated when the B2000 option is switched off For details see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Man ual VIDEO The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF signal is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequencies at the output Remote command OUTPut IF SOURce on page 349 5 5 3 Digital Output Settings Th
284. WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRT View or MSRT Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRT mode not for the MSRT Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range pretrigger time to min posttrigger time sweep time RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 189 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA p A s um Wne u 11 7 6 Zooming into the Display 11 7 6 1 Using the Single Zoom BIS WINDOW 0 gt MAE acce nir eere ero etate once rehenes 420 gt 22 2 etr pner apr hne paene eters 420 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt
285. WINDowcn PRATe VALue command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPSMode gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 232 Retrieving Results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue lt DisplayPPS gt This command determines the number of points to be displayed per symbol if manual mode is selected see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 434 This command is not available for result displays based on the capture buffer in this case the displayed points per symbol are defined by the sample rate SENSe DDEMod PRATe command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPS gt 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 1 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 32 more points are displayed than symbols RST 4 Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 232 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe SYMBol This command enables the display of the decision instants time when the signals occurred as dots on the trace Manual operation See Highlight Symbols on page 232 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL
286. able for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 FreqRel Meas amp Ref 1M 49 sym Fig 3 9 Result display Frequency Relative mum PENNE SS NUUS User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 32 Result Types in VSA Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowc n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 435 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency in Hz of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time FREQ ERR FREQ s FREQprr t with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 Note that this measurement does not consider a possible carrier frequency offset This has already been compensated for in the measurement signal This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but o can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions thr
287. ace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 401 Evaluation Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the refer ence signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the evaluation data source see Signal Source on page 231 For multi source results the evaluation for each trace can be defined as error or cap ture buffer measurement depending on the result type see Multi Source on page 19 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 401 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max loner Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace R amp S FSW K70 l _ Analysis For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only one trace is available Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 402
288. adds a comment to a file that contains data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 237 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device 11 11 Status Reporting System For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured data to the specified file Manual operation See I O Export on page 237 Status Reporting System
289. ag 226 Tolerance Burst Search 194 Search limits Pone 226 Secure user mode Storage locatlori nieto 140 Select Result Rng SOfIKOy eec ede s te rtt ta 192 inre eredi 12 Aborting remote 398 Activating remote redeant 398 Mode etr ite ere tere ir 398 acis 396 Settings Fil AMG oerte 140 Restoring files 139 141 Storage location teer 140 Settings files Bruja M 141 Loading 141 Saving 141 Signal capture we 180 RREMOE control 360 Signal description Cohfig ratiOhi re tnr 144 Configuration remote 308 Pattern Softkey Signal ID External Mixer Remote control 324 Signal model x FSK Signal source REMOTE m 322 Signal structure Buist settihgs cce eme te rete rnt Configuration i REMOTE Sets Signal type Continuous Burst Signal 149 Single sweep c cies ume med dee ete d en de 190 SMIE ZOOM seien treno rh reir Pete e 234 Slope
290. age of RMS SNR values over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS SNR value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum SNR values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of SNR values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SRERror lt type gt This command queries the symbol rate error Query parameters lt type gt PEAK AVG SDEV PCTL TPEak RPEak PAVG PSDev PPCTI lt none gt Symbol rate error for current sweep AVG Average symbol rate error over several sweeps RPE Peak symbol rate error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of symbol rate error PCTL 95 percentile value of symbol rate error Usage Query only R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA H I I eee eee 11 9 4 Retrieving Limit Check Results The modulation accuracy parameters can be checked against defined limits The fol lowing commands are required to query the results of these limit checks CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy CFERror PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n
291. ak RMS peak value NONE PASS FAIL MARGIN NONE No limit check result available yet PASS All values have passed the limit check FAIL At least one value has exceeded the limit MARGIN currently not used RST NONE 11 10 Importing and Exporting Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the VSA application can not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting I Q data see chapter 7 Data Import and Export on page 236 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results e dt tc c 456 MMEMoresSTOResnsd OG COMMIRI iecit e v Ree ER eee SEE RES ee de REESE 456 5 lt gt 1 5 apada dia 456 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Q Import on page 237 MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Comment This command
292. al Analysis on page 138 After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel for the VSA application a VSA measure ment for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The VSA menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions Automatic refresh of preview and visualization in dialog boxes after configura tion changes The R amp S FSW supports you in finding the correct measurement settings quickly and easily after each change in settings in dialog boxes the preview and visualization areas are updated immediately and automatically to reflect the changes Thus you can see if the setting is appropriate or not before accepting the changes Importing and Exporting I Q Data The I Q data to be evaluated VSA not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Fur thermore the evaluated data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting I Q data see the R amp S FSW Use
293. alue Range 0 0 to 1 0 RST 0 999 mean 0 9995 Default unit NONE 11 7 4 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the VSA application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 3 Signal Capture on page 360 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REFResh on 397 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 397 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels Analysis 220250 417 GALCulatesn MSRACALINGEVALue aE 417 lt gt lt gt 1 8 417 ISENSEeJ MSRA GAP T fe OFF Sel 25200 418 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed
294. alue is displayed in Hz Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal e Capture Buffer purum EP EIN UU Sus User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 30 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Meas amp Ref signal FREQ uas e ZMEASQ 2 z dt with and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 Capture buffer l d FREQ r Som di ZCapt t When evaluating the capture buffer the absolute frequency is derived from the mea sured phase with duration of one sampling period at the sample rate see Sample Rate on page 182 Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Frequency Absolute result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 132 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but o can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero
295. alyzed 11 7 3 11 7 3 1 Analysis Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or measure ment time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right diagram border lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 800 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 226 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off for all markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 226 Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically Manual configuration of limit lines is described in chapter 6 4 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines on page 228 e General Colmimalids sette tette ee te td en eter o re eid eset eoe ea 411 e DENMA Limite inen er aii 412 General Commands The fol
296. ame ter Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to inclu
297. ameters lt type gt lt none gt power measurement for current sweep AVG Average of power measurement over several sweeps RPE Peak of power measurement over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of power measurement PCTL 95 percentile value of power measurement Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset lt type gt This command queries the results of the offset measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt Origin offset error for current sweep AVG Average origin offset error over several sweeps RPE Peak origin offset error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of origin offset error PCTL 95 percentile value of origin offset error Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the phase error measurement performed for digi tal demodulation Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt RMS phase error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS phase errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum phase errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS phase error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum phase errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum phase errors ove
298. ample Usage Retrieving Results lt none gt RMS EVM value of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS EVM values over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS EVM value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum EVM values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of EVM values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the FSK deviation error of FSK modulated sig nals Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt Deviation error for current sweep AVG Average FSK deviation error RPE Peak FSK deviation error SDEV Standard deviation of FSK deviation error PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK deviation error Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency drift for FSK modulated sig nals Query parameters lt type gt Usa
299. and TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 Power lt Trigger Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the Usable I Q Bandwidth setting for data acquisition see Usable Bandwidth on page 183 Remote command TRIG SOUR see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 Digital Trigger Source For applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits and 1 are available as Digital trigger source The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Table 5 2 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins
300. and Result Displays 3 2 23 3 2 24 Magnitude Relative Magnitude of the source signal the signal amplitude is scaled to the ideal reference signal Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 MagRel Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 14 Result display Magnitude Relative Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 435 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time SSS gt EE ae User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 43 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays MAG ERR MAG yeas MAG ger 0 with and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 1 Mag Error ei Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 15 Result display Magnitude Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR
301. and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 275 32768 1 Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVsTime gt Data File Format iq tar lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt float 69 float ArrayOfFloat lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 67 float lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt 7 2 Data Binary File The I Q
302. and documentation Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input It is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 Baseband Power Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface Signal Capture For more information on the the Digital Baseband Interface or the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW 1 Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote comm
303. annel compensation on or off With equalizer only Setting parameters lt TransmitChannel gt OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 206 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror lt RefDevComp gt This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculat ing the frequency error for FSK modulation Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 207 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance lt ComplQImbalance gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ imbalance on or off Setting parameters ComplQImbalance ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 206 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset lt ComplQOffset gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset on or off Setting parameters lt ComplQOffset gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 206 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror lt SymbolClockError gt This command switches the compensation for symbol rate error on or off Setting parameters lt SymbolClockError gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate
304. annel for vector signal analysis named VSA DDEM PRES EDGE NB Loads the GSM EDGE 8PSK standard file and the settings defined there Programming Examples DDEM RLEN 10000 sym Defining the result range DDEMod TIME 200 Defines the result length as 200 symbols CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the result range CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT Aligns the result range to the left edge of the burst CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 10 Defines an offset of 10 symbols from the burst start DISP TRAC X VOFF 10 Defines the symbol number 10 as the result range start Defining the evaluation range CALC ELIN STAT ON CALC ELIN1 10 CALC ELIN2 190 Evaluation range starts at symbol 10 and ends at symbol 190 LAY WIND4 REM Close symbol table display window 4 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 MODE Add a second trace in max hold mode to EVM vs Time display window 1 LAY ADD 3 RIGH MEAS Create new window to the right of capture buffer window 3 with measurement signal as data type Result 4 CALC4 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 4 to magnitude DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe2 MODE WRIT CALC4 TRAC2 REF Add second trace in clear write mode for the reference signal CALC LIM MACC STAT ON Activates limit checks for all values in the Result Summary INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new
305. anually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Configuring VSA This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 172 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 172 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO page 355 If the current reference level is not
306. ar values The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain Measurements Calculation in R amp S FSW RMS Average s M Error Vector Magnitude EVM Meas Ref magnitude Capture Buffer magnitude _ EET ACA Linear Average s M All measurements where trace averaging is possible except for the measurements listed for RMS averaging 2 1 Xs M M Xs M A 6 5 Analytically Calculated Filters The following filters are calculated during runtime of the unit and as a function of the operating parameter Alpha or BT Gauss ETSI TS 100 959 V8 3 0 Filter Type Setting Parameter Impulse Response Raised cosine RC Alpha a 2 sin cos T h r PX 2 Z 1 4 n T Root raised cosine Alpha a in 1 m RRC 5 1 a at T sn cnim 4 a zT Gaussian filter BT MM 2z pT with 2 A 6 6 Standard Specific Filters A 6 6 1 Transmit filter EDGE Tx filter ETSI TS 300 959 V8 1 2 Linearized GMSK 3 aite S i7 for 0 lt 1 lt 5 ONS i 0 0 SE E J ae dt 0 40 si else for else t 5T 2 _ 37 a 2 0 0 lt lt 4 for 47 lt t lt 8T 3131 2 O t a 2 C t is the impulse response of the EDGE transmit filter A 6 6 2 Measuremen
307. are applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manual
308. are modulated using a frequency pulse g t to form the instantaneous frequency of the transmitted complex baseband waveform denoted by frer t and defined as fase 1 3 sig iT where fsymp 1 T is the symbol rate and h is a scaling factor termed the modulation index The transmitted or reference FSK signal is formed by frequency modulation of the instantaneous frequency 42 frer udu el Pace REF t e where pe t denotes the phase of the transmitted waveform In the VSA application continuous phase FSK signal is assumed which is ensured by the integral in the expression for REF t A graphical depiction of the reference waveform generation is shown below in figure 4 63 Frequency Modulator Fig 4 63 Reference complex baseband FSK signal generation Reference Deviation The transmitted symbols 5 are assumed to be chosen from a finite and real valued constellation of M values 6 Gv The maximum absolute constellation point is denoted by yax The maximum phase contribution of a data symbol is given by max 72 zh Gay 50 The reference deviation of the FSK signal is defined as __ _ 1 f Sgh smx 04 In the VSA application the frequency pulse filter is normalized such that 8 at Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The constellation for M FSK is assumed to be 1 3 M 1 which implies Smax M 1 The expression for the ref
309. ase shifts occur These phase shifts depend on the symbol number e g for a 4 the third symbol has an additional phase offset of 3 1 rr 4 This offset has the same effect as a rotation of the basic system of coordinates by the offset angle after each symbol The method is highly important in practical applications because it prevents signal tran sitions through the zeros in the I Q plane This reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal and the linearity requirements for the amplifier In practice the method is used for 311 8 8PSK for example and in conjunction with phase differential coding for rr 4 DQPSK Symbol mapping The logical constellation diagram for 311 8 8PSK comprises 8 points that correspond to the modulation level see figure 4 19 A counter clockwise offset rotation of 3171 8 is inserted after each symbol transition Fig 4 19 Constellation diagram for 37 8 8PSK before rotation including the symbol mapping for EDGE Symbol Mapping Fig 4 20 I Q symbol stream after 3778 rotation in I Q plane if the symbol number 7 is transmitted six times in a row Fig 4 22 Constellation diagram for 77 4 QPSK Natural including the symbol mapping Symbol Mapping 4 3 3 Differential PSK With differential PSK the information is represented in the phase shift between two consecutive decision points The absolute position of the complex sample value at the decision point does not carry informa
310. ase is completed Then the equal izer can be used without additional calculations as long as the input signal remains sta ble If an unstable input has led to an unusable equalizer filter reset the equalizer with the Reset button REF Filter IQ Input ISI Signal Filter IQ Reference Equalizer Compensate for Averaging Control MEAS Filter IQ Measure ment Signal Fig 4 53 An equalizer filter can be activated in the reference and measurement signal path The filter coefficients are determined in such a way that the error vector magnitude EVM is minimized User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 108 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics The result range used for equalizer calculation might be quite short leading to unstable equalizer impulse responses For time invariant channels the estimation length can be extended using Averaging mode In this case the statistics from all previously deter mined reference signals and measurement signals are averaged to determine the cur rent equalizer function Thus the results of previous sweeps are continuously consid ered to calculate the current equalizer values Averaging is only restarted when the R amp S FSW is switched off or when the user manually resets the equalizer Obviously this method requires a stable input signal for the entire duration of the measurement as otherwise the current equalizer is distorted by previous results This process requ
311. asurement filter to be used This setting is only available if User is selected as the Filter Type Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER on page 390 Alpha BT Type Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor or filter bandwidth are available for RC RRC and Gauss filters If the measurement mode is automatically selected according to the transmit filter this setting is identical to the Alpha BT value in the modulation settings see Alpha BT on page 148 Remote command Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 389 Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa page 315 Evaluation Range Configuration 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated either the entire result range or only a specified part of it The calculated length of the specified range is indicated beneath the entries A visualization of the evaluation range in relation to the result range with the current settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indicates the defined result range indented red lines indicate defined start and stop symbols see Evaluation range display on page 130 The visualization is not editable directly The Evaluation Range settings are displayed when you do one of the following Select the Evaluation Range button from th
312. at includes a known symbol sequence in the input signal In this case the results for the limited reference area are more precise at the cost of less accurate results outside this area Thus the result range should be set to the length of the refer ence area The reference area can be defined either using a pattern or using a known data sequence from a Known Data file If no predefined data sequences are available for the signal the detected data is used by default If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Demodulation Settings Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the evaluated data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Known Data reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data Pattern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern Detected Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected data Data Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO on page 384 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE page 385 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult on page 385 If SER S This setting is only available if Known Data is selected for Fine Synchronization You can define a
313. ata is also used for synchronization Otherwise it can be selected manually Defining a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in ref erence to the analyzed data avoids using a falsely selected or unsuitable file for synchronization see also If SER lt on page 212 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 2 3 2 How to Create Known Data Files You must create the Known Data files yourself according to the possible data sequen ces of the input signal Use any xml editing tool you like following the rules described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 489 Before loading the file to the VSA application make sure the syntax of your file is valid Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences 1 Import or apply input data for which stable demodulation results are available to the VSA application If necessary adapt the demodulation settings until the requested results are obtained 2 Start the R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences from the Windows task bar on the R amp S FSW or execute the file RecordingToolforSequences EXE from the installation directory on the instrument The R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences window is displayed R amp S Recording Tool for Seque
314. ate n lt ertet CAL Culatesn gt TRAGest iet tort utis CALCU sN AUNI ANGLE orie ncns eter ette tpe a eee rtp ere ceo eee ESEE e eats CALC latesn Y UNITM CALibration AlQ HATiming STATe 5 2 riae ti emen re tnter n rte te eru oor cenas 433 DISPlayEWINDowsriz PRATE AUTO rt rne rre tn rnnt rtr a tem ten DISPlay WINDowsn PRATe MALUe 2 it iot eti trt reno nhi eher e rne DISPlay VWINDOWSA gt o E DISPlayEWINDowsri7 TRACe SYMBO cette tr rrr pert conr rrr iere rete DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE lt gt lt gt 5 358 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 358 lt gt lt gt 5 358 lt gt lt gt 5 1 5 0 437 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt 5 1 5 7 437 DISPlay WINDow lt n
315. ate n RTMS ALINe SHOW 2 ceasneadaatsscuedacaeencecusandacendes 418 CALOCulate n RTMS ALINe VALue sessi 419 419 SENSe I RTMS CAPTUre Q FFSel 2 2 nrc co otio erit aai aani Secret a 419 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 235 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt gt is irrelevant Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time pretrigger posttrigger of the MSRT measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 235 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the
316. ation only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new Sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on 397 Burst and Pattern Configuration Information on known patterns and bursts in the captured signal improve the accuracy of the determined ideal reference signal and calculation of the signal parameters becomes quicker For details on burst and patterns see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 98 R amp S9FSW K70 5 7 1 Configuration Burst Search The Burst Search settings define when a burst is detected in the evaluated signal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The blue lines below the trace indicate the detec ted bursts The preview area is not editable directly The Burst Search settings are displayed when you do one of the following Select the Burst Pattern button from the Overview Select the Burst Pattern Search softkey from the main VSA menu Auto according to Signal Structure MU Advanced Meas only if Burst found Auto Configurati
317. band input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 217 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 394 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For information on other input settings see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 152 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Input Output and Frontend Settings For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input s
318. be used as the data source for a trace Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt TrRefType gt MEAS Measurement signal REF Reference signal ERR Error TCAP Capture buffer RST Depends on the current measurement Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Evaluation on page 221 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Depending on the result display not all trace modes may be available Analysis Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace
319. bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In VSA the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 Marker lt n gt 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 6 11 3 Activating Vector Signal Analysis Vector signal analysis requires a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INS Trament OCREate DUPLIGal a idee etra vare ta nee tnra dean medecin 302 INSTrument CREate NEW 2 ripe ann LE LE dE i 302 INSTrument GREate REPLace iiic eie an dO 302 INS Er menbDELete 2 ee tat 303 INS froment UST decet ied iade ted duet dde 303 Activating Vector Signal Analysis DOLES 304 INS Tren SEE el ucc 305 5
320. c Rs 341 CALibration AIQ HATiming S TATe 1 2 22222 aan aaa 341 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 159 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to 1NPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 341 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 175 Configuring VSA INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see INPut FULLscale AUTO on page 340 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 175 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt
321. cal calculations Setting parameters lt StatisticMode gt SONLy INFinite SONLy Symbol points only are used INFinite All points are used RST SONLy Manual operation See Oversampling on page 233 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt This commands switches between the whole Result Summary and the diagram show ing only a single value e g the EVM RMS value as a bargraph The same parameters are available as those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 229 Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt SingleValue gt ALL EVMP PERM MERM CFER RHO IQOF FERM FEP FDER ALL Complete Result Summary EVMR RMS EVM EVMP Peak EVM PERM RMS Phase error PEP Peak phase error MERM RMS Magnitude error MEP Peak magnitude error CFER Carrier frequency error RHO RHO IQOF offset FERM RMS frequency error FEP Peak frequency error FDER FSK deviation error RST ALL Manual operation See Result Summary Individual Results on page 51 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO lt DisplayPPSMode gt Defines the number of display points that are displayed per symbol automatically i e according to SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 361 To define a different number of points per symbol for display use the MANual parameter and the DISPlay
322. can be analyzed in numerous ways The following tasks are meant to make you familiar with the most How to Analyze the Measured Data common VSA application features For a description of all analysis functions and set tings see chapter 6 Analysis on page 219 1 Press the MEAS CONFIG key to display the VSA menu 2 Select Display Config button in the Overview or the Display Config softkey and select the data sources for evaluation that are of interest to you see chap ter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 230 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences For each data source a window with the default result type for that data source is displayed 3 Exit the SmartGrid mode 4 Select the Window Config softkey to change the result types and other display settings for the selected window To change the settings in other windows select a different window from the Specifics for list in the Window Config dialog box 5 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview Enable the Specifics for option to access the analysis functions for the selected window 6 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure special analysis settings for the individual result displays for example e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Configure the trace to display the average over a series of
323. cation substracts the measured signal from the ref erence signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component RST 1 See Offset EVM on page 212 SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accuracy results automatically If enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depending on the modula tion type Configuring VSA Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 FSK MSK Sample rate see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 361 Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 210 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue lt EstOverSmplg gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accuracy results For more information see Estimation points per symbol on page 131 You can also let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use see SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 381 Setting parameters lt EstOverSmplg gt 1 the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSk 4 8 16 32 the number of samples per symbol defined in the
324. cations the measurement filter is the same as the RX filter However unlike the measurement filter the RX filter is not relevant for the measurement but is only required to create the reference signal optimally The RX filter and the transmit filter are usually chosen such that their combination results in an Inter Symbol Interference ISI free system see figure 4 2 and figure 4 3 Set by user 7777 Symbols 4 DUT Transmitter Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Auto Auto Function of TX Filter fct CaptureOV sph symbol rate Symbols bits Demodulation filter of IQ capture 8 symbol with Dp decision IQ Signal REF Signal 5 3 Correction 5 Parameters Signal 2 processing correction of t Analyzer estimated errors 55 22 Fig 4 2 Measurement filter in the block diagram MSK PSK QAM and UserQAM TX Filter Any QAM Any PSK bits VQ perd Map bits to TX Filter instantaneous frequency frequency pulse f k Magnitude 1 Fig 4 3 Modulator with Transmit filter in detail As the measurement filters of the VSA application have low pass characteristics they suppress high frequency distortion components in the Meas Ref Error signal The errors are weighted spectrally Thus turning off the measurement filter can have an influence on the numeric and grap
325. ce symbol rate and the currently measured symbol rate in relation to the reference symbol rate The value is given in parts per million ppm Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors SRE SR meas SR SRrer Currently the SRE is only calculated for PSK QAM and User QAM modulation and only if compensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Com pensation on page 204 Example For a defined symbol rate of SRge 1 MHz and a measured symbol rate of SRweas 999 9 kHz the symbol rate error is SRE 999 9 1000 1000 1 000 000 ppm 100 ppm Offset Origin Offset Quadrature Inphase Fig 4 58 Effect of an or origin offset after demodulation and error compensation The effect of an offset in the transmitter is shown in figure 4 58 The offset can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the offset does not affect the EVM R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Example The following figures compare the results for a compensated l Q offset of 2 5 and non compensated offset Offset compensated for Offset NOT compensated for 170 Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 170 Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 2 52 1 Stop 2 52 Start O sym Stop 300 sym Start Osym Stop 300 sym Gain Imbalance Quadrature 1 0 5 0 0
326. ce results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 439 and chapter 11 9 2 5 Result Summary on page 441 CALC MARK FUNC DDEM STAT parameter to query individual parameter values see chapter 11 9 3 Retrieving Parameter Val ues on page 443 Result Summary Individual Results The Result Summary can display either all or only a single modulation accuracy parameter Only the most important parameters can be displayed individually namely those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 229 Individual results are selected for display by tapping the Result Summary table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you can select the parameter to be displayed Result Summa Results to be displayed EVM RMS Phase Errors RMS Phase Error Peak Magnitude Error RMS Magnitude Error Peak Carrier Frequency Error IQ Offset R amp S9FSW K70 3 2 30 Measurements and Result Displays By default all parameters are displayed If you select a specific parameter the Result Summary display is replaced by the individual result display EVM RMS 0 84 9 o 1 00 Fig 3 21 Result display for individual value in Result Summary In addition to the current measurement value the statistical results see on page 48 and the peak limit value see on page 229 for the selected parameter are displayed For details on the displayed re
327. characters can be displayed Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent on 306 Load Standard Digital Standards Loads the selected measurement settings file Note When you load a standard the usage of a known data file if available is auto matically deactivated Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard on page 306 Save Standard Digital Standards Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 307 Delete Standard Digital Standards Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stand ard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards function see Restore Standard Files on page 139 Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete on page 307 Restore Standard Files Digital Standards Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 306 Configuration Overview 5 3 Configuration Overview
328. ciently if you provide us with the information listed below System Configuration The System Configuration dialog box in the Setup menu provides information on Hardware Info hardware assemblies Versions and Options the status of all software and hardware options instal led on your instrument System Messages messages on any errors that may have occurred An xml file with information on the system configuration device footprint can be created automatically using the DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo command or as described in To collect the support information on page 295 Error Log The RSError 10g file in the 1og directory of the main installation directory contains a chronological record of errors Obtaining Technical Support Support file a zip file with important support information can be created auto matically in the user directory of the main installation directory The zip file con tains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display To collect the support information 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select Service gt R amp S Support and then Create R amp S Support Information The file is stored as installation directory gt user inst model serial no date and time zip for example C R_S Instr user FSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20150420 113652 zip Attach the support file to an e mail i
329. clude them in the evaluation range To change the evaluated data 1 Start from the configuration described in chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 272 2 Display the constellation diagram of the signal in window 1 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Constellation 1 0 see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 264 A clear 8PSK constellation is displayed Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw D MagAbs MeastRef Stop 2 535 Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym Fig 9 11 Evaluation lines properly adjusted User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 273 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Examples In order to understand the effect of an incorrectly set evaluation range change the evaluation range to include the entire result range a In the Overview select Evaluation Range b Enable the Entire Result Range option The displayed constellation diagram is no longer clear it contains additional points This is due to the fact that the constellation diagram now displays symbol instants that are beyond the burst C Const I Q MeasRRof 1M Cirw MagAbs Meas amp Ref Stop 174 sym Fig 9 12 Evaluation lines not properly adjusted small red lines in the title bar All measurement windows that consider the evaluation range are marked with two A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 3 6 Comparing the Measurement Signal to the Reference Signal You have seen that it i
330. command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 160 See Center frequency on page 168 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 350 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 169 Configuring VSA SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines the step width of the center frequency Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Links the step width to the current standard currently 1 MHz for all standards OFF Sets the step width as defined using the FREQ CENT STEP command see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 350 RST 1
331. ctrum application this functionality is referred to as gating 1 In the measurement display take a closer look at window 3 magnitude of the cap ture buffer The green bar shows how far the current measurement has already proceeded i e how much of the signal has been evaluated Mag CapBuf Stop 8000 sym Start 0 sym 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key Since the signal you are currently analyzing is continuous as opposed to contain ing bursts the entire capture buffer is analyzed and hence will be marked with the green bar The last evaluated result range i e the currently evaluated result range at the time the measurement stopped is highlighted in blue Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym 3 To go back to a previously evaluated result range within the same capture buffer press the SWEEP key and then the Select Result Rng softkey By selecting dif ferent result ranges for example using the rotary knob you can move the high lighted blue area through the capture buffer and choose your currently demodula ted result range m A O K A A Mna 265 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Select Result Range x Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym The results for this range are displayed in the Cur
332. d as R amp S SMW200A R amp S9FSW K70 Contents Contents 7 11 About this Manual 5 niei cri i innert 7 1 2 Documentation 8 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene nennen 9 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application 11 2 4 Starting the VSA 44 nennen nn nnne nnn 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information esee 12 3 Measurements and Result 15 3 1 Evaluation Data Sources in 15 3 2 Result Types In VOA eiie rises LES 19 3 3 Common Parameters in enne nnne nennen 57 A Measurement a 59 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing eene 59 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and I Q 66 EA MEEAUIgNgnn 77 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation 98 4 5 Signal
333. d in order to display the same result range in the Input Output and Frontend Settings smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision on page 358 5 5 5 4 Units You can configure the units for both axes of the diagrams The unit settings are displayed when you do one of the following Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Unit tab Select the AMPT key and then the Unit Config softkey Res Len Amplitude YScale Unit X Axis Unit 1 MagAbs Meas amp Ref Note that unit settings are window specific as opposed to the amplitude settings PADS DUBIE ogee cece cette 179 Y AXIS UNE 180 X Axis Unit Defines the unit of the x axis in the current result diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 357 Signal Capture Y Axis Unit Defines the unit of the y axis in the current result diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 360 For phase diagrams CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe on page 357 For statistics CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on 357 For equalizer group delay diagrams CALCulate lt n gt Y UNIT TIME on page 358 5 6 Signal Capture The Signal Capture setti
334. data acquisition see Sample Rate on page 182 all samples contribute to the result equally The results are determined by the evaluation range The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter A 6 2 1 Formulae PSK QAM and MSK Modulation For PSK QAM modulation the estimation model is described in detail in chapter chapter 4 5 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 110 The parame ters of the PSK QAM and MSk specific result summary table can be related to the dis tortion model parameters as follows Table 1 7 Evaluation of results in the PSK QAM and MSK result summary EVM RMS y Xen Peak max EVM n T Modulation RMS error 1 T y 20 log K DIRER TY Peak min MER n T 1 y with MER n T 20 Einer ry Magnitude RMS 1 2 error _ 1 _ ERR n Tp Phase error RMS 1 gt _ERR n Ty Peak max PHASE ERR n T RHO correla tion coeffi cient gt REF n mease _ 8 REF REF n V wEAsQ AKF REF AKF MEAS A 6 2 2 Formulae IQ Offset C 2 2 s 51 50 i71 REF k TY C 10
335. data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam Data File Format iq tar ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 Real sample 1 1 2 1 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 0101 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 0111 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 1 2 0121 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 1 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel index 01101 0101101 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 11101 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 21 0 0121101 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 01111 0101111 Channel 0 Comple
336. de the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 11 1 5 11 1 6 11 1 6 1 Introduction Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e PUM ley es cape EUM 299 MESSICO TESTES 300 e ihargcter Dobson ee cn 300 Character tecta ree trt etd ve 301 301 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing
337. display In the Vector result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is not compensated for The display corresponds to the physical diagram shown in table 4 13 In the Constellation result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is compensated for The display corresponds to the logical mapping as in figure 4 26 mum PE INN CH RN NUUS User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 86 4 3 6 Symbol Mapping OQPSK Fig 4 26 Constellation diagram for OQSK GRAY including the symbol mapping Frequency Shift Keying FSK To illustrate symbol mappings for FSK modulations the symbol numbers are marked in the logical mapping diagram versus the instantaneous frequency An instantaneous frequency of zero in the baseband corresponds to the input frequency of the analyzer 2FSK NATURAL With 2FSK the symbol decision is made by a simple frequency discriminator Symbol Numbers Fig 4 27 Constellation diagram for 2FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4FSK With 4FSK the symbol decision is made by a frequency discriminator with 3 decision thresholds 2 3 0 2 3 normalized to the FSK reference deviation Symbol Mapping 1 3 1 3 Fig 4 28 Constellation diagram for 4FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers eens 1 3 1 3 Fig 4 29 Constellation diagram for 4FSK GRAY including the logica
338. dow is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter Index1 Index2 Position This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 422 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and s
339. drawn and not connected Available for source types Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 24 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 907 MHz Fig 3 2 Result display Constellation Frequency Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM CONF to define the result type see CALCulLate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 441 3 2 5 Constellation The complex source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the de rotated symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 25 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 6 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 3 Constellation diagram for QPSK modulated signal Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM CONS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 441 Cons
340. dulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 800 Number of measurement points Data section for individual trace Header section for individual window Screen 2 Name of next window Header section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace in second window Data section for individual trace A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description When you load a Known Data file the R amp S FSW K70 application checks whether the file complies with the following syntax Table 1 6 Known Data File Syntax Syntax Possible Values Description RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE as specified File Header Version 01 00 gt lt Comment gt lt Comment gt arbitrary Optional file description lt Base gt lt Base gt 2116 The base used to specify the lt Data gt values binary or decimal For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use binary 2 lt ModulationOrder gt lt Modulation Order gt 256 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Number of values each symbol can represent order of modu lation e g 8 for 8 PSK For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use lt Base gt 2 the exact number also depends on available memory space Known Data File Syntax Description Syntax lt ResultLength gt lt ResultLength gt Possible Values 1 up to 20
341. duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal mum PED INVE User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 45 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays ________________________________________________________________________________________ _____________ 1 PhaseWrap Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 17 Result display Phase Wrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL REE to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 CALC FORM PHASe to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap The phase of the signal the display is not limited to 180 180 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal rum EPI INN UE HCM NN UU aT User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 46 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 28 1 Phase Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 18 Result display Phase Unwrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM UPHase to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on pag
342. e Overview Select the Range Settings softkey from the main VSA menu Then switch to the Evaluation Range tab Result Range Evaluation Range Evaluation Range Entire Result Range 0 sym 148 sym Start 3 0 sym B Stop 144 75 sym Length 142 0 sym 524 308 us Visualization Pattern For details on the evaluation range see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 126 For an example on setting the evaluation range see chapter 9 3 5 Setting the Evalua tion Range on page 273 Evaluating the Entire Result rir teet ie tex rte tas s 216 2 M 216 Adjusting Settings Automatically Evaluating the Entire Result Range If enabled the entire result range is evaluated If disabled you can define a specific part of the result range to be evaluated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe on page 390 Start Stop Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is started and stopped The start and stop symbols themselves are included in the evaluation range Note Note that the start and stop values are defined with respect to the x axis includ ing an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at Reference Start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 391 5 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings ca
343. e Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode all data is stored to volatile memory and is only available during the current instrument session As soon as the power is switched off on the R amp S FSW the data is cleared To store settings permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual New Folder Digital Standards Creates a new folder in the file system in which you can save the settings file File Name Digital Standards Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit lines 005 Configuration According to Digital Standards For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Comment Digital Standards An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60
344. e the Sample Rate defines the number of displayed points per symbol the Display Points Sym parameter is not available If Auto is enabled the Sample Rate value is used Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed per symbol manually The available values depend on the source type 1 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 more points are displayed than symbols 32 Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture set tings are displayed see Sample Rate on page 182 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 435 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 434 Zoom Functions Oversampling Defines the sample basis for statistical evaluation This setting is only available for the result type transformation Statistics Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF E 95 68 76 Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 562 kHz Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 562 kHz FreqAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw noha wh de aha 1 me h TN 1 1 lite Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Fig 6 1 Statistics measurement window C measured signal symbols highlighted window A sta tistics for all trace points window B statistics for symbol instants only Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only See window B in f
345. e 139 See Restore Pattern Files on page 139 SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard Standard This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standardized transmission method or a user defined transmission method The standardized transmission methods are available in the instrument as predefined standards Setting parameters Standard string Specifies the file name that contains the transmission method without the extension For user defined standards the file path must be included Default standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz do not require a path definition A list of prede fined standards including short forms is provided in the annex see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 478 Example DDEM PRES TETRA NDDOWN Switches the predefined digital standard TETRA Disconti nuousDownlink on DDEM PRES C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Switches the user defined digital standard USER on Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Load Standard on page 141 SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent Comment This command enters the comment for a new standard The comment is stored with the standard and is only displayed in the selection menu manual operation When remote control is used the string is deleted after the standard has
346. e 214 SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME Name This command selects a measurement filter and automatically sets its state to ON Setting parameters Name Name of the measurement filter or User for a user defined filter An overview of available measurement filters is provided in chapter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 486 Manual operation See Type on page 214 SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe lt MeasFilterState gt Use this command to switch the measurement filter off To switch a measurement filter on use the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME command 11 5 10 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF Switches the measurement filter off ON Switches the measurement filter specified by SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME com mand automatically switches the selected filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Type on page 214 SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects the user defined measurement filter For details on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 64 Setting parameters lt FilterName gt Name of the user defined filter Example SENS DDEM MFIL NAME USER Selects user filter mode for the meas filter ENS DDEM MFIL USER D MMyMeasFilter Selects the user defined meas filter Manual operat
347. e 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 Real Imag I Q Real and imaginary part of the measurement or reference signal in separate measure ment diagrams the x axis scaled in time units or symbols is identical for both dia grams Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector Capture buffer display Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Real Imag result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 132 ey User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 47 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for I Q input Real RealImag CaptureBuffer 4 Imag Reallmag CaptureBuffer ei Clrw 8000 sym Fig 3 19 Result display Real Imag Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FORM RIMag to define the result type see CALCulLate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1
348. e Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 217 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 394 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 0 25 V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 340 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on 341 5 5 5 3 Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling func tions are available to adapt the result display to the current data Input Output and Frontend Settings o Note that scaling settings are window specific as opposed to the amplitude settings The scaling settings are displayed when you select the AMPT key and then the Scale Config softkey Amplitude Scale Unit YScale Automatic grid scaling Automatic grid scaling Adjust Settings Scaling according to min and max values Automatic grid scaling All Axes Default Settings Scaling according to reference and per div Scaling according to
349. e Overview Absolute result display Remote commands Remote commands are provided to determine the first and last values currently dis played in a particular window DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 437 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP on page 437 And to determine the position of the current result range within the capture buffer SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst STARt on page 439 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions For various vector signal analysis functions the measured signal is compared to a defined ideal reference signal The more precise the reference signal the more precise the results become In the best case the possible data sequences within the signal to analyze are known in advance and can be used to compare the measured data to This is similar to defining a pattern for the entire result range Thus a falsely estimated reference signal due to false symbol decisions is avoided and does not influence the error calculation You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 4 46 and Fine Synchronization on page 211 e Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 For details on wo
350. e Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Not Present Microbutton Action For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe Probe name e Serial number R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 1173 9292 02 1 160 5 5 1 6 Input Output and Frontend Settings For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Mer HUOM AOO ume cette cote eco E tema Ecos rece reta pe en 161 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 343
351. e application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Input Output and Frontend Settings The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 352 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing th
352. e current unit The y axis is adapted to display the specified range Probabilities of occurrence located outside the display area are applied to the bars at the left or right borders of the display 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green SSS SS SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 256 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis B Result Summary Current Mean StdDev _95 ile 100 00 Gain Imbalance 0 00 Quadrature Error 0 00 Amplitude Droop For details on the limit check functions and settings see chapter 6 4 Modulation Accu racy Limit Lines on page 228 To define a limit check 1 Configure a measurement with Modulation Accuracy as the Source see chap ter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 230 2 Press the LINES key 3 Press the ModAcc Limits Config softkey in the Limits menu 4 n the Current tab define limits that the current value should not exceed for any or all of the result types Note the limits for the current value are automatically also defined for the peak value and vice versa Howe
353. e lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 456 7 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data data can only be exported in applications that process 1 0 data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name o a Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension ig tar Importing 1 data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey g o mw Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension How to Export and Import 1 0 Data 6 Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the I Q data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a
354. e lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 161 Suffix lt p gt Parameters lt Mode gt Manual operation 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 161 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only 11 5 2 6 Configuring VSA SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on 322 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values State DETected NDETected RST NDETected Usage Query only
355. e modulated carrier are of identical ampli tude but the phase between the two components deviates from 90 This error also distorts the coordinates In the example in figure 4 60 the Q axis is shif ted Note that the quadrature error is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Imbalance The effect of quadrature error and gain imbalance are combined to form the error parameter imbalance Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors ie 8o e le 20 where and are the gain of the inphase and the quadrature component 0 rep resents the quadrature error The imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the I Q imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter is referred to amplitude droop E Magnitude of Meas Signal relative T 0 50 100 150 200 Time Symbols Fig 4 61 Effect of amplitude droop Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Gain Distortion Table 4 19 Effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions Nonlinear distortions amplitude distortion transmit ter Amplitude distortion analyzer Gain Distortion Transmitter 0 02 03 04 05 06 07 06 Real
356. e name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 213 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables SENSe CORRection CVLE BAND 2 irren sion n ttt cn rn eed kon 329 SENSeTCORRSclGn BIAS eene trate eher ea ped Rate ERE cene aeu 3
357. e optional Digital Baseband Interface allows you to output I Q data from any R amp S FSW application that processes data to an external device The configuration settings for digital output be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW As of firmware version 2 10 digital output is also available with bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSW B500 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Output Meas Time 31 281 us SRate gt Mo Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Instrument Device Name SMBV100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital output see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Digital Baseband 167 Output Settings rct in 167 Connected eue M AERE 222 168 Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available Note If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz bandwidth The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input F
358. e or after the actual burst However an offset of only one symbol has the effect that none of the predefined symbol sequences in the Known Data file will be found To avoid this try one of the following Align the result range to a pattern instead of the burst Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again e Continuous signals For continuous signals without a pattern the result range is aligned randomly Thus a very large number of possible sequences must be predefined Use precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incor rect again 4 10 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode The R amp S FSW VSA application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA and MSRT operating mode The main difference between the two modes is that in MSRA mode an analyzer performs data acquisition while in MSRT mode a real time measure ment is performed to capture data In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRA MSRT applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the R amp S FSW VSA application in MSRA MSRT operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define t
359. e stored settings for the selected standard and a measurement is started immediately How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 4 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous measurement mode and start a defined number of measurements The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on page 252 To load predefined settings files 1 Inthe Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 2 In the file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings you want to load To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 3 Press the Load button The dialog box is closed and the instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard To store settings as a standard file 1 Configure the measurement as required see chapter 8 2 How to Perform Cus tomized VSA Measurements on page 243 2 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 3 In the File Name field enter the name of the standard for which you want to store settings To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system To insert a new folder select the New Folder button and enter a name in the New Folder dialog box 4 Press the Save button The dialog box is closed and
360. e trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 409 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on 408 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 409 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 408 6 4 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines M odulation Accuracy Limit Lines The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically see Modulation Accuracy on page 18 Limits and the limit check are configured in the Limits dialog box that is displayed when you press the ModAcc Limits Config softkey in the Lines menu Limit Checking On off Set to Default Current Mean Peak Limit Value Check Magnitude Error Peak Carrier Frequency Error Rho 0 999 1 Offset 40 0 dB Note Limits for Current and Peak are always equal For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 256 Checking Modulation Accuracy LI rero rrr Porte teens cim M M tiers Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits Activates or deactivates evaluation of modulation accuracy limits in the result sum
361. ea The number beneath the scrollbar at the right end indi cates the sequential number of the last symbol field the number in the center indicates the sequential number of the currently selected symbol field To remove a symbol field select it and press Remove 7 Select Save to save the pattern under the specified name The pattern is stored on the instrument as an xml file named Name xm1 under lt Installation directory gt vsa Pattern If you copy this file to another location you can restore the pattern at a later time e g after deletion Example Defining a pattern KUM x Name TETRA_SA Symbols Format Binary Hex Decimal E Remove LE 1 12 16 Comment Fig 8 1 Pattern definition How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 2 2 3 How to Manage Patterns To change the display for the list of patterns 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 To display all available patterns select Show All To display all patterns that are compatible to the defined standard select Show Compatible To display only patterns that contain a specific prefix enter the Prefix in the edit field To edit a predefined pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab Select
362. easurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Performing a Measurement Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 191 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate page 398 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF
363. eaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 7 2 Data Binary File on page 509 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 Data File Format iq tar Element Description ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary data itself has no unit To get an sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the nels data binary file For multi channels the samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the data file see c
364. ect on trace averaging over multiple sequences In this case no trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate n IMMediate on page 396 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 395 Refresh non Multistandard mode Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Remote command INITiate REFMeas on page 397 Statistic Count Defines the number of measurements to be considered for statistical evaluations The behavior depends on the active sweep mode Activate Description to display a visualization of the behavior of the current settings Note If the Statistic Count is set to 7 trace averaging is not performed Max Hold and Min Hold however remain active unlike in the Spectrum application
365. ed or the traces of all windows are exported one after the other For details on the file format see chapter A 4 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 487 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 438 6 3 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Individual ener eee RR SIRE XR 223 e Marker Search SettingS c cccccecceesecececeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaaeeegeeeeseaaeseeneeesecaeeteeeaeseees 225 e Marker Positioning PUlLTCBors ceder cedit certc tt 227 6 3 1 Individual Marker Settings In VSA evaluations up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Markers Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain All Marker Off 22972191 1 Code Domain Power Marker Selected Marke 224 Marker Stale 224 PREV AUG PS 224 Markor TY 225 Ass
366. eicere tn et eee te tende 400 Working with IMatKets cnr rei ei i e rer E Fer eo red eH E 403 e Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines 411 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line mode 416 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line mode only 418 e Zooming into the Display ceni eere ted kae veo LR eo ES 420 11 7 1 Configuring Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the Screen Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Manual configuration of traces is described in chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 219 Commands for storing trace data are described in chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values on page 436 Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 359 Analysis Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration CAL Culate m gt TRACE st VALUS crei eoa tete etat etd tt rete de eye teuer ene 401 DISPlay WINDow n TRAGe t MODE sunu acc ions 401 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essere 402 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue lt TrRefType gt This commands selects the signal to
367. elay diagrams 4096 values You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 437 11 9 2 7 Multi Source For multi source diagrams the data for one source is provided in one trace the data for the other source in another trace By default the data for the spectrum of the Real Imag data from the capture buffer or measurement are provided in trace1 whereas the data for the spectrum of the Real Imag data of the error are provided in trace 2 How ever the data sources for the traces can be changed see CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 401 For details on the results for real imag traces see chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Dia grams on page 441 Retrieving Results 11 9 3 Retrieving Parameter Values For each parameter the VSA application calculates and shows various statistical val ues Current value Mean value Calculated as the average of the number of results defined by the Statistic Count Peak value e Standard deviation 95 percentile Unlike the mean value the 95 ile is a result of all measurement results since the last start of a single or continous sweep or of all measurements since the last change of a measurement parameter For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 57 and chapter A 6 Formulae on page 491 CALCULE A BERG euet rete
368. emoved from the list of Standard Patterns and is no longer assigned to the current standard but is still available for assignment from the list of All Patterns 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the New button The pattern definition dialog box is displayed 4 Define the following pattern settings Setting Description Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Modulation order Number of values each symbol can represent e g 8 for 8 PSK Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ 5 Define the format used to define the individual symbols of the pattern 6 Define the symbols of the pattern How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements a Select the symbol field you want to define If necessary add a new symbol field by selecting Add b Enter a value using the keyboard Depending on the Modulation Order lt n gt the value can be in the range 0 to lt n gt 1 c Select the next symbol field or insert a new one and continue to define the other symbols To scroll through the fields for long patterns use the scrollbar beneath the input ar
369. ency Error result display 293 Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative 12 293 Question How can get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer IN remote ningun Apa Tana Fa p Ree 293 Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong 294 Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the AUTO key 3 the Y Axis Auto Scale softkey Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement win dow the trace of the reference signal is not Solution e 1 Select the measurement window R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement E a SEE ey 2 Press the TRACE key 3 Press the Trace Config softkey 4 Select a second trace choose Clear Write as Trace Mode and toggle to Ref in the Evaluation column Trace Wizard Screen Trace Trace Mode Evaluation 7 Trace 3 Blank gt 4 Blank Trace 5 Blank E Trace 6 Blank Ar 1 V Preset Select All Traces Max Avg Min ClrWrite Min Problem The measurement window does not show average results Solution e 1 Select the measurement window 2
370. ent is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters lt Source gt Configuring VSA IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active this parameter activates the CH2 input con nector on the oscilloscope Then the R amp S FSW triggers when the signal fed into the CH2 input connector on the oscilloscope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled data For applications that process I Q data such as the Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the op
371. eration See Measuring only if burst was found on page 194 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe lt SearchState gt This command switches the search for a signal burst on or off Setting parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance lt SearchTolerance gt This command controls burst search tolerance Setting parameters lt SearchTolerance gt numeric value Range 0 to 100000 RST 4 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Search Tolerance on page 194 Pattern Searches The pattern search commands define when a pattern is detected in the analyzed sig nal 372 SENSe DDEMod SEARGIVSYNG AUTOM is 2 cuan ni aao E EE EEE 373 SENSe DDEMed SEARchSYNCIOC Ihreshold 21 2 iei etie 373 I SENSe JDDEMed SEARChSYNG MOBE 2 2 2 22 rte etre seda 373 SENSeJ DDEMOd SEARCh S YNG SELQGL artt te rope 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch S YNGISTAT6 n cpu ue 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold to its default value Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Configuring VSA Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 196
372. erence deviation in terms of the modulation index is therefore given by 1 A pep 0 1 fs The above formula provides the necessary calculation for measurement of an FSK sig nal with known symbol rate and modulation index Calculation examples The GSM standard describes the transmission of binary data using MSK i e 2FSK modulation with a modulation index of h 1 2 at a symbol rate of 270 8333 KHz The reference deviation is therefore given by Agnus E 8 2 1 270 8333 kHz 67 7083 kHz The APCO Project 25 standard phase 2 defines a H CPM signal i e 4AFSK with a modulation index of h 1 3 and a symbol rate of 6 KHz The reference deviation is 4 1 6 2 3 kHz 4 5 2 1 Error Model The FSK measurement model used assumes that signal distortions in both the magni tude and phase frequency are present as well as additive noise The measured signal model is expressed as MEAS t Apysr t ef Pons n t with n t is a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power Apisr t is the distorted magnitude model and q 5T0 is the distorted phase model The magnitude model is given by Apre with K is a constant scaling factor which can be interpreted as the system gain and is the amplitude droop in Nepers per second The phase model is given by Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors V D 9 with Bis ascaling factor which
373. ers State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 157 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level numeric value Range to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 157 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 157 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Configuring VSA Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 157 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 156 Note the final user sample rate of the R amp S FSW may differ and is defined using SENS DEM PRAT see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 361 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 156 INPut
374. ery start of current second result range in the capture buffer Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA Trace This command queries the trace data Which data is returned depends on the result display in the window specified by the suffix n Retrieving Results For details see chapter 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 440 Setting parameters lt Trace gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 5 TRACe6 TRACe1R 1 TRACe2R TRACe21 TRACe3R TRACe3l TRACe1 2 3 4 5 6 The complete data from the corresponding trace TRACe1R TRACe2R TRACe3R The real data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types TRACelI TRACe2l TRACe3l The imaginary data from the corresponding trace The parame ters are available for the Real Imaginary result types Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation data source selected by the LAY ADD WIND command and the result type selected by the CALCulate lt n gt FORMat command also affect the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt DATA lt gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation data source and result type are provided here e Capture Buffer
375. es are used for subsequent sweeps USER A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used AVERaging Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in all pre vious sweeps since the instrument was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start new averaging process use the SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 384 command RST TRACe Example DDEM EQU MODE TRAC Activates the tracking mode of the equalizer Manual operation See Mode on page 207 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet This command deletes the data of the currently selected equalizer After deletion train ing can start again using the command DDEM EQU MODE TRA see SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 383 Usage Event Manual operation See Reset Equalizer on page 208 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE Name This command saves the current equalizer results to a file Setting parameters Name string File name Example DDEM EQU SAVE D MMyEqualizer Saves the current equalizer results to D MyEqualizer vae Manual operation See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 208 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the equalizer For more information on the equalizer see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 107 Setting parameters State ON OFF 1
376. esescseseeeeessesenesesesenens 150 L RUR MAC MT 150 rcr T ere 150 Pattern petas ott certnm 150 2o 150 L Paterm Congal eeen dioe tubo E 150 EE E A 151 Signal Type Determines whether the signal is continuous or contains bursts Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue on page 319 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 149 Signal Description Burst Settings For bursts further settings are available Min Length Max Length Burst Settings Shortest and longest expected burst length in symbols 32000 The symbols are con verted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum on page 317 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt LENGth MINimum on page 317 prog Run In Burst Settings The number of symbols before the signal is assumed to have valid modulated symbols The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt SKIP RISing on page 318 Run Out Burst Settings The number of symbols before the falling edge that do not necessarily need to have a valid modulation The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt SKIP FALLing on page 318 Pattern Settings If the signal is expected to have a specif
377. espect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet on page 381 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings The measurement filter can be used to filter both the measured signal and the refer ence signal and thus the error vector You can configure the measurement filter to be used For more information on measurement filters see chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Filters on page 62 The Measurement Filter settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Measurement Filter button from the Overview e Select the Demod Meas Filter softkey from the main VSA menu Then switch to the Meas Filter tab A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly m Demodulation amp Measurement Filter Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Measurement Filter Auto according to Transmit Filter Type RRC la Alpha BT 0 22 e Preview Preview Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 2 794 Stop 2 794 L Load User zi MEM 214 ED e a E a e 214 SSS EE User Manual 1173 9292 02
378. esults only once not dynamically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 392 Auto Scale All Adapts the x axis and y axis to the current measurement values only once not dynamically in all measurement windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL on page 392 Trace Settings 6 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analy sis functions in the base unit except for the special window functions Window specific configuration o The settings in the Analysis dialog box are specific to the selected window Thus the Analysis button is only available in the Overview if the Specifics for option is enabled To configure the settings for a different VSA window select the window out side the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box e WAC RF atat m di 219 Export SOWING Lad dete er 222 Math 223 Modulation Accuracy Limit Fee ere terni 228 e Display and Window
379. etard nentes 375 SENSe DDEMod SEAR CHS YNGC DRATA 2 ee enc erac 375 I SENSe IDDEMod SEARCMESYNGONAME iiti raton Eee eonun 376 85 nnn na 376 SENSe DDEMod SEARcCh SYNC PATTem ADD iocus cirugia 377 377 SENSe DDEMGd SEARGHIS YINCETEXT tinere rper Suez 377 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent lt Comment gt This command defines a comment to a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 376 Setting parameters lt Comment gt string Configuring VSA Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Edit on page 198 See New on page 199 See Comment on page 201 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY lt Pattern gt This command copies a pattern file The pattern to be copied must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 376 Tip In manual operation a pattern can be copied in the editor by storing it under a new name Setting parameters Pattern string Example DDEM SEAR SY
380. eters that are displayed in the Result Summary R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range See also chapter 9 3 5 Setting the Evaluation Range on page 273 The evaluation range is always equal to or smaller than the result range and defines The range over which traces that do not have a time axis are displayed e g polar diagrams The range over which the following parameters are calculated for the Result Sum mary EVM MER Phase Error Magnitude Error Power Evaluation range display In all displays over time except for capture buffer displays the evaluation range is indi cated by red lines D MagAbs MeastRef on dp dB Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym Fig 4 70 Evaluation lines in absolute magnitude diagram In symbol tables the evaluated symbols are indicated by red square brackets D Symbol Table Hexadecimal EMR hi EAR Ra ez en OE os 15 1E 15 0 In other result displays that are based on the evaluation range only two red vertical lines are displayed in the diagram header to indicate a limited evaluation basis B Result Summary User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 130 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol 4 7 Display Points v
381. ettings dialog box Frequency Frequency Center 13 25 GHz Freque Value 0 0 Hz Center TROGUGICY 168 Center Frequency 169 Eregeenocy OSCE is sissies is acer cent c ent cu dd ea 169 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 lt fcenter s fmax z Spanmin 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 Input Output and Frontend Settings fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 350 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be set to a predefined value or it can be manually set to a user defined value Auto The step size is set to the default value using the rotary knob 100 kHz Using the arrow keys 1 MHz Manual Defines a user defined step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO on page 351 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 350 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data proces
382. evinig Resulls etr cerne nk ne nea ae XA MUS 435 e Importing and Exporting Data and Results sess 455 e Status Reporting etti etd ente ebd dada 457 e Commands for Compatbility ciere eee cirea 468 Frogramiming Examples putt reu rue nue 469 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote co
383. eviously detected by the burst search Furthermore it only finds the first I Q pattern within each burst If the burst search is switched off the pattern search searches for the pattern in the entire capture buffer The first detected pattern in the capture buffer for the current pattern search settings is indicated by a green line in the preview area of the Pattern Search configuration dia log box see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 195 Information Selected pattern for Search GSM_TSCO Pattern Found X Preview Preview Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Predefined Patterns Common standards usually have predefined pattern lists with standard specific pat terns Patterns required for the current measurement can be selected from this list This list can be extended by patterns that are already available in the R amp S FSW Newly created patterns can also be added to the list 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the result range and aims to make the correct symbol deci sions The algorithm is illustrated in figure 4 49 using the example of a QPSK modula tion After timing and scaling recovery a frequency offset and phase offset estimator is employed After this coarse synchronization the VSA application makes symbol decisions i e recovers which symbols were transmitted by the device under test DUT Typically the employed estimators are non data aided
384. f 80 MHz The bandwidth extension options greater than 160 MHz are deactiva ted 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option for 320 MHz is deactivated Not available or required if bandwidth extension option for 500 MHz is installed Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on 362 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH on page 363 Signal Capture Usable Bandwidth Shows the usable bandwidth which depends on the selected sample rate For details see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and I Q Bandwidth page 66 This information is provided for reference only Note In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Transformation on page 231 the usable I Q bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines Remote command TRACe n IQ BWIDth on page 362 Swap Activates or deactivates the inverted I Q modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 362 5 6 2 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement The Trigger settings are displayed when you do one of the following Select the Signal Capture button from the Ove
385. f defined a reference level offset is also considered For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trigger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Configuring VSA Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 188 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 189 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurem
386. f the burst and compare the burst length to the settings in the Signal Description dialog Increase the search tolerance the Burst Search dialog Keep an eye the green red field If the burst search succeeds you can see the length of the found bursts Set the minimum burst length to 50 and the maximum burst length to 5000 For more information see Burst Settings on page 150 Burst Configuration on page 194 The signal is highly distorted and or has modulation noise One possibility to enhance the robustness of the burst search is to increase the minimum gap length If the bursts within your capture buffer are not closely spaced it makes sense to increase the value of this parameter Burst amp Pattem Search Burst amp Pattern Search ours scorch RSI Auto according to Signal Description Burst found Auto according to Signal Description Burst found Meas only if Burst was found Meas only if Burst was found Configuration Auto Configurator Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Min Length 3 692 us Min Gep Length 10 sym 2 36 923 us Related Settings Related Settings i Signal Description Signal Description Trace Mag CapBuf 1 Cir Mag CapBuf Fig 10 6 Example for adjusting the minimum gap length For more information see Min Gap Length on page 194 The pattern search is switched on fai
387. figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections R amp S FSW K70 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application MultiView 33 Spectrum VSA 2 Ref Level 0 00 r Std j SR 4 MHz SGL Att 108 13 25GHz ResLen Stat Count 10 1 Const I Q Meas amp Re 2 3 1 2 Result Summary Current Je Unit EVM RMS 100 00 Peak 100 00 MER NMS 0 00 Peak 0 00 Phase Error RMS 103 95 Peak 179 82 Magnitude Frror RMS 100 00 Peak 100 00 Carrier Frequency Error 445021 50 Rho 0 000 008 1 0 Offset 36 57 1 0 Tmbalance 0 08 balane 46 60 o rror 159 53 Start 3 135 5 Stop 3 0 000 000 3 Mag Capture Buffer wid Symbols Hexadecimal pg 0 16 32 18 64 80 96 112 128 160 176 192 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement application 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored background of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA MSRT operating mode For details on t
388. fined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Edit on page 198 See New on page 199 See Symbols on page 201 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME Name This command selects a sync pattern for editing or for a new entry Setting parameters Name string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Edit on page 198 See New on page 199 See Name on page 200 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate lt NState gt This command selects the degree of modulation number of permitted states The pat tern must have been selected before using using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 376 The number of permitted states depends on the modulation mode Setting parameters lt NState gt numeric value Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Mod order on page 201 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD lt AddPattern gt This command adds a pattern to the current standard Using the DDEM SEAR SYNC SEL command only those patterns can be selected which belong to the current standard see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 374 Setting parameters lt AddPattern gt string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User De
389. fined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Adding patterns to a standard on page 198 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove This command deletes one or all patterns from the current standard Usage Setting only Manual operation See Removing patterns from a standard on page 198 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT lt Text gt This command defines a text to explain the pattern The text is displayed only in the selection menu manual control This text should be short and concise Detailed infor mation about the pattern is given in the comment see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 374 Setting parameters Text string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Edit on page 198 See New on page 199 See Description on page 200 11 5 7 Defining the Result Range The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is dis played Manual configuration of the result range is described in chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 201 Useful commands for result ranges described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst STARt on page 439 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe STOP on page 437 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to defining result ranges CALOCulate
390. fining the range size reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value and a position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis 1 Focus the result window Select AMPT YScale Config Y Axis Reference Value 2 3 Enter a reference value for the y axis in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Reference Position 5 Enter the position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis The position is a percentage of the entire length where 100 refers to the top edge 6 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Range Example If you want the to analyze errors greater than 95 you can define the y axis range as 5 and position the y axis to start at 9596 To do so enter the reference value 95 96 and the reference position 096 1 Clrw 2 Clrw Start 151 0 sym Stop 299 0 sym Fig 8 3 Defining the y axis scaling using a reference point To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window SSS SS aT User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 254 How to Analyze the Measured Data 2 Select AMPT gt Y Axis Auto Scale The y axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynamically 8 3 1 2 How to Scale Statistics Diagrams Statistic diagrams show the distribution i e p
391. fix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt FitOffset gt numeric value Range 8000 to 8000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Offset on page 203 Configuring VSA CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue Reference This command defines the reference point for the display Suffix lt gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt Reference gt TRIGger BURSt PATTern TRIGger The reference point is defined by the start of the capture buffer BURSt The reference point is defined by the start center end of the burst PATTern The instrument selects the reference point and the alignment RST TRIGger Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Reference on page 202 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset lt VOffset gt This command defines an offset to numbering of the symbols Except capture buffer Setting parameters lt VOffset gt numeric value Range 100000 to 100000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Symbol Number at Reference Start on page 203 SENSe DDEMod TIME lt ResultLength gt The co
392. for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 206 See Compensate for FSK on page 207 SENSe DDEMod OPTimization lt Criterion gt This command determines the optimization criteria for the demodulation RMSMin Optimization goal is the minimization of RMS of the error vector EVMMin Optimization goal is the minimization of the EVM Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt Criterion gt RMSMin EVMMin RMSMin Optimizes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is minimal EVMMin Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal RST RMSMin depends on selected standard Manual operation See Optimization on page 210 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO lt UseWfmForSync gt This command selects manual or automatic synchronization with a pattern waveform to speed up measurements Setting parameters lt UseWfmForSync gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 211 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe lt FastSync gt This command switches fast synchronization on and off if you manually synchronize with a waveform pattern Setting parameters lt FastSync gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 211 11 5 9 Measurement Filter Settings You can configure the measurement filter to be used Manual configuration of the measurement filter is described in chapter 5 10 Measure ment Filter Settings on page 213 For m
393. for an 8 PSK Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 376 Symbols The pattern definition is a symbol table consisting of one or more symbols The number of symbols is indicated as the Size to the left of the symbol table A scrollbar beneath the input area alows you to scroll through the table for long pat terns The numbers beneath the scrollbar indicate the sequential number of the follow ing symbols from left to right e first symbol the currently selected symbol the last symbol Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 375 Symbol format Symbols Defines the format in which each symbol is defined hexadecimal decimal or binary Adding symbols Symbols Adds a new symbol in the symbol table to the left of the currently selected symbol Removing symbols Symbols Removes the currently selected symbol in the symbol table Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 374 5 8 Result Range Configuration The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is dis played For more information see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 126 A visualization of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visuali zation area at the bottom of the dialog box The Result Range sett
394. ful OFF 0 Alignment was not yet performed successfully Example SYST COMM RDEV O0SC ALIG STEP Result 1 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE Returns the date of alignment of the IF OUT 2 GHZ to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values lt Date gt Returns the date of alignment Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC DATE Result 2014 02 28 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN Returns the identification string of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW Return values lt IDString gt Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz RTO 1316 1000k14 200153 2 45 1 1 Usage Query only Configuring VSA Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name page 162 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState Returns the state of the LAN connection to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values lt Color gt GREEN Connection to the instrument has been established successfully GREY Configuration state unknown for example if you have not yet started transmission RED Connection to the instrument could not be established Check the connection between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo scope and make sure the IP address of the oscilloscope has been defined see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCi
395. g Result CDMA2K FWD DVB S2 GRAY NATURAL WCDMA See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 Query only See Modulation Mapping on page 147 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue Mapping To obtain a list of available symbol mappings for the current modulation type use the SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog query Setting parameters Mapping Example Example Example Manual operation string SENS DDEM MAPP GSM Sets mapping to GSM See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 See Modulation Mapping on page 147 SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat lt MSKformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for MSK Setting parameters MSKformat Manual operation TYPE1 TYPE2 NORMal DIFFerential TYPE1 NORMal Demodulation order MSK is used TYPE2 DIFFerential Demodulation order DMSK is used RST TYPE1 See Modulation Order on page 146 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat PSKformat Together with DDEMod PSK NST this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate page 313 Depending on the demodulation format and state the following orders are available
396. ge lt none gt Carrier frequency drift for current sweep AVG Average FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK carrier frequency drift PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK carrier frequency drift Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the frequency error of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt RMS frequency error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS frequency errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS frequency error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic F SK MDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the measurement deviation of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current
397. ge 147 SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate lt APSKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for APSK The following APSK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod APSK NSTate 16 16APSK 32 32APSK Setting parameters lt APSKNstate gt numeric value RST 16 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 146 SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate lt ASKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for ASK The following ASK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod ASK NSTate 2 OOK 4 4ASK Setting parameters lt ASKNstate gt numeric value RST 2 Configuring VSA Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 146 SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters MeasFiltAlphaBT numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe lt MeasFilterState gt This command defines whether the input signal that is evaluated is filtered by the mea surement filter This command has no effect on the transmit filter Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt OFF 1 0 ON SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is activated OFF The input signal is not filtered SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is deactivated RST 1 SENSe DDEMod FORMat lt Group gt This command selects the digital demodulation mode Setting parameters lt Group gt Example
398. guration remote Count see Statistic count 191 Settings uit ee ien 190 Symbol check AGOAN ere ern dno 106 Demodulati m eie 106 xui c c 106 Symbol decisions AQ ONAN coy ner c rer n rens 103 Demodulation 103 Demodulation 99 Known le 104 Symbol error rate SER Fine synchronization 212 Symbol mapping 77 147 ES 96 ASI 95 Differential PSK 83 e Yee yu 87 e E 89 Offset QPSK 85 OOK 2 95 78 QAM 90 Rotating differentialPSK 84 PSK e a 81 User deflried oe re E retener te 97 Wizard mapwiz 97 Symbol number Result range start 203 Symbol rate 131 147 BASICS nup e Deo os S itat 59 Display rtr enis 13 MSRA MSRT mode Relationship to sample rate REMO ET Symbol Rate EMOT ssr rrt arn denn Symbol Rate Error SRE erre tne 113 Symbol tables tyDe eret eterne trn 54 Symbols Data
399. gure 4 46 provides an overview of the demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option The function blocks of the signal processing kernel can be found at the left in grey and their appropriate settings at the right in blue A more detailed description of the most important stages is given in the following sec tions Burst Search In this stage the capture buffer is searched for bursts that comply with the signal description The search itself can be switched on or off via the Burst Search dialog see Enabling Burst Searches on page 194 A list of the detected bursts is passed on to the next processing stage Pattern Search The I Q Pattern Search is performed on the capture buffer This means the VSA application modulates the selected pattern according to the transmit filter Tx filter and the modulation scheme Subsequently it searches the capture buffer for this pat tern i e the waveform of the pattern It is assumed that patterns can only appear within bursts i e the pattern search range is limited to the bursts detected by the burst search stage If the burst search is switched off the whole capture buffer is searched for the pattern A list of all detected patterns is passed on to the next processing stage It is important to note that the VSA application can only search for one pattern at a time The pattern search can be switched on or off via the Pattern Search dialog see Enab
400. gure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw measurement data How to Perform Measurements in VSA The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup Remote Commands for VSA Remote commands required to configure and perform VSA measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Annex Reference material List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Documentation Overview e Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmw
401. h term FILTWIZ Filters Bandwidths During Signal Processing Rohde amp Schwarz Filter Wizard Version 1 5 xi File operations File name MyFilter vaf Load Save Save as Exit Description File info user specific fitter 0 035 RRC alpha 0 22 L 10 ISI_LSNR 16 5 dB 0 03 0 025 0 02 0 015 hi 0 01 0 005 tin ya Sai Fig 4 4 FILTWIZ filter tool for VSA It is possible to load customized transmit filters and customized measurement filters If a customized transmit filter is selected the internal receive filter coefficients are calcu lated automatically on the fly Note that this is different to the R amp S FSQ K70 where it is necessary to also transfer a user receive filter If you upload a customized transmit filter and leave the measurement filter set to auto matic the internally calculated receive filter will be used as measurement filter Note that this filter is not necessarily suitable for your specific signal The filter is optimized such that the intersymbol interference is low Hence you will probably be able to see a clear eye diagram and an Vector diagram with a recognizable constellation How ever a filter that has low intersymbol interference might lead to noise enhancement which is commonly undesirable for a measurement filter In order to avoid noise enhancement it is recommended that you a design your own measurement filter and upload it as a use
402. ha BT Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for transmit filter is available for RC RRC Gauss and GMSK filter Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa on page 315 5 4 2 Signal Structure The Signal Structure settings describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instru ment can be synchronized thus adapting the result range A visualization of the currently defined signal structure is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box The Signal Structure settings are displayed when you do one of the following Select the Signal Description button in the Overview e Select the Signal Description softkey the main VSA menu R amp SSFSW K70 Configuration Then switch to the Signal Structure tab 148 Sig Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst 148 sym 546 462 A e U M 148 sym 546 462 ps Run In sym 11 077 ps Run Out 3 sym 11 077 ps Pattern Name EDGE_TSCO g Pattern Config Offset 58 sym 214 154 ps Description Signal M 149 cU IE SOUINGS E 150 L Min Length Max Lengfh ccccscccccssssscscsssscsetsseseses
403. hapter A 7 2 Data Binary File on page 509 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the I Q data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16
404. hat contain a pattern and are aver aged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC on page 373 Selected Pattern for Search Indicates which of the patterns that are assigned to the current standard is selected and will be searched for The selected pattern is indicated for information only and cannot be edited here only in the Signal Structure settings see Name on page 150 Remote command 5 5 DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 374 Pattern Found Indicates whether a pattern was found in the currently captured data Pattern Configuration For common signal standards the patterns to be searched for in the captured signal are predefined in the VSA application In addition new patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard manually Burst and Pattern Configuration Patterns are configured in the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box which is dis played when you do one of the following e Select the Pattern Config softkey the main VSA menu e Inthe Signal Description dialog box see chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 144 switch to the Signal Structure tab and select the Pattern Config button x Advanced Standard Patterns Pattern Details Name EDGE TSCO Description EDGE Norma
405. he 80 MHZ setting in manual operation RST ON Configuring VSA Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 182 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH Limit Defines the maximum analysis bandwidth Any value can be specified the next higher fixed bandwidth is used Defining a value other than MAX is useful if you want to specify the sample rate directly and at the same time ensure a minimum bandwidth is available see Restrict ing the maximum bandwidth manually on page 71 Parameters Limit 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 is deactivated TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to OFF 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 is deactivated Not available or required if bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is installed TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON 500 MHz 320 MHz MAX All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The cur rently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chap ter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 67 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON RST maximum available Default unit Hz Example TRAC IQ WBAN MBW 82 MHZ TRAC IQ WBAN MBW Result if R amp S FSW B160 B320 is active 160000000 Example TRAC IQ WBAN MBW 82 MHZ TRAC IQ WBAN MBW Result if R
406. he Signal Description dialog box select Transmit Fil ter Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 8 2 2 How to Perform Pattern Searches To configure a pattern search 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description 2 Select the Signal Structure tab 3 Select the Burst Signal signal type 4 Enable the Pattern option 5 From the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard 6 If the pattern you require is not available continue with add a predefined pat tern to a standard on page 245 or chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pat tern on page 246 7 Optionally select the Offset option and enter the number of symbols in the signal to be ignored during the pattern search 8 Close the Signal Description dialog box 9 In the Overview dialog box select Burst Pattern and switch to the Pattern Search tab 10 Select On to enable the search To enable a search only if a pattern is part of the signal description enable the Auto option The results of the pattern search with the selected pattern on the current measure ment data is displayed in the Preview area of the dialog box Whether a pattern was detected or not is indicated in the Information area 11 If necessary adapt the correlation threshold If bursts not detected reduce t
407. he MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Channel bar information In VSA application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in VSA application Ref Level Reference level Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Std Selected measurement standard or modulation type if no standard selected Res Len Result Length SR Symbol Rate Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset Cap Len Capture Length instead of result length for capture buffer display see Capture Length Settings on page 181 mum PE UU User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 13 Understanding the Display Information Input Input type of the signal source see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 152 Burst Burst search active see Enabling Burst Searches on page 194 Pattern Pattern search active see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 196 Stat Count Statistics count for averaging and other statistical operations see Statis tic Count on page 191 cannot be edited directly Capt Count Capture count the current number of captures performed if several cap tures are necessary to obtain the number of results defined by Statistics Count cannot be edited directly S
408. he XOR coded bitstream d Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM In the case of QAM the information is represented by the signal amplitude and phase The symbols are arranged in a square constellation in the plane To ensure reliable demodulation symbol numbers should be distributed evenly with respect to the symbol alphabet As a rule of thumb the result length should correspond to at least 8 times the modula tion order For example with 64 QAM a result length of at least 8 64 512 symbols should be used Symbol Mapping QAM Mappings The following QAM mappings are obtained from the mapping of the 1st quadrant which is always rotated by 2 for the subsequent quadrants and supplemented by a GRAY coded prefix for each quadrant Table 4 16 Derivation of QAM mappings a In the following diagrams the symbol mappings are indicated in hexadecimal and binary form 0 41 43 2 1100 1101 1111 1110 1000 1001 1011 1010 Fig 4 34 Constellation diagram for 16 0 GRAY including the logical symbol mapping hexadeci mal and binary Symbol Mapping 1011 1001 0001 0011 1010 1000 0000 0010 1110 1100 0100 0110 1111 1101 0101 0111 Fig 4 35 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for EDGE hexa decimal and binary 1011 1001 0010 0011 1010 1000 0000 0001 1101 1100 0100 0110 1111 1110 0101 0111 Fig 4 36 Constellation diagram
409. he application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Capture Lengthi Settings dee treni ee ra per eec put ea OTER 181 ise Em 182 215119 OT 182 Usable WO bete reso Eee be I o e dett ne 183 M 183 Capture Length Settings The capture length defines how many symbols are captured during each measure ment Enable the Auto option to define the capture length automatically according to the burst and pattern length settings and the statistics count Thus a minimal capture length is used which improves performance User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 184 Signal Capture If the capture length is not defined automatically enter the number of symbols or sec onds to be captured and select the used unit The defined number is converted to the alternative unit seconds symbols for reference As of firmware version 1 70 up to 64000 symbols can be captured and processed dur ing each measurement previously 50000 Remote command SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO on page 361 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue on page 361 Sample Rate Defines t
410. he defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 66 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SRATe on page 315 Signal Description Transmit Filter Type Defines the type of transmit filter An overview of available transmit filters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 485 For more information on transmit filters see chapter 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodula tion Filters on page 61 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 315 To define the name of the transmit filter to be used SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe on page 316 To switch off the transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on page 316 To select a user defined filter Load User Filter Transmit Filter Type Opens file selection dialog box to select the user defined transmit filter to be used Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 214 a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used For details see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 64 For detailed instructions on working with user defined filters see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 244 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on page 316 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 315 Alp
411. he meas filter see figure 4 2 If unfiltered signals have to be measured as well e g to determine nonlinear signal distortions no measurement filter is switched into the signal path and the reference filter is identical to the transmit filter see figure 4 2 In the baseband block diagrams see figure 4 2 the system theoretical transmitter and analyzer filters are shown for PSK and QAM demodulation For the sake of clearness RF stages IF filters and the filter stages of the digital hardware section are not shown For a correct demodulation the following filters have to be accurately specified for the analyzer e Transmit filter filter characteristic of transmitter Meas filter PSK QAM UserQAM MSK The and the Q part of the measurement and the reference signal are filtered with this filter FSK The instantaneous frequency of the measurement reference signal are filtered In many applications the measurement filter is identical to the receive filter User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 61 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing The receive filter also referred to as an 5 filter is configured internally depending on the transmit filter The goal is to produce intersymbol interference free points for the demodulation The reference filter synthesizes the ideal transmitted signal after meas filtering It is calculated by the analyzer from the above filters convolution operation transmit filter mea
412. he number of samples to capture per symbol The sample rate in MHz is indi cated for reference This parameter affects the demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable bandwidth The maximum sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and I Q Bandwidth on page 66 For details on selecting the suitable sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Sym bol Rate and Bandwidth on page 66 Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 361 Maximum Bandwidth Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R amp S FSW for I Q data acquisition This setting is only available if a bandwidth extension option greater than 160 MHz is installed on the R amp S FSW Otherwise the maximum bandwidth is determined automati cally Note This setting is not available for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 67 Auto Default All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 67 Note that using bandwidth extension options greater than 160 MHz may cause more spurious effects See Restricting the maximum bandwidth manually on page 71 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum o
413. he signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 134 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics start of the application data for vector signal analysis The Capture Buffer displays show the application data of the VSA application in MSRA MSRT mode Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA MSRT Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Since the VSA application supports several standards and the standard used by the currently analyzed data is not known the Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings is used to approximate the channel bandwidth Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW VSA application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the evaluation range or result range se
414. he threshold if false bursts are detected increase the threshold 12 Optionally enable the Meas only if pattern symbols correct option In this case measurement results are only displayed if a valid pattern has been detected 13 Close the dialog box The selected pattern is used for a pattern search in the next measurement 8 2 2 1 How To Assign Patterns to a Standard Only patterns that are assigned to the currently selected VSA standard are available for the pattern search To add a predefined pattern to a standard 1 Inthe Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 In the list of All Patterns select the required pattern If the required pattern is not displayed see To change the display for the list of patterns on page 248 4 Select Add to Standard The selected pattern is inserted in the list of Standard Patterns 5 Select the pattern to be used for the pattern search from the list of Standard Pat terns To remove a predefined pattern from a standard 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of Standard Patterns 4 Select Remove from Standard The pattern is r
415. hical error values However the measurement filter should be switched off if non linear distortions have to be measured they usually pro duce high frequency components Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Predefined measurement filters The most frequently required measurement filters are provided by the VSA application see chapter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 486 The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 499 4 1 5 Customized Filters The analytical filter types RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and GAUS SIAN as well as the most important standard specific filters are already integrated in the VSA application In addition it is possible to use user defined measurement and transmit filters Customized filters may be useful for the following purposes Development of new networks and modulation methods for which no filters are defined yet Measurements of transmitter characteristics with slightly modified e g shortened transmitter filters An external program FILTWIZ is offered to convert user defined filters This pro gram generates filter files vaf which can be transferred to the analyzer with a USB device for example The program can be downloaded together with a detailed descrip tion as a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode on the Internet at http www rohde schwarz com searc
416. hip between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate with and with out bandwidth extensions 4 2 1 4 R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 10 MHz Table 4 3 Maximum I Q bandwidth Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 10 MHz proportional up to maximum 10 MHz 10 MHz to 10 GHz 10 MHz Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth 4 2 1 5 R amp S FSW with options B28 or 028 Bandwidth Extension 4 2 1 6 4 2 1 7 4 2 1 8 sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 28 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 35 MHz proportional up to maximum 28 MHz 35 MHz to 10 GHz 28 MHz R amp S FSW with option B40 040 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 40 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 50 MHz 50 MHz to 10 GHz proportional up to maximum 40 MHz 40 MHz R amp S FSW with option B80 080 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 80 MHz Sample rate 100 Hz to 100 MHz Maximum I Q bandwidth proportional up to maximum 80 MHz 100 MHz to 10 GHz 80 MHz R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 160 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 1
417. his command queries the results of the imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation Query parameters type none imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of imbalance error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor type This command queries the results of the magnitude error measurement of digital demodulation Retrieving Results Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt RMS magnitude error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS magnitude errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS magnitude error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of magnitude errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer lt gt This command queries the results of the power measurement of digital demodulation Query par
418. hresholds are also shown The noise signal forms a cloud around the ideal symbol point in the constellation dia gram Exceeding the symbol decision boundaries leads to wrong symbol decisions and increases the bit error rate Similar displays are obtained in case of incorrect transmitter filter settings When an incorrect filter is selected crosstalk occurs between neighbouring symbol decision points instead of the ISI free points The effect increases the more the filtering deviates from actual requirements The two effects described cannot be distinguished in the Constellation I Q diagram but in statistical and spectral analyses of the error signal Channel transmission distortion During transmission disturbances in the transmission channel may cause distortions in the input signal at the R amp S FSW Such influences are included in the EVM calculation However if the ideal reference signal can be estimated with sufficent accuracy by the R amp S FSW e g using the equalizer the channel distortions can be compensated for and deducted from the EVM 4 5 2 FSK Modulation Signal Model Frequency shift keying FSK involves the encoding of information in the frequency of a transmitted signal As opposed to other modulation formats such as PSK and QAM the FSK process is a non linear transformation of the transmitted data into the trans mitted waveform Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors A sequence of symbols sj
419. i cate values However a negative influence on the measurement results is not to be expected 10 3 Frequently Asked Questions Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window 287 Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement window the trace of the reference signal Is not eee reete ennt nns 287 Problem The measurement window does not show average results 288 Problem The spectrum is not displayed the logarithmic domain 289 Problem The Vector result display and the Constellation result display look dif TOTBTID 289 Problem The Constellation measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S 5 70 289 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSW K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ atid the R amp S T SVWIKTQ0 iuis e ee RH niente ieee 290 Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is significantly sni TU ES 290 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSW K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S ESGQ KTUM etienne hanc re Peto ra aa Ret 292 Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes the Frequ
420. iation Imbalance Carrier Frequency Error Gain Imbalance Carrier Frequency Drift Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Current value In the Current column the value evaluation for the current evaluation is displayed For example the EVM Peak value in the current sweep corresponds to the peak of the trace values within the evaluation range for the current sweep as indicated by marker 1 in figure 3 20 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Result Summary Current StdDev 95 ile Units EVM RMS 0 32 0 32 0 3 5 00 9j Peak 0 84 0 84 0 8 0 00 RMS 49 87 49 87 49 8 5 00 Peak 41 54 1 0 00 Phase Error RMS 0 15 y 9 1 0 00 Peak 0 48 8 0 48 0 00 Magnitude Error RMS 0 18 18 0 1 9 00 Peak 0 53 0 53 2 2 00 Carrier Frequency Error 178 54 178 54 8 54 0 00 Symbol Rate Error 0 00 Rho 0 999 990 05 0 Os 90 0 000 000 1 0 Offset 66 07 2 0 65 51 1 9 00 Gain Imbalance 0 01 0 0 0 01 9 00 Quadrature Error 0 01 0 0 0 01 2 0 Amplitude Droop 0 000 000 0 000 000 0 000 000 2 000 000 Power 24 21 24 24 21 6 00 1EVM 349 sym 451 sym Fig 3 20 Example for result summary with current EVM peak value marked If you want to compare the trace values to the results of the Result Summary make sure to match the displayed points per symbol of the trace and of the Result Summary Refer to Display Points Sym on page 232 for details Mean value In the Mean
421. ic EHIGEI VALUO s ci coo c o cote a epe ec er ied 327 SENSe MIXeF HARMONIC TYPE ereenn nnp tente IX ETATER 327 SENSe MIXer HARMonic EOW ctn tie tp cara E nene noe t 327 SENSe MIXer LOPOWET rotat SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH SENSe IMIXer EOSS TABLe HIGLL itte teme ttt rte teet te ene t ep eet cd 328 SENSe IMIXer EOSS TABLe EOWD iier ette t e rere ede tee 328 SENSE IMIXer EO iG 328 SENSe MIXer PORTS cane eter oe deve eap p tede ett de Eu bd 328 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange S TATe 2 trop uta rer ER PR RE 329 SENSE MIC GINA Y SENSe MIXer THReshold SENSE MIXE STAT E rn eet Eee Eee ter ener ede Maia 5 418 SENSe PROB6sp ID PARTEHUtmDOE ite oett tee n Pte eet nea en i 342 SENSe PROBSSp ID SRNUmbOt inccr eee RE Eee de d ee RE ED EE SEX ERES 342 SENSe PROBesp z SETUp MOBB iterom rone cioe tetigere tr PE avia pL REE 343 gt
422. ic pattern enable the Pattern option to define the pattern settings Note The pattern search itself must be enabled separately in the Pattern Search Set tings see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 196 By default the pattern search is active if the signal description contains a pattern Name lt Pattern Settings Specifies the pattern name from the list of defined patterns You can also configure new patterns see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configuration on page 196 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern on page 319 Pattern Configuration Pattern Settings Displays the Pattern Configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configura tion on page 196 Signal Description Offset Pattern Settings The offset of the pattern is defined with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst see Useful length on page 129 If the position of the pattern within the burst is known it is recommended that you define the offset That will accelerate the pattern search and enhance the accuracy of the burst search Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe on page 319 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue on page 319 5 4 3 Known Data The Known Data settings allow you to load a file that describes the possible data sequences in the input signal See chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 249 Additional information provided by the loaded f
423. ically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 392 Defining Min and Max Values Indicates the current range borders according to the current settings for information only For statistical evaluations only defines the displayed range using minimum and maximum values Values in the range 1e lt value lt 0 1 are allowed The y axis unit is defined via the Y Axis Unit on page 180 setting The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 357 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on 356 Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the displayed range using a reference point and the size of the divisions For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 254 Y Axis Reference Value Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines a reference value on the y axis in the current unit The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the Y Axis Reference Position on page 177 For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 254 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue o
424. icono tct eee e ex tata io EOM dog CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGH E lt gt lt gt CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT sess t CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimuUMmINEX T uoto corpora cete rue type De c nena Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMIARIGH ties cio teorico cote a Ce EE sae lt gt lt gt gt gt SEARGIL centurio tete ea T dd nea oed CAL gt gt TRAGO ti inco cepa rco copa ner ea ipeo eo Ey td ease OPER CAL Culate lt m gt MARKGISIM gt D e 404 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMItSILEF T soot ttp ect Cete cz eta e 410 CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt X SLEIMits RIGH iita ia or tct 410 CALCulatexn MARKer m X SLIMits S TATe ener 411 gt gt Y rper eret pe ete pte v ette repr elvat aoa T dp 437 lt gt lt 2 5
425. ies a particular BER result to be queried If no parameter is specified the current bit error rate is returned The parameters for these results are listed in table 11 4 Retrieving Results Table 11 4 Parameters for BER result values Result Current Min Max Acc Bit Error Rate CURRent MIN MAX TOTal Total of Errors TECurrent TEMIN TEMAX TETotal Total of Bits TCURrent TMIN TMAX TTOTal CALCulate lt n gt DDEM BURSt LENGth This command queries the length of a detected burst Note that since the R amp S FSW VSA application has no knowledge on the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Return values lt Length gt integer Number of symbols Example INIT CONT OFF switches to single sweep SENS DDEM SIGN VAL BURS switches bursted signal on INIT IMM WAI starts single sweep and waits for result CALC DDEM BURS LENG returns detected burst length Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop lt type gt This command queries the results of the amplitude droop error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Amplitude droop in dB symbol for current sweep AVG Amplitude droop in dB symbol evaluating the li
426. igital Baseband interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface to analyze signals already delivered to the complex baseband The R amp S FSW VSA application features e Flexible modulation analysis from MSK to 1024QAM Numerous standard specific default settings Various graphical numerical and statistical evaluations and result displays e Spectrum analyses of the measurement and error signal Flexible burst search for the analysis of complex signal combinations short bursts or signal mix This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product F SW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the VSA Application The VSA application adds a new application to the R amp S FSW To activate the VSA application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the VSA item Understanding the Display Information VSA The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the VSA ap
427. ignal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 353 INPut GAIN VALue on page 352 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 320 RF Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input This function is not available for input from the optional R amp S Digital Baseband Inter face Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface In Manual mode you can se
428. igning the Marker to amp uc ciae rtt xd fece aot Edo 225 JU MARO S ODE E SA E eret 225 Couple WINdOWS M 225 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 404 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on 405 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 405 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 404 6 3 2 Markers Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe page 404 CALCulate lt n gt
429. igure 6 1 Infinite Statistics are calculated for all trace points symbol instants and inter mediate times See window A in figure 6 1 Auto Oversampling is automatically set to Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE on page 433 6 6 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar Zoom Functions SMEO MM cs 234 E m 234 Restore Original Display eicere 234 Deaclivaling Zoom Selection mode oerte iat ttd 234 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 420 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 420 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 421 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MUL
430. ile is displayed at the bottom of the dia log box This information is not editable directly The Known Data settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Signal Description button in the Overview e Select Signal Description softkey the main VSA menu Then switch to the Known Data tab Modulation amp Signal Description Known Data Known Data is needed for the BER measurement and can be used for fine synchronization see Demodulation dialog Known Data Filename KnownData_example xml Load Data File Additional Information Result Length 148 Number of Sequences 5 Modulation Order 8 Base Hexadecimal Comment Standard EDGE_8PSK Input Output and Frontend Settings Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge See To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences on page 250 now EE 1 EE rime oc Eo sees eere uen eese 152 LOA TD eme Lees 152 Known Data Activates or deactivates the use of the loaded data file if available When deactivated the additional information from the previously loaded data file is removed Any referen ces to the known data in the Demodulation dialog box are replaced by the default parameter values see chapte
431. in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 235 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 235 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only 11 7 5 Analysis SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a simila
432. increases the maximum usable band width User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 67 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Bandwidth extension options o The maximum usable I Q bandwidth provided by the R amp S FSW in the basic installation can be extended by additional options These options can either be included in the ini tial installation B options or updated later U options The maximum bandwidth provi ded by the individual option is indicated by its number for example B40 extends the bandwidth to 40 MHz Note that the U options as of U40 always require all lower bandwidth options as a pre requisite while the B options already include them As a rule the usable bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate Yet when the bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter at very high output sample rates the curve breaks e Bandwidth Extension hpc e PERO Rupe nne rmt nun 68 e Relationship Between Sample Rate and Usable Bandwidth 69 e Relationship Between Sample Rate Record Length and Usable 1 0 Bandwidth 69 e R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension 70 e R amp S FSW with options B28 U28 Bandwidth Extension 71 e R amp S FSW with option B40 or 040 I DQB Bandwidth 71 e
433. ings tene 173 Input settings erar tnr etc ere 158 Analog Baseband B71 F ll scale level 175 VQ mode Input type remote control Analog Baseband Interface B71 Atmiplit de settings 173 Input settings een ete 158 Analysis Bandwidth definition 67 75 BUOM m des 219 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote 416 418 MSRA MSRT Analysis WING rrr eret rr rrt rns 135 irren 235 Configuration MSRA remote 416 418 Analyzing Meas redidat 5 252 APSK Modulation ens 145 Symbol MAPPING 3 cori terra 96 ASCII Trace export corre m een 487 ASK Modulation type Symbol mapping fuu 172 E 172 Configuration remote 353 El GttOFliC iere rr e rrr rrr ri 173 172 OPTION 173 Protective remole coe 320 Audio signals Output remote eic eei 165 349 Auto adjustment Triggered measurement nnne 394 Auto ID External Mixer Remote control
434. ings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Cut Result Ranges button from the Overview e Select the Range Settings softkey from the main VSA menu Result Range Configuration Result Range Evaluation Range Length Result Length 148 sym 546 462 ps Result Range Alignment Reference m Capture Burst Pattern Waveform Alignment Left o Center Right Offset sym Visualization 58 0 sym 26 202 zio EEUU 202 alfo DAS LTD 203 OS E M M P ee 203 Symbol Number at Reference Start tente rn tetra ts 203 Result Length Defines the number of symbols that are to be demodulated All traces over time are displayed over the result range Remote command SENSe DDEMod TIME on page 379 Reference Defines the reference for the result range alignment The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Capture the capture buffer Burst the detected burst Pattern the detected pattern Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue on 379 Demodulation Settings Alignment Defines the type of alignment of the result range to the reference source The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIG
435. ion See Type on page 214 See Load User Filter on page 214 Defining the Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated Manual configuration of the evaluation range is described in chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 215 lt gt lt 5 gt 5 eie eon eR RRR RR Re nRRRERRR unn 390 CALOCulate n ELIN startstop VALue esses 391 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe lt Auto gt This command restricts the evaluation range The evaluation range is considered for the following display types eye diagrams constellation diagrams modulation accuracy e statistic displays spectrum displays Configuring VSA Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 irrelevant Setting parameters lt Auto gt ON OFF 1 0 ON The evaluation range extends from the start value defined by CALC ELIN1 VAL to the stop value defined by CALC ELIN2 VAL see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 391 OFF The complete result area is evaluated RST OFF Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Evaluating the Entire Result Range on page 216 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startst
436. ion of symbol periods Note that k 0 5 n T for Offset QPSK with inactive Offset EVM User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 27 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays ei Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 5 Result display Error Vector Magnitude Available for source types e Error Vector Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency The eye diagram of the currently measured frequencies and or the reference signal The time span of the data depends on the evaluation range capture buffer Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM FEYE User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 28 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 9 to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 Eye Diagram Imag Q The eye pattern of the quadrature
437. iption gt Signal Structure dialog 260 417 ns 260 417 ns See part 2 yes Is your signal bursted C Sync prefers more valid symbols Is Sync prefers more valid yes symbols displayed in the status bar his can be problematic If you have a pattern you can try to use it for synchronization i e use the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern Demodulations Advanced dialog you increase the length of your Result Range Is your burst possibly larger Coarse Synchr Increase the Result Range to at least 8xModulation Order Go back to Do you transmit uncor related random bits on the physical level your Result Range large than 8xModulation Order e g 8x4 32 for QPSK no i Try to switch on the equalizer in the Demodulation dialog and compensate for the channel Y Try to compensate for the symbol rate error in the Demodulation dialog Hard to find the origin of the problem It might be that Your DUT suffers from massive impairments Your DUT suffers from a severe symbol rate error The adjacent channel power is very high Explanation of Error Messages no From 1 no Is your signal bursted yes Does your signal contain a pattern S this pattern relevant e g to align yo
438. ires extended calculation time so that the measurement update rate of the R amp S FSW decreases distinctly When the distortions are compensated suffi ciently this averaging process can be stopped The current filter is frozen that means it is no longer changed Keep in mind that in Tracking and Averaging mode for sweep counts gt 1 repeated analysis of past result ranges might lead to differing readings The equalizer algorithm is limited to PSK and QAM modulation schemes as the optimi zation criterion of the algorithm is based on minimizing the mean square error vector magnitude Thus it cannot be used for FSK modulation User defined equalizers Instead of tracking equalizer values repeatedly for different input signals you can store existing values to a file and load them again later This is useful if signals from the same input source are measured frequently In this case you only have to perform a calculation once and can use the same equalizer filter again and again Filter length The length of the equalizer can be defined in symbols The longer the equalizer the higher the resolution in the frequency domain is and the more distortion can be com pensated The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Estimation points per symbol You can define how many sample points are used for the equalizer calculation at each symbol Estimation points per symbol
439. is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 355 INPut EATT AUTO on page 355 INPut EATT on page 354 5 5 5 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the optional Analog Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box Input Output and Frontend Settings Amplitude Amplitude Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings Offset Unit Auto Level Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see chapter 5 5 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 158 For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manua
440. is command links the burst search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as bursted burst search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoBurstSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Burst Searches on page 194 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the search tolerance and the min gap length to their default values Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Burst Configuration on page 194 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth MINimum lt MinGapLength gt This command defines the minimum time between two bursts A minimum time with decreased level must occur between two bursts The default unit is symbol The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MinGapLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Min Gap Length on page 194 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that a measurement is performed only if a burst is found The command is available only if the burst search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 372 11 5 6 2 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt MEAS BURS MEAS Measurement is always performed BURS Measurement is performed only if a burst is found RST MEAS Manual op
441. is command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value Analysis The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max Peak on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the curren
442. is commonly normalized to the mean reference power or alternatively to the maximum reference power or the mean or maximum constellation power power at the symbol instants see Normalize EVM to on page 209 The EVM should not be confused with the magnitude error see below Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Magnitude Error The magnitude error is defined as the difference between the measurement vector magnitude and the reference vector magnitude see figure 4 56 Phase Error Q Fig 4 57 Modulation error Phase error error vector phase The phase error is the phase difference between the measurement vector and the ref erence vector PHASE _ ERR t PHASE yras 0 PHASE per r This measurement parameter is of great importance for MSK modulation measure ments The phase error should not be confused with the error vector phase The error vector phase is the absolute phase of the error vector see figure 4 57 The effects of the different modulation errors in the transmitter on the result display of the analyzer are described in the next topics All diagrams show the equivalent com plex baseband signal Modulation Error Ratio MER The modulation error ratio MER is closely related to EVM MER 20 log EVM dB where the EVM is normalized to the mean reference power Symbol Rate Error SRE The symbol rate error SRE describes the difference between the defined referen
443. isable the estimation algorithm For FSK modulated signals estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error FSK deviation error and the carrier frequency drift are calculated The measurement signal is subsequently corrected with these estimates Compensation for FSK deviation error and carrier frequency drift can be enabled or disabled For more information on synchronization see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 111 chapter 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 208 Result Display The selected measurement results are displayed in the window s Configuration of the windows can be performed via the Window Configuration dialog see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 230 Burst Search The burst search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped It is recommended that you switch the burst search on if the signal is bursted This R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics ensures that all internal estimators are operated in time ranges where the burst power ramping is up In order to eliminate amplitude variations caused by noise or the modulation itself the instantaneous power of the whole capture buffer is computed and then a moving aver age filter is applied The length of this filter is automatically determined with the help of the user settings The filtered power of the capture buffer is subsequently compared to an automatical
444. isplayed values and traces Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer that are to be demodula ted and analyzed together In some cases the data in the capture buffer contains parts that are not relevant for the evaluation task at hand Thus you can exclude them from the result range see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 201 Result range display The result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis of the capture buffer result diagrams R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 d amp m aiid i all Start 0 sym Fig 4 68 Result ranges for a burst signal Result displays whose source is not the capture buffer are based on a single result range such as the EVM vs Time display or the data in the Current column of the Result Summary In this case you can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges Select Result Rng function and analyze the indi vidual result ranges in separate windows The currently displayed result range is indi cated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display You can change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging the blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer Continuous and discrete result ranges Depending on the type of signal and your result range definition the result ranges may be continuous
445. it until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO RR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band SENS COR R R R CVL BAND USER CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA CVL MIX FS 260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO HH Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS
446. itude Fig 4 64 FSK Estimation Strategy In figure 4 64 MEAS n denotes the sampled complex baseband measured signal waveform The magnitude samples are denoted Aye s n while the instantaneous fre quency samples of the measured and reference signals are denoted by fyeAs n and fage n respectively The dashed outline of the Meas Filter block indicates that this operation is optionally de activated based on the corresponding user settings see Type on page 214 For the estimation of the magnitude parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 Auzas n Ke te n with respect to the model parameters and a where Tg denotes the sampling period used for estimation see Estimation Points Sym on page 210 For estimation of the frequency parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 8 fos fast usas a 8 frer 1 7 fan Tr with respect to the model parameters B fo f 7 The term denotes the reference instantaneous frequency with a possibly fractional delay of samples For FSK modulation the default sampling period used for estimation is the capture sampling period 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors A 2FSK signal is generated using a GMSK frequency pulse Examples of carrier drift and reference deviation are shown in figure 4 65 and figure 4 66 respectively Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Carrier freque
447. ive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Data File Format iq tar Sample iq tar files Some sample iq tar files are provided in the R_S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files parameter XML file e g 1 Contains meta information about the data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an iq tar file data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary data of all channels There must be only one single data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the parameter XML file and a preview of the data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at htto www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt 7 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd
448. k RESUIt essen enn 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent RESult essent 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan STATe lt gt 11 lt gt 11 454 lt gt 11 5 412 lt gt 11 414 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak RESult 454 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror 5 412 lt gt 11 1 414 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror 2 454 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN STATe 5 lt gt 11 2 lt gt 11 5 454 lt gt 11 5
449. ker first 11 7 2 2 Analysis To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 396 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Marker Search and Positioning Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Useful commands for positioning markers described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 404 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe on page 405 Remote commands exclusive to positioning markers lt gt lt gt 407 CAL gt gt MAXIMUM LEFT osica 407 lt gt
450. l Reference 174 L Shifting the Display Offset tnter 174 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 175 Full Scale Level Mode esses enne nnne nnne nens 175 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on 352 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so th
451. l It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 465 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 466 Table 11 5 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for R amp S FSW K70 Bit Definition 0 Burst not found This bit is set if a burst could not be detected 1 Sync not found This bit is set if the sync sequence pattern of the midamble could not be detected 2to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always O 11 11 2 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register This register comprises information about any limit violations that may occur after demodulation any of the VSA windows It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition on page 465 and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt on page 465 The status of the STATus QUESTionable MODulation register is indicated in bit 7 of the STATus QUESTionable register It can be queried using the STATus QUESTionable EVENt command Bit No Meaning 0 Error in EVM evaluation 1 Error in Phase Error evaluation 2 Error in Magnitude Error evaluation 3 Error in Carrier Frequency evaluation 4 Error in offset or RHO evaluation 5 Error in FSK evaluation 6 15 These bits are not used 11 11 3 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register This register comprises information about limit violations in EVM e
452. l TSCs simultaneously This is not possible in the R amp S FSW K70 Solution Make sure that the correct pattern is specified in the Signal Description dialog mum EP EIN EE NUUS User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 282 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement For more information see chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 144 Message Result Alignment Failed The result range alignment is not possible for the patricular capture buffer The result range needs data that has not been captured trun VSA Ref Level 10 00 Att 1008 Freq 1 AEVM Length Result Range Alignment Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Reference Capture Burst Alignment Left Center Offset Symbol No Burst Start O sym 1 a Start 126 sym Visualization Mag CapBuf EI D amp C CB 4 4 T WI Config Start 0 sym Stop 500 sym Display 11 01 2010 115707 Fig 10 8 Example for failed alignment In this windowshot the alignment of the long result range to the burst center is not pos sible because there are not enough samples in the capture buffer before the burst starts In this scenario the trigger settings should be changed such that the burst is in the middle of the capture buffer Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information
453. l symbol mapping Symbol Numbers x Lue 1 3 Fig 4 30 Constellation diagram for 4FSK for APCO C4FM and APCO Phase 2 including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Mapping 8FSK NATURAL Symbol Numbers Fig 4 31 Constellation diagram for 8FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4 3 7 Minimum Shift Keying MSK MSK modulation causes modulation dependent phase shifts of 90 which can be shown in an Constellation diagram As with PSK demodulation is performed by evaluation of the phase positions Table 4 14 MSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 Table 4 15 MSK GSM Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 4 3 8 Symbol Mapping Fig 4 32 MSK for GSM and NATURAL and DMSK Constellation Diagram including the symbol map ping Similar to PSK differential coding can also be used with MSK In this case too the information is represented by the transition of two consecutive symbols The block dia gram of the coder is shown below Fig 4 33 DMSK differential encoder in the transmitter d input symbol 0 1 of differential encoder 4 4 input symbol delayed by the symbol period Ts d output symbol 0 1 of differential encoder The logical symbol mapping is then performed on t
454. lation lt n gt FSK Register This register comprises information about limit violations in FSK evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current Frequency Error RMS value 1 Error in mean Frequency Error RMS value 2 Error in peak Frequency Error RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current Frequency Error peak value 6 Error in mean Frequency Error peak value 7 Error in peak Frequency Error peak value 8 9 These bits are not used 10 Error in current Frequency Deviation value 11 Error in mean Frequency Deviation value 12 Error in peak Frequency Deviation value 13 15 These bits are not used 11 11 9 Querying the Status Registers The following commands query the contents of the individual status registers STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition sseeeesseeesseeseen 465 STATus QUESHonable DIQ CONDIBIOR 22 5 porter mend ete eto dio uae cea d 465 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDiition eese nnns 465 5 5 lt gt 465 lt gt 1 2 1 465 5 5 lt
455. layed when you select the Window Config softkey from the main VSA menu Some settings are only displayed after you select the More button in the dialog box To hide these settings select the Less button Siri TI R 231 CIR IET 231 Result Type 0 0000 entente nennen nnns 231 Highlight EET 232 Display Rer tete Ra RR 232 VSR SEIN Gs ccs 233 Signal Source Data source as selected in the Display Configuration see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 If you change the signal source setting here the default result type for the new data source is activated for the current window Remote command LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Result Type The result type defines the evaluation method used in the current window The available result types in VSA are described in chapter 3 2 Result Types in VSA on page 19 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 Result Type Transformation For certain result types it is not only possible to see the common over time represen tation of the measurement but also the spectrum or the statistics in form of a histo gram These are the transformations of the results These settings are not available for symbol evaluation i e the following signal sources Symbols Modulation Accuracy
456. le MODulation lt n gt IQRHO limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation Status Reporting System STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK limit violations in FSK evalua tion The STATus QUESt ionable register sums up the information from all subregisters e g bit 11 sums up the information for all STATus QUEStionable SYNC registers For some subregisters there may be separate registers for each active channel Thus if a status bit in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 11 9 Querying the Status Registers on page 463 Status Reporting System g sogea OR of all Lits s g DigtallQ o specific for FSW K70 13 1 One register for each active channel pu ACPLimit SYNC SYNC BURSt 10 UMARgn STATus QUEStionable S YNC n T T oe CALibration UNCAL MODidation 5 FREQuency FDEPeak TEMPerature FDEMean POWer 2 FDECurrent STATus QUE Stionable PFEPIK PFEMean 7 PFECurrent MIQOfset e ClIQOffset
457. le and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Configuring VSA SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE
458. le symbol mappings for QPSK modulation DEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DEM SRAT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate e Oo M Bo Se duy CO U DEM SIGN BURS Define input signal as burst signal DEM SIGN PATT ON U Programming Examples Enable pattern search DEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Query the names of all defined patterns assigned to the current standard DEM SEAR SYNC SEL EDGE TSC CUST DEM STAN SYNC OFFS 10 Ignore the first 10 symbols of the signal before comparing pattern DEM STAN SYNC OFFS STAT ON D D Select a pattern D D D DEM SEAR SYNC STAT DDEM STAN SAVE C TEMP CustomizedBurstMeas INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until it has finished Retrieving Results TRAC3 DATA 1 Query the trace results of the capture buffer display Results TRAC2 DATA 1 Query the results of the result summary Results Abbreviations The following sections are provided for reference purposes and include detailed infor mation such as formulae and abbreviations A 1 Abbreviations Abbreviations iiir tese PRELATI LE e EP de Predefined Standards and Settings Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data Known Data File Syntax Description IE C
459. level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger the hysteresis refers to the robust width trigger For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 365 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Note For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Signal Capture When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger the drop out time defines the width of the robust width trigger By default itis set to 1 us For external triggers no drop out time is available when using the B2000 option For details see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 364 Coupling If the selected trigger source is IF Power or External CH2 you can configure the
460. ling Pattern Searches on page 196 Detected patterns are indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame Extraction of Result Range The result range can be aligned to a burst a pattern or simply the start of the capture buffer see Reference on page 202 Within this stage the result range is cut from the capture buffer starting at a point that is specified by the user e g the start of a detected burst The VSA application automatically takes into account filter settling times by making the internal buffers sufficiently longer than the selected result range Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the extracted result range and aims at making the correct sym bol decisions Within this stage a coarse synchronization of the carrier frequency off Set the carrier phase the scaling and the timing takes place Furthermore an auto matically selected internal receive filter Rx filter is used in order to remove the inter symbol interference as effectively as possible The outputs of this stage are the coarsely synchronized measurement signal and the symbol decisions bits The symbol decisions are later used for the Pattern Symbol Check stage and for the Ref erence Signal Generation stage User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 99 441 Overview of the Demodulation Process Pattern
461. ll Off 0 35 To define the settings for the R amp S SMW200A 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm Press the DIAGRAM key Select the Baseband A block Select Custom Digital Mod noo mc o m In the General tab define the following settings Custom Digital Modulation Set acc to standard User ament o i Power Ramp Control Off Cosine 1 00sym Fig 9 2 R amp S SMW200A Custom Digital Modulation Dialog a Toggle the State to On b Enter the Symbol Rate 7 MHz Set the Coding to Off 8 In the Modulation tab select Modulation Type PSK gt QPSK 9 In the Filter tab select the Filter Root Cosine 10 Press the RF ON OFF key to switch the RF transmission on 9 2 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement It starts with step by step instructions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Frequency 1 GHz Ref Level 4 dBm Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 1 MHz Tx Filter Root Raised Cosine with Alpha BT 0 35 To define the settings on the R amp S FSW 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 3 Press the AMPT key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This
462. ll active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix lt n gt always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect page 305 LAYU ADD WINDOW Z 2 2 ninine 423 t ree 424 2 2 eo occa 425 LAYout REMOVE WINDOW 425 LAYout REPLass WINDOW ss e Poen ene npn 426 LAYOUES PLT T 426 LAY Our WINDOWS ADD 428 lt gt 1 428 LA Y OUEWINBOWSBSIREMONWVG ctore
463. lloscope TCPip on page 347 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC LEDS Result GREEN Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip Address Defines the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW via LAN Note The IP address is maintained after a PRESET and is transferred between appli cations Parameters Address computer name or IP address Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP 192 0 2 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP FSW43 12345 Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name page 162 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice Queries whether the connected instrument is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 For details see the 2 GHz bandwidth extension basics chapter in the R amp S FSW Analyzer Input User Manual Configuring VSA Return values lt State gt ON 1 Instrument is supported OFF 0 Instrument is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VDEV Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware Queries whether the firmware on the connected oscilloscope is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option Return values lt State gt ON 1 Firmware is supported OFF 0 Firmware is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VFIR Usage Query only TRIGger SEQuence O
464. loading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event 11 6 Performing a Measurement When the VSA application is activated a continuous sweep is performed automatically However you can stop and start a new measurement any time Furthermore you can perform a sequence of measurements using the Sequencer see Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function on page 12 ABORT aone e 394 lt gt 395 396 sn IMMediale 2 ori iocur iri ir eei i ranira 396 eiii dee eraat paid teda beta erp redis E evo Ta Dc RR en Du 397 REFRES iic dr AEE pe ade tre ty epo c Rd RI RR XX 397 INI Tiatesn SEQuencer REFResh ALL oio iet eet 397 INITiatesn SEQuencerABONRL nite corre enean 398 lt gt 5 398 IN Tiate lt n gt SEQuencerMODE dt edad iat 398 SYS SEQUENCE A PD P TOO 399 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system Performi
465. lowing commands determine the general behaviour of the limit line check CALCulate n EIMit MACCuracy DEFault 2 tiic eua cocos aaa eo nee edere s 412 lt gt 1 nita it 412 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks in all windows Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 229 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe lt LimitState gt Limits checks for all evaluations based on modulation accuracy e g Result Summary are enabled or disabled Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits on page 229 11 7 3 2 Defining Limits The following commands are required to define limits for specific results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak STATe
466. lrw Start 0 sym sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 Mag CapBuf i Crw D 1 Q Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 91 l Stop 2 91 NIY 16 03 2010 10 08 34 Date 16 MAR 2010 10 08 34 Reason e The Vector I Q diagram shows the measurement signal after the measurement fil ter and synchronization e The Constellation diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed In case the measurement filter does not remove the inter symbol interference the win dows show measurements that are significantly different Problem The Constellation measurement result display has a different num ber of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSW K70 Reason User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 289 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement _ In the FSQ K70 the Constellation measurement displays the symbol instants of the Vector measurement Hence this is a rotated constellation e g for a 1 4 DQPSK 8 points are displayed In the R amp S FSW K70 the Constellation diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr A DQPSK 4 instead
467. ls and the alignment is with reference to the pattern In case the pattern search is switched on and the reference for the alignment is the pattern and not the burst a non detected pattern causes the result range to be positioned at the beginning of the capture buffer Hence if a the burst does not start right at the beginning of the capture buffer you will see a Burst Not Found Message Solution Refer to Message Pattern Not Found on page 281 Switch the pattern search off Choose Burst as the reference for the result range alignment Message Pattern Not Found The Pattern Not Found error message can have several causes The burst search has failed User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 281 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement H H eee If burst and pattern search are active the application looks for patterns only within the found bursts Hence in case the burst search fails the pattern search will also fail Solution Try one of the following Make sure the burst search is successful Deactivate the burst search but keep the pattern search active For more information see Message Burst Not Found on page 279 chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 193 The offset of the pattern within the burst is incorrectly set It is possible to set a pattern offset to speed up the
468. lt gt 465 lt gt 465 lt gt 465 5 lt gt 465 lt gt 1 465 lt gt 465 lt gt 465 Status Reporting System STATUS QUESticnable POWerCONDINON randia 465 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDION 465 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENIt eise 465 STATUS QUESHomable DIOREVEN uade oer n 465 STATus QUEStionable FREQuencyDEVENI 22 2 iiio rotor tere reae rhe 465 STATus QUEStionable LIMitemo EEVENI 2 2 ito poche oer 465 lt gt 465
469. lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo PTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude PTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 467 11 12 Commands for Compatibility STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Commands for Compatibility The following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons with previous R amp S analyzers only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control pro grams CALGulate lt n gt F SK DEViation COMPENSATION is aa aiaa 468 SENSe IDDEMod NORMalize VALue 2 2 eror ine eru 468 SENSe DDEMOd
470. lt type Phase error Definition Formula Result type 44 RMS peak formulae 494 Phase Error Result type entretien 45 Phase shift keying FIL 78 Phase unwrap Unwrap result eee reiten 46 Ports External Mixer Remote control 328 Preamplifier SOWING ci dnce itae eec ee ee 155 171 SOfIKGy De ere ated 155 171 Prefix Patterns pee 198 Preset Bands External Mixer remote control 326 Presetting Channels rti teer rer nere eran 143 Default values 138 188 Probes Microbutton ss Settings eee eet n a i tee Programming examples Burst GSM EDGE signal Continuous QPSK signal External erred Protection RE input mole cen etude ees 320 PSK Differential w83 Error model 110 Mixed Co taret tuf 84 Modulation type 145 Rotating 81 Rotating differential 84 Symbol MAPPING 78 110 Modulationtype u c iir rir t ect energies 145 Symbol mapplilig 90 QPSK COMUNMUOUS Ho esa one 260 Measurement example
471. ly chosen threshold and the rising and falling edges of bursts are identified With the help of the detected edges and some further processing it is possible to decide whether the burst candidates comply with the user settings All bursts must have a length between Min Burst Length Search Tolerance and Max Burst Length Search Tolerance to be accepted See Burst Settings on page 150 and chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 193 for a more detailed description of these parameters gt Min Burst Length Min Gap Length Max Burst Length Fig 4 47 Burst Search parameters You can influence the robustness of the burst search directly by entering the correct minimum gap length minimum burst length and maximum burst length see Burst Set tings on page 150 and Min Gap Length on page 194 Refer to figure 4 47 for an illustration of the three parameters The detected bursts in the capture buffer for the current burst search settings are indi cated by blue lines in the preview area of the Burst Search configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 193 Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym SSS gt SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 101 Overview of the Demodulation Process Power Averaged Calculate Average Filter Length
472. m with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving I Q signals with RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture data using the Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSW VSA application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode data can only be exported to other applications data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e dporm Export reete ete o e exe ute eu edis 236 e Howto Export and Import Data erectis 238 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists For a description of the other functi
473. mand SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove on page 377 Adding patterns to a standard Adds the selected patterns in the list of available patterns All Patterns to the list of assigned patterns Standard Patterns For details see To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 245 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD page 377 Displaying available patterns The All Patterns list contains the patterns available in the VSA application You can assign available patterns to the selected standard edit existing or define new patterns For details on managing standard patterns see chapter 8 2 2 3 How to Manage Pat terns on page 248 The list can be filtered using the following functions Prefix Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that contain the specified prefix Show Compatible Show All Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that are compatible to the selected modulation mode or all pat terns regardless of the selected standard Edit Opens the Edit Pattern dialog box to edit the pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pattern Definition on page 199 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 247 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on 376 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 375 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT
474. mary For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 256 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 412 Set to Default Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault on 412 Current Mean Peak Defines and activates the limits for the currently measured value the mean and the peak value on separate tabs Note that the limits for the current and peak values are always the same For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 256 Limit Value Current Mean Peak Define the limit with which the currently measured mean or peak value is to be com pared A different limit value can be defined for each result type Depending on the modulation type different result types are available Result type Remote command PSK MSK QAM EVM RMS LCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue page 414 EVM Peak LCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue page 414 Phase Err Rms LCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy page 416 Phase Err Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue on page 415 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 415 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURre
475. mbalance Not for BPSK GIMBalance Quadrature Error Not for BPSK QERRor Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter ADRoop Power The power of the measured signal MPOWer Table 3 5 Parameters for FSK modulation only Parameter Description SCPI parameter Frequency Error RMS The average RMS and peak frequency error in 96 The FSK DERRor Peak frequency error is thedifference of the measured fre quency and the reference frequency The frequency error is normalized to the estimated FSK deviation FSK Deviation Error The deviation error of FSK modulated signals in Hz The FDERror FSK deviation erroris the difference of the FSK deviation of the measured signal and the FSK referencedeviation you have set FSK Meas Deviation The estimated deviation of FSK modulated signals in Hz FSK MDEViation FSK Ref Deviation The reference deviation you have set in Hz FSK RDEViation Carrier Frequency Drift The mean carrier frequency drift in Hz per symbol FSK CFDRift Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDI EMod STATistic Parameter Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing 4 Measurement Basics 4 1 Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in VSA is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings For information on the basic processing of I Q data in the R amp
476. measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished Programming Examples CALC2 MARK FUNC STAT EVM AVG CALC LIM MACC EVM RCUR Query the value and check the limit for the EVM RMS value in the result summary for the current evaluation range Result CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT EVM PAVG CALC LIM MACC EVM PPE Query the value and check the limit for the largest error vector magnitude in the measurement Result CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT CFER AVG CALC LIM MACC CFER MEAN Query the value and check the limit for the mean carrier frequency offset in the result summary for the current evaluation range Result df Storing trace data to a file FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace export file FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data not raw I Q data DISP WIND1 TRAC2 X STAR Query the first value of the x axis for the current result range x values are not exported with trace data Result MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 Measurement signal Save the measurement signal values trace 1 in window 4 to an ascii file Results MMEM STOR4 TRAC 2 Reference signal Save the reference signal values trace 2 in window 4 to an ascii file Results MMEM STOR2 TRAC 1 Result Summary Save the result summary values window 2 for the current result range to an ascii file Results
477. ming Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ NCO For more information the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input Stale E 158 Jogos P A 158 hioraeonisiii Me 159 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband 159 E A 160 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 322 Mode Defines the format of the input signal Input Output and Frontend Settings For more information on data processing modes see the R amp S FSW 1 0 Analyzer and Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF 1 The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without do
478. mmand can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 Configuring VSA This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Type gt string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 332 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt PortType gt 213 RST 2 Example CORR CV
479. mmand determines the number of displayed symbols result length Setting parameters lt ResultLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 64000 RST 800 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Result Length on page 202 Configuring VSA 11 5 8 Demodulation Settings During demodulation of the vector signal some undesired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroni zation process Manual configuration of the demodulation process is described in chapter 5 9 Demod ulation Settings on page 203 5 MODE cues vaveddceay 380 I SENSe uDDEModIEGALc OF FSG ine oor are dte aate a ieaiaia eva 381 SENS amp IDBEMod EPIater AUTO ciii ito rideo eade eee Esai Do ep sep 381 SENSeJDDEMod EPRale VALue 2 382 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer 382 SENSe DDEMed EQUalizerLORD ruta e nna 383 BENSE DDEMod EQUalizer MODE ioo cic cred nena derer ere dede 383 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RE SGi correr nott ix espe e terne 384 SENSe DDEMed EQUaliz amp r SAVE
480. mmand examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the par
481. mmand starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 399 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Performing a Measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 399 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after
482. mp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Magnitude Relative MAGNitude Phase Wrap PHASe Phase Unwrap UPHase Frequency Absolute FREQuency Frequency Relative FREQuency Real Imag RIMag Eye Diagram Real 1 IEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q QEYE Eye Diagram Frequency FEYE Constellation CONS Constellation Rotated RCON Result Types VSA Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter Source Vector I Q COMP Constellation Frequency CONF Vector Frequency COVF Symbols Binary Octal E Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM MAGNItude Real Imag RIMag Vector I Q COMP Modulation Errors Magnitude Error MAGNItude Phase Error PHASe Frequency Error Absolute FREQuency Frequency Error Relative FREQuency Modulation Accuracy Bit Error Rate BERate Result Summary RSUM Equalizer Impulse Response Magnitude MAGNItude Impulse Response Phase UPHase Impulse Response Real Image RIMag Frequency Response Magnitude MAGNitude Frequency Response Phase UPHase Frequency Response Group Delay GDELay Channel Frquency Response Magni MAGNitude tude Channel Frequency Response Group GDELay Delay Multi Source Spectrum Real Imag Capture buffer RIMag query only Error Spectrum Real Imag Measurement RIMag query only Error For details on selecting the data source and result types for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Display and Window C
483. n Fig 4 1 Block diagram of bandwidth relevant filters for vector signal analysis e After the IF Filter only for RF input operation bandwidth 40 MHz e After the digital hardware section The phase and amplitude distortions of the IF filter have been compensated for Usually the I Q data has a usable bandwidth of about 0 8 sample rate For details refer to chapter 4 1 1 Bandwidth on page 60 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing The data s sample rate and bandwidth are automatically adjusted to the set symbol rate For most modulated signals even the smallest allowed value for the sample rate leads to a sufficient data bandwidth The whole spectrum of the input signal is captured but most adjacent channels and interferers are effectively suppressed Only for very wide signals FSK no TX filter used it can be necessary to try higher values for the sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 66 increasing the bandwidth The data delivered to the DSP section has no considerable amplitude or phase distor tion and a suitable bandwidth The Signal Capture dialog box Data Acquisition tab shows the sample rate and the usable bandwidth achieved for the current settings see Usable 1 0 Bandwidth on page 183 e After the optional measurement filter The measurement signal and the reference signal can be filtered by various mea surement filter
484. n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEFault ccce eene 378 gt lt gt 378 gt lt gt 2 379 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset 379 SENSeHDDEMOGTIME et Sc teuer duode ceu er 379 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault lt Alignment gt This command defines where the reference point is to appear in the result range Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt Alignment gt LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The reference point is at the start of the result range CENTer The reference point is in the middle of the result range RIGHt The reference point is displayed at the end of the result range RST LEFT Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Alignment on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet FitOffset This command shifts the display range relative to the reference time by the number of given symbols The resolution is 1 symbol A value gt 0 results in a shift towards the right and a value lt 0 results in a shift towards the left Suf
485. n lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK PTRansition
486. n Offset Definition 114 Compensating Compensation Hs Formula eer erret neta eren ede I Q pattern search see Search detecte nerit 102 1 Q Power Re 187 Trigger level remote 367 IF frequency e M Output remote c REMOTE M IF Power M Trigger level remote IF WIDE OUTPUT 182 Importing VO data 2 ei tms data remote iil M n Impulse response Magnitude result type 38 Phase result type Real Imag result type Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 158 82000 acted hehe 162 ConifiguratiOni eee rre rtr ren 152 Configuration remote 320 Couplitig 154 172 Coupling remote 2 emnes 320 Digital Baseband Interface settings E Overload remote m IE eerte eit Settings iren Source Configuration Source Configuration Softkey Input sample rate ISR 2 25 67 75 Digital VQ
487. n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter Test parameter Formula Error vector EV t MEAS t REF t Error Vector Magnitude EVM EVM t P with the normalization contant C depends on your setting By default C is the mean power of the reference signal c EY err duration of symbol periods Magnitude Mag uras 8 9 Mager Phase Phaseypss t Z MEAS Phase pgp t Z REF Test parameter Formula Frequency 1 d FREQ yeas t Sn M 14 0 Magnitude error MAG _ ERR t MAG yas MAG pur Phase error PHASE _ ERR t PHASE ypas t PHASE t FREQ _ ERR FREQ uras FSK Modulation The trace based results for FSK signals are the same as those available for linear modulation types However as the signal processing for FSK signals is performed on the magnitude and instantaneous frequency the I Q based results first require a recon struction of the reference and measured waveforms as illustrated in Reconstruc tion of the reference and measured waveforms for FSK modulation The dashed outline of the compensate blocks indicate that these operations are optionally de activated depending on the corresponding user settings With respect t
488. n be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available o Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R amp S FSW should behave default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows for IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 394 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto _ 217 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 217 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime 217 Upper Level HySteresis
489. n of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics 1 3 2 1 3 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this
490. n page 359 Y Axis Reference Position Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the position of the Y Axis Reference Value on the y axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the bottom edge 100 refers to the top edge of the screen The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is dis played at the reference position For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 254 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 359 Range per Division Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the value range to be displayed per division Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 lt Range per Division gt Input Output and Frontend Settings Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 359 X Axis Scaling For statistics a histogram is displayed For these diagrams the x axis can be config ured as well Adjust Settings X Axis Scaling Adjusts the x axis scaling to the occurring statistical values Remo
491. n radius ratios y and linear channel for 32APSK Code Rate Modulation coding Y1 spectral efficiency 2 3 3 74 2 84 5 27 3 4 3 99 2 72 4 87 4 5 4 15 2 64 4 64 5 6 4 43 2 54 4 33 8 9 4 49 2 53 4 30 User defined Modulation In addition to the modulation types defined by the standards modulation including symbol mappings can also be defined according to user requirements In this case the mapping is defined and stored in a specific format vam file format and then loa ded to the VSA application Modulation files in vam format can be defined using a mapping wizard mapwiz an auxiliary tool provided by R amp S via Internet free of charge This tool is a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode To download the tool together with a detailed description see http www rohde schwarz com search term mapwiz Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process K70 Kernel Settings IQ Capture Buffer Burst Search optional Q Data Burst Position Demodulation amp DOREM lvl Symbol Decisions ptional Ref Signal Measurement Filtering optional Fine Estimates Demodulation Settings Display Configuration Modulation amp Signal Ref Signal Result Display Fig 4 46 Demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics The fi
492. n search can succeed For more information see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 201 e chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 251 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fail The R amp S FSW performs the pattern search in two stages e Stage 1 involves the generation of an I Q pattern waveform by modulating the pat tern symbol sequence The pattern is then correlated with the measured signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 284 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement At positions where the correlation metric exceeds the I Q Correlation Threshold the pattern is found Stage 2 demodulates the measured signal at the pattern location and the trans mitted symbols are checked for correctness against the pattern symbol sequence In case of a very short pattern i e a pattern length in the order of the inter symbol interference ISI duration a number of issues can arise False positive The pattern is found at positions where the transmitted symbols differ from the pattern symbols Solution Try one of the following Activate Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Increase the Correlation Threshold see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 195 False negative The pattern search misses a position where transmitted symbols match the pat tern symbols Solution Decrease the I Q Correlation Threshold see chapter 5
493. n which you describe the problem and send it to the customer support address for your region as listed in the Internet http www rohde schwarz com en service support customer support 107711 html 11 11 1 Introduction Remote Commands for VSA The following commands are required to perform measurements in VSA in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to VSA are described here 6 luere mE 296 e Como o roter eb rude eeu entrer uu 301 e Activating Vector Signal 301 e Digital Stamndatis u uc tir ertt tls cedri tt td n t aae 305 E 308 Performing MSsasureimblb 3 e rte PR rere 394 M TE 400 e Configuring the Result DISD AY tert td eie tette 422 e Retri
494. n window 2 Usage Event LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table LAY out WINDow lt n gt TYPe Queries the window type of the window specified by the index lt n gt For a list of possi ble window types see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Example LAY WIND2 TYPE Response MACC Modulation accuracy Usage Query only 11 8 3 VSA Window Configuration For each window you can select a different evaluation method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further window settings are available for some result types Manual configuration of VSA windows is described in chapter 6 5 1 Window Configu ration on page 231 Useful commands for configuring the window described elsewhere LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Configuring the Result Display Remote commands exclusive to configuring VSA windows C
495. nal analysis Details concerning the calculation of individual parameters can be found in chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 110 and chapter A 6 For mulae on page 491 Table 3 4 Parameters for PSK QAM and MSK modulation Parameter Description SCPI Parameter EVM RMS Peak Error Vector Magnitude normalized to mean reference EVM power by default see Normalize EVM to on page 209 MER RMS Peak Modulation Error Ratio SNR Phase Error RMS The phase difference between the measurement vector and PERR Peak the reference vector User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 57 Common Parameters in VSA Parameter Description SCPI Parameter Magnitude Error The average RMS and peak magnitude error in The MERRor RMS Peak magnitude error is the difference of the measured magnitude to the magnitude of the reference signal The magnitude error is normalized to the mean magnitude of the reference signal Carrier Frequency The mean carrier frequency offset in Hz CFERror Error Symbol Rate Error Difference between the currently measured symbol rate and SRER the defined symbol rate in ppm Only for PSK QAM or UserQAM modulation and only if compensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation on page 204 Rho RHO Offset Offset in the original input OOFFset I Q Imbalance Not for BPSK IQIMbalance Gain I
496. nalog MEAS IQ Meas Filter Filter Filter Signal Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 51 General processing in the modulation and demodulation stages An equalizer filter with a reverse frequency response characteristic is able to compen sate less distorted frequency responses in order to improve the modulation analysis results see figure 4 52 Analyzer Meas Demodulation TX E Analog N m MEAS b IQ Meas Filter Filter Filter Signal Compensation Function Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 52 Compensation of the transfer function s error by inserting an equalizer in the receive path For small distortions the reference signal can be determined correctly without pre equalization The equalizer can be calculated by comparing the reference signal and the measured signal and is only applied to the measured signal This is referred to as normal equalizer mode Note that the resulting equalizer function is not simply the inverted distortion function For more complex distortions the reference signal might not be determined correctly due to wrong symbol decisions Despite the resulting imperfect equalizer calculation the estimated equalizer is often good enough to improve the reference signal creation in the succeeding sweep Thus the new equalizer is improved successively This pro cessing mode of the equalizer is called tracking mode After only few sweeps the results are sufficiently accurate and the learning ph
497. nce or adjacent channels occur within the demodula tion bandwidth The Sample rate parameter should be set to a low value see Sam ple Rate on page 182 Typical communication systems demand special receive or measurement filters e g root raised cosine receive filter or EDGE measurement filter If no such filtering is performed care should be taken that neither interfering signals nor adjacent channels fall within the demodulation bandwidth 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodulation Filters Sample points are required for demodulation in the analyzer where only information of the current symbol and none of neighbouring symbols is present symbol points These points are also called ISI free points ISI intersymbol interference If the trans mitter does not provide an ISI free signal after the transmit filter TX filter this condi tion can be fulfilled by signal specific filtering of the analyzer input signal receive filter or Rx filter If an RRC root raised cosine filter is used in the transmitter an RRC fil ter is also required in the analyzer to obtain ISI free points In many PSK systems RRC filters are used as transmit receive and measurement fil ters To determine the modulation error the measurement signal must be com pared with the corresponding ideal signal For this purpose a reference filter is required which is calculated by the analyzer by convolving the coefficient of the trans mit filter Tx filter and t
498. nces amp Configuration VISA TCPIP localhost Results Analyzed Sequences 33 Modulation PSK Format NORM Order 8 ResultLength 148 Different Sequences 83 Last New Sequence Found 0 ago Throughput 0 72 kSymbols s Store for K70 Run Stop Reset 3 Start a measurement in the VSA application 4 Inthe tool window select Run The tool records the demodulated data sequences The following result information is provided by the tool during recording e Analyzed Sequences number of data sequences analyzed since the tool was started How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements e Different Sequences number of unique sequences detected in the measured data e Last New Sequence Found time that has passed since the most recent unique sequence was detected e Throughput current data processing speed of the tool Note that while the tool is running the R amp S FSW is set to remote mode i e the manual interface is not available As soon as the tool is closed the remote mode is automatically deactivated 5 When all known possible sequences have been detected or when a significantly large amount of time has passed so as to assume no more sequences will be detected stop the tool by selecting Stop 6 e Ifthe results are acceptable select Store for K70 to store a valid xml file with the recorded data sequences on the instrument A file selection dialog box is displayed in
499. ncy drift A carrier frequency drift is modeled as a linear change in the carrier frequency with respect to time The effect of carrier drift on the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is illustrated in figure 4 65 Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation 15 o a Frequency Ref Deviation e Freq Ref Freq Meas 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 65 The reference and distorted instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with a carrier fre quency drift FSK deviation error The FSK deviation error is the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 147 The evidence of a deviation error in the instantaneous fre quency of an FSK signal is demonstrated in figure 4 66 Measurement Ranges Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation Meas Deviation Frequency Ref Deviation Freq Ref Meas 70 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 66 reference measured instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with reference deviation error 4 6 Measurement Ranges The VSA application contains three measurement ranges that need to be set by the user Capture Buffer Length The length of the capture buffer specifies how many data points are captured dur ing a single VSA measurement For example if you want to measure a bursted signal it is recommended that
500. nd the connected device both instruments must be able to process data at this rate the clock rate of the R amp S FSW at the output connector is 142 9 MHz using the Digital enhanced mode data transfer rate of up to 200 Msps is possible Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con nected instrument to the digital input User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or sent to the digital output e Usable I Q Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains unchanged by the digital decimation filter and thus remains undistorted this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Slow measurements When captured data is transferred and further processed with a slower rate than the rate with which the signal was sampled this is referred to as a Slow I Q measurement For example assume an analog signal is sampled by an oscilloscope with a sample rate of 10 GHz This data is stored in a memory temporarily and then transferred to the R amp S FSW via the Digital Interface with a sample rate of 100 Msps Then the input sample rate on the R amp S FSW must be set to 10 GHz so the signal is displayed cor rectly Digital enhanced mode As of firmware version 1 80
501. ndard GSM 8PSK EDGE To define the settings on the R amp S FSW 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 7 GHz R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples 3 Press the AMPT key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal Start the VSA application by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA Press the MEAS key then select the Digital Standards softkey 209 Gr X From the file selection list select the GSM folder and then the file EDGE 8PSK Select Load Predefined settings corresponding to the selected standard are loaded The VSA application should show good measurement results Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 20 4dB Freq 1 0GHz Cap Len 1500 BURST PATTERN 1 Clrw B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance ESTAT ROA WAE AAN Power MN Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw D Symbol Table H Start 0 sym Fig 9 7 Default display configuration for GSM 8PSK EDGE 8 In window 3 you see the currently evaluated burst marked with a green bar To include more bursts in the display you need to increase the capture length a Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Overview softkey b Select Signal Capture C Increase the Capture
502. near average value over several sweeps RPE Peak value for amplitude droop over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of amplitude droop PCTL 95 percentile value of amplitude droop Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL The command queries all results of the result summary as shown on the screen Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Carrier frequency error for current sweep AVG Average carrier frequency error over several sweeps RPE Peak carrier frequency error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency error PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM lt type gt This command queries the results of the error vector magnitude measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters lt type gt Ex
503. ng a Measurement To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single m
504. ng to Digital Standards on page 241 Digital standard settings are available via the Digital Standards button in the Over view or the Digital Standards softkey in the MEAS menu SUA T 140 L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path 140 M dio MO 140 NET 140 L COMMENL eccsescescecccesscccecceceseeacsccaceecsscaceacscesesaesessesecaesacuasscsateatsecaneccaecaeaee 141 L Load Stondaid eniein ecce tendit rette ee tico t c 141 L Save Standard eerte ote Dr ka c aac neca 141 L Delete Staridard ttti tta rnt tk tanen tik kd 141 L Restore Standard 222222 22 tnter tentent ttt teat t 141 Digital Standards Opens file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Digital Standards Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the standards files is C R_S Instr user vsa Standards Not
505. nge to the reference source i e whether the result starts at the beginning of the reference source ends with the reference source or is centered with the reference source 6 Optionally define an offset of the result range to the reference source e g to ignore the first few symbols of the captured data 7 Optionally define the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the ref erence source to change the scaling of the x axis This offset is added to the one defined for the signal description Example Defining the result range In figure 8 2 a result range will be defined for the first 100 symbols of the capture buf fer starting at the second symbol which has the symbol number 1 the capture buffer starts at symbol number 1 the first symbol to be displayed is the second symbol due to the offset 1 1 2 Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Result Range Length Result Length 26 042 us Result Range Alignment Reference Alignment Capture C Burst Pattern Waveform e Left C Center Right Offset sym Symbol Number at Capture Start sym Visualization Fig 8 2 Example Defining the Result Range The result range is indicated by a green bar along the time axis in capture buffer result displays see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 126 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data Once the data has been stored in the capture buffer the results
506. ngs define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal The Signal Capture settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Signal Capture button from the Overview e Select Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu Data 180 deer cnet Pee ted ed 183 SWOGD SOUINOS M 190 5 6 1 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how much and how data is captured from the input signal A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Data Acquisition settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select the Signal Capture button from the Overview Select the Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu R amp S FSW K70 Configuration gt Data Acquisition Trigger Capture Length Auto 8000 0 sym sm 2 083 ms A Sample Rate 4 Symbol Rate 15 36 MHz Maximum Bandwidth Auto Usable I Q Bandwidth 12 288 MHz Swap 1 9 Preview Mag CaptureBuffer 0 sym 8000 sym MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the VSA application in MSRA MSRT mode define t
507. nment DEFault page 378 Offset Defines the offset of the result range to the alignment reference The result of the cur rent setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Note Note the following restrictions to this parameter An offset lt 0 is not possible if you align the result range to the left border of the capture buffer e An offset that moves the pattern outside the result range is not allowed For exam ple if you align the result to the left border of the pattern only offsets lt 0 are allowed Otherwise you would never be able to find the pattern within the result range Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet on page 378 Symbol Number at Reference Start Defines the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment refer ence source burst capture buffer or pattern The result of the current setting is dis played in the visualization area of the dialog box In effect this setting defines an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the signal structure see Offset on page 151 Note When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the offset defined for the signal structure into consideration see Offset on page 151 The Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the pattern offset not the first symbol of the pattern Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt
508. nt VALue on page 415 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 414 Rho CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue on page 416 IQ Offset CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue on page 415 FSK modulation only 6 5 Display and Window Configuration Result type Remote command Freq Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue on page 414 Freq Err Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 414 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 415 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 415 FSK Dev Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 414 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 414 For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 256 Check Current Mean Peak Considers the defined limit value in the limit check if checking is activated For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 256 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe on page 413 Display and Window Configuration The captured data can be evaluated using various different methods wi
509. ntire tet 216 Start Stop values ssh sec code patte 216 Export format rnnt rere enn rens 487 Exporting data nee data remote Softkey n Trace data i tnmen araia as Activating remote control 323 325 Programming example 2 nnne 333 RF oV rfarige e ertt titre der er iEn 329 reiasa 328 External trigger Level remote Eye diagram Frequency result 28 Imagi Q resultitype 29 Real 1 result type esee 30 F Factory settings ISeSIOLIFIg ir a eto ina eR edes 139 File name tren i Est ihre dues 140 Files Format VQ data acetic 505 data binary XML iret ient 509 parameter XML 506 Filter bandwidth Measurement filter Transmit filler reet ntc Filters De ModulatiOl 61 CUSTOMIZED pr 64 Customized creating 64 Customized selecting iren nenne 244 Formulae Rai nme 497 High pass remote 3921 High pass
510. o FSK measurements the optional compensation parameters are FSK Reference deviation Carrier frequency drift Figure 3 Compensate Reference deviation Frequency frer n ee Compensate Frequency Reference Ref deviation Modulator Measured Frequency fugas Q1 P Compensate Frequency Measured iming EE Carrier drift Modulator Carrier offset i Compensate Auras Timing Gain Fig 1 1 Reconstruction of the reference and measured I Q waveforms for FSK modulation Note that a reference deviation error is corrected in the reference frequency trace This ensures that the frequency deviation in the measured frequency trace corresponds to that of the originally measured signal With respect to the I Q reconstruction the mea sured magnitude is timing compensated using the timing offset estimated from the measured instantaneous frequency This ensures that the measured magnitude and frequency remain synchronized in the reconstructed waveform A 6 2 Result Summary Evaluations The evaluations for the result summary take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 This value can be one of the following e 1 only the symbol instant contributes to the result e 2 two samples per symbol instant contribute to the result required for offset QPSK e the Sample rate defined for
511. o your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file How to Perform VSA According to Digital 241 e How to Perform Customized VSA 243 e Howto Analyze the Measured 252 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards In order to perform vector signal analysis as specified in digital standards various pre defined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA option In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measure ments For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 478 This section provides instructions for the following tasks To perform a measurement according to a standard on page 241 Toload predefined settings files on page 242 e To store settings as a standard file on page 242 To delete standard files on page 242 Torestore standard files on page 243 To perform a measurement according to a standard 1 Press the MODE key and select the VSA application 2 Press the MEAS key and select the Digital Standards softkey 3 Select the required settings file and then Load see To load predefined settings files on page 242 The instrument is adjusted to th
512. oarse Synchronization Fine Synchronization Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref Nonmnalize EVI 9 2 Dent edere aad D e 209 210 Estimation 210 eer eson Ec 211 Fine Synchronization cerier icm ded ed d d da 211 I SER S ecoute nt dep epe ASR 212 OMSET E YM M M M 212 Normalize EVM to Normalizes the EVM to the specified power value This setting is not available for MSK or FSK modulation e Max Ref Power Maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants E a User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 209 Demodulation Settings Mean Ref Power mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants Mean Constellation Power Mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants Constellation Power The maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE on page 380 Optimization Determines the method used to calculate the result parameters The required method depends on the used standard and is set according to the selected standard by default Minimize RMS Optimizes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is mini Error mal Minimize Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal EVM Rem
513. oce e Result type via Result type transformation 231 Window title bar information 14 Windows Adding remote Closing remote Configuring Layout remote T Maximizing Femote 2 erectae 422 Querying remote 424 425 Replacing remote cn et etr ro Pert an 426 Splitting remote 422 SMOLE n retrahere teras 423 X X axis 178 Rang 178 Reference position Reference value ee iraani 175 Scaling default 178 Scaling automatically n 178 Sealing auto rape rct Cte ces 177 218 Scaling auto all windows UNITS DL X value Marker rM 224 Y Y axis Mix max values 2 a Sean ck Range per division Reference position Reference value i i ie Scaling statistics Scaling auto Scaling auto all windows UNIS rs YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eese 154 Activating Deactivating remote 322 2 Zooming Activating remote 420 Area Multiple mode remote 421 Area remote crest isse
514. of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interfer ence has been removed Note The result display I Q Constellation Rotated displays the rotated constella tion as the FSQ K70 does For details on the Constellation diagram in the R amp S FSW K70 see chapter 3 2 5 Constellation 1 0 on page 25 Table 10 1 Constellation and Vector 1 0 for pi 4 DQPSK modulation Std TETRA_ContinousDownlink SR 18 0 kHz L 255 C Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 5 13 D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref R amp S FSQ K70 R amp S FSW K70 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSW K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSW K70 When generating an MSK FSK reference signal the R amp S FSQ K70 automatically replaces the Dirac pulses generated by the frequency mapper with square pulses with the length of one symbol In the R amp S FSW K70 however this replacement is part of the transmit filter routine Thus the R amp S FSQ and the R amp S FSW require different transmit filters for measuring the same FSK MSK signal Example e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was NONE you need to choose Rec tangular as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSW e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was GAUSS you need to choose as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSW
515. oftkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active only External CH2 is supported For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Signal Capture External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note in VSA trigger output is not supported thus the connector is always configured for input Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 367 External CH2 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the CH2 input connector on the oscillo scope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level This signal source is only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active see chapter 5 5 1 6 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 on page 161 For details see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Note Since the external trigger uses a second channel on the oscilloscope the maxi mum memory size and thus record length available for the input channel 1 is reduced by half For details see the oscilloscope s data sheet
516. omplex source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the dis play points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 are drawn and connected The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for I Q input Available for source types e Capture Buffer Meas amp Ref Signal Error Vector Capture buffer display Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Vector I Q result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 132 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 24 Result display for Vector Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM COMP to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 441 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA Depending on the modulation type you are using different signal parameters are deter mined during vector sig
517. on Search Tolerance 14 769 us Minimum Gap Length 3 692 us Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym 194 NEC 194 mew REPRE 194 L Search iri oaii iore eri 194 L Min Gap 194 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 193 Burst and Pattern Configuration Enabling Burst Searches Enables or disables burst searches If Auto is selected burst search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a bursted signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Modu lation amp Signal Description dialog box see Signal Type on page 149 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO on page 371 Measuring only if burst was found If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid burst has been found When measuring bursted signals that are averaged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous mea surements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE on page 371 Burst Configuration The conditions under which a burst is detected in the captured data can be configured either manually or automatically according to the defined signal structure settings see
518. on data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 5 6 3 Signal Capture In MSRT mode the offset may be negative if a pretrigger time is defined Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 418 MSRT mode SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet on page 419 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated They are configured via the SWEEP key Continuous Sweep RUN CONT raesent testen 190 single Sweep RUN SINGLE cer Een nies e aeter rg ete ore e eee 190 Continue Single SWEEP E 191 Refresh non Multistandard 191 OUI n 191 Select Resun FRAG D 192 PROTOS i 192 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the measurement and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates tha
519. on page 16 See Measurement amp Reference Signal on page 16 See Symbols on page 17 See Error Vector on page 17 See Modulation Errors on page 17 See Modulation Accuracy on page 18 See Equalizer on page 18 See Multi Source on page 19 See Signal Source on page 231 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for VSA application Parameter value Data source default result display CBUFfer Capture buffer Magnitude absolute MEAS Meas amp Ref Magnitude relative REF EQualizer Equalizer EVECtor Error vector EVM MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy Result Summary MCOMbination Multi Source Spec MERRor Modulation Errors Magnitude error SYMB Symbols Hexadecimal LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax Configuring the Result Display lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result U
520. onfiguration on page 230 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 3 2 1 Result Types in VSA Emon Rate 21544 c 21 Channel Frequency Response Group 23 Channel Frequency Response 24 Gonstellatioh IF IemQu ie 24 Constellation occae T 25 Constellation VQ Rotated 26 Error Vector Magnitude 2 0 1 1 10 0 1 27 Eye Diagram 28 Eye 88 09 alee 29 Eye Diagram Real D States e Dern reri bn pande 30 30 FREQUENCY 32 Frequency Error APSO e 33 Frequency Error Relative ieeieeseit idee ese krass aa gk ee Lada acne kn 34 Frequency Response Group Delay reete inrer eee eaae sedan 35 Frequency Response 2 2 2 2 21 012 41 4 16 101 36 Frequency Response 37 Impulse Response se cetur rt RE tear te a E Redi a Re deed o 38 Impulse Response n corte E eee Yea COR YT
521. onics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 154 11 5 2 2 Configuring VSA INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 154 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for I Q Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 154 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface For details on 1 0 input see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User
522. ons in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual Import Export Functions sop MEER 237 L Export Trace to ASCII 237 Li 1 237 Import Provides functions to import data Import Import Opens file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process data such as the Analyzer or optional applications Note that the data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual import is not available in MSRA MSRT mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 456 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Note that only the trace data in the currently displayed result range of the capture buf fer is exported For the Magnitude Absolute Overview result display the trace contains a maximum of 25 000 points Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is res
523. ons of the display which determines the total range to be displayed on the x axis 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt Scale Config gt Reference Value 3 Enter a reference value on the x axis in the current unit 4 Define the range to be displayed per division total range 10 The x axis is adapted so that it displays the defined range with the reference value at the specified position R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis Example If you want to analyze the probabilities of occurrence for errors greater than 95 enter the reference value 95 Start 95 0 Stop 100 0 Fig 8 4 Defining the x axis scaling using a reference point To define the x axis scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt XScale Config gt Auto Scale The x axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynamically To define the y axis range manually With this method you define the upper and lower limits of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 If the y axis has logarithmic scale the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Min Value 3 Enter the lower limit in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Max Value 5 Enter the upper limit in th
524. op gt VALue lt LeftDisp gt Defines the start and stop values for the evaluation range see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN startstop STATe on page 390 Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 1 start value 2 stop value Setting parameters lt LeftDisp gt numeric value Range 0 to 1000000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 216 11 5 11 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings Manual execution of automatic adjustment functions is described in chapter 5 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 216 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO 392 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL eese 392 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURatioh 2 2 ccrte reete tat eere dua sor 392 2 1 1 2 1 444 66 392 Configuring VSA SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer eese enne 393 393 SENSe JADJust CONFig tie TEIG cuoi
525. option is activated the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output is automatically deactivated It is not reactivated when the B2000 option is switched off Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe on page 345 TCPIP Address or Computer name When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the entire measurement via the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector and an oscilloscope as well as both instruments are controlled by the R amp S FSW Thus the instruments must be connected via LAN and the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope must be defined on the R amp S FSW For tips on how to determine the computer name or TCPIP address see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual or the oscilloscope s user documentation By default the TCPIP address is expected To enter the computer name toggle the 123 button to ABC As soon as a name or address is entered the R amp S FSW attempts to establish a con nection to the oscilloscope If it is detected the oscilloscope s identity string is queried and displayed in the dialog box The alignment status is also displayed see Align ment on page 163 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 162 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Note The IP address computer name is maintained after a PRESET and is transfer red between applications Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 347 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice
526. or details on digital output see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Remote command OUTPut DIQ on page 338 Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the optional Digital Baseband Inter face The following information is displayed Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the con nected instrument Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 ee O Aea kj A o o008 O MA i mb 2222 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 167 5 5 4 Input Output and Frontend Settings Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 338 Connected Instrument Displays information on the instrument connected to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 338 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Select the Frequency tab in the Input S
527. or statistical result displays For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Setting parameters lt RVal gt numeric value Reference value for the x axis Manual operation See X Axis Reference Value on page 178 Configuring VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Range per Division on page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Y Axis Reference Position on page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe
528. ore information on measurement filters refer to chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Fil ters on page 62 Useful commands for defining measurement filters described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on page 310 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe on page 310 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to configuring measurement filters SENSEI DDEMod MFILGRALP iir tete e retten 389 iia anette de cas baled 389 5 255526 nu aa aa aa a 389 SENS amp IDDEModg MFIEtet S TATE arua abeant rent nbn naL oye dna here tu rhet bbs 389 SENSe JDDEMGGd MFIkter USER tn er ea er e nuca 390 SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command sets the alpha value of the measurement filter Setting parameters MeasFiltAlphaBT numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 214 SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO lt MeasFilterAuto gt If this command is set to ON the measurement filter is defined automatically depend ing on the transmit filter see SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on 315 Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST ON Manual operation See Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on pag
529. ote Commands for VSA we CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe lt LimitState gt This command switches the limit check for the selected result type and limit type on or off Suffix lt ResultType gt CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FERRor Frequency error FSK only FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset Q Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho lt LimitType gt For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS curren
530. ote command SENSe DDEMod OPTimization on page 387 Estimation Points Sym During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol For more information on estimation points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 131 You can set the estimation points manually or let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use If automatic mode is enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depend ing on the modulation type Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 FSK MSK Capture Oversampling For manual mode the following settings are available 1 the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSK Demodulation Settings Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture set tings is used see Sample Rate on page 182 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally Remote command SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO page 381 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue on 382 Coarse Synchronization It is not only possible to check whether the pattern is part of the signal but also to use the pattern for synchronization in o
531. ou require a test transmit ter to emulate a DUT For Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals the test transmitter needs to be GSM compatible Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMW200A with the RF input of the R amp S FSW 9 2 9 2 1 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal RF Output osar RF Input Signal and Spectrum Analyzer FSW Fig 9 1 Connection to a test transmitter for example R amp S SMW200A Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal In this measurement example a continuous QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying signal will be measured and evaluated QPSK is used in several standards such as DVB S2 APCO25 WCDMA CDMA2000 etc For the description characterization of a continuous QPSK signal the following parameters are the most important Carrier Frequency Level e Symbol Rate e Transmit Filter Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMW200A If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user manual of the R amp S SMW200A which be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smw200A html Frequency 1 GHz Level 0 dBm Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 1 Msym s Filter Root Raised Cosine with Ro
532. ough zero in the plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero has in fact limited significance but still influences the result of the current fre quency measurement R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 14 1Freq Error Abs 349 sym Fig 3 10 Result display Frequency Error Absolute Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 441 Frequency Error Relative Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals FREQ _ERR t FREQmras t with and Tp the duration of one sampling period at sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 SSS gt
533. ouple Windows on page 225 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 224 See Marker Type on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See X value on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all
534. pattern Only switch off the burst search if absolutely necessary If you need to switch it off align your Result Range to the pattern make sure it does not exceed the burst ramps and choose Continuous Signal as the Signal Type in the Signal Descrip tion dialog For more information see e chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 98 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pattern This message can only occur if the coarse synchronization is data aided i e is based on a known pattern In case the pattern is very short pattern based coarse synchroni zation might be unstable If demodulation is stable e g you get a reasonable EVM there is no need to change anything Otherwise you have two options e Switch to the non pattern based mode by setting the parameter Coarse Synchro nization Data ru E INN S User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 286 Frequently Asked Questions see Coarse Synchronization on page 211 e f possible use a longer pattern For more information see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 98 Message Result Ranges Overlap This message does not indicate an error It is merely displayed to inform you that the defined result ranges in the capture buffer overlap Thus some captured data is evalu ated more than once For example the same peak value may be listed several times if it is included in several result ranges and averaging is performed on partially dupl
535. ple 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern lt PatternedSignal gt This command specifies whether the signal contains a pattern or not Setting parameters PatternedSignal 110 5 0 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See on 150 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue lt SignalType gt This command specifies whether the signal is bursted or continuous Setting parameters lt SignalType gt CONTinuous BURSted RST CONTinuous Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Signal Type on page 149 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe lt PattOffsState gt This command de activates the pattern offset Setting parameters lt PattOffsState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Offset on page 151 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue lt PatternOffset gt This command defines a number of symbols which are ignored before the comparison with the pattern starts Setting parameters lt PatternOffset gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 1
536. plication The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the VSA Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 3 Configuration Overview on page 142 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 48 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following
537. pter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Symbol Rate on page 147 SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa Alpha This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters Alpha numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 148 See Alpha BT on page 214 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME Name This command selects a transmit filter and automatically switches it on For more information on transmit filters refer to chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 485 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt Name gt string Name of the Transmit filter an overview of available transmit fil ters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 485 Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 Manual operation See Transmit Filter on page 148 See Load User Filter on page 148 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe lt TXFilterState gt Use this command to switch the transmit filter off To switch a transmit filter on use the 5 5 DDEMod TFILter NAME command Setting parameters lt TXFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF
538. put Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box input Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Digital 1Q Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Auto Manual Full Scale Level 10 0 dBm IQR 100 101165 Digital IQ OUT 10 MHz 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Digital VO Input Sale eo des nite oat Mu Pet eee ka aee s RR 156 Input Sample nt rte erre ec ren ee te rhe re atr e ERR Ud 156 SVC 157 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale 2 157 Connected ruga 157 MIGON 157 Digital Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 322 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a gene
539. r 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 321 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW Input Output and Frontend Settings An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available Q Analyzer and thus in all applications MSRA operating mode Real Time and thus in all applications in MSRT operating mode Multi Carrier Group Dela
540. r 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 208 Note When a standard is loaded the use of a Known Data file is automatically deacti vated Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe on page 385 Load Data File If Known Data is activated this function displays a file selection dialog box to select the xml file that contains the known data Once a file has been selected any additional information provided by the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME on page 386 5 5 Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup fI 152 dele MER Pas 165 e Digital Output 85 22244 40 1 tnnt 166 e Seit ce erdt cor ete ee e dta endete eere ect 168 e Amplitude and Vertical Axis 169 5 5 1 Input Settings Input settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box 5 5 1 1 Input Output and Frontend Settings The DigiConf softkey is described in chapter 5 5 1 3 Digital Input Settings on page 156 Radio Frequency
541. r Manual e Default Settings for Vector Signal 4 138 e Configuration According to Digital 139 e camur rr tre dt ber Raines er de dto td 142 LEE 1 M 144 e Input Output and Frontend 8 2 2 0000111 152 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis P 180 e Burstand Patten Configuratio ERR 192 e Result Range 201 Demodulation Songs tiene ener ee edo 203 e Measurement Filter Settings iiie te EUER 213 Evaluation Range Configuration tree heces qid 215 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eese 216 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis When you switch the application of a measurement channel to VSA the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application center frequency and frequency offset reference level and reference level offset attenuation signal source and digital I Q input settings input coupling e YIG filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can
542. r Manual 1173 9292 02 14 293 Obtaining Technical Support SENSe1l SWEep COUNt 0 Set the Statistic Count to Auto mode INITiatel IMMediate Do single sweep SENSe1 SWEep COUNt CURRent Query the number of demodulated bursts within the capture buffer For n 1 NumberOfBursts SENSe1 DDEMod SEARCh MBURSt CALC n TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in window D End Step through all bursts and query the demodulated symbols Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong Answer For an FSK modulated signal the signal processing differs to an PSK QAM MSK modulated signal The estimation model does not minimize the EVM but the error of the instantaneous frequency see chapter 4 5 2 1 Error Model on page 122 There fore the measurement value that corresponds to the EVM value for FSK is the the Fre quency Error Absolute Relative Source Type Modulation Error Result Type Fre quency Error Absolute Relative 10 4 Obtaining Technical Support If problems occur the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy Error messages are described in chapter 10 2 Explanation of Error Messages on page 278 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R amp S FSW We will find solutions more quickly and effi
543. r dd nun 466 466 5 5 lt lt gt 467 lt gt 1 1 44444 467 lt gt 467 lt gt 467 lt gt 467 lt gt 467 lt gt 1 467 5 lt gt 467 lt gt 467 5 5
544. r effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 189 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only In MSRT operating mode only the MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRT applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRT applica tions For the VSA application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 3 Signal Capture on page 360 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for vector signal analysis Useful commands related to MSRT mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 397 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 397 Remote commands exclusive to MSRT applications The following commands are only available for MSRT application channels GALOul
545. r filter e b select a suitable measurement filter from the list R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Basics Transferring filter files to the R amp S FSW You can transfer the va filter files to the R amp S FSW using a USB memory device 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and I Q Bandwidth The Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings determines how many symbols are captured and demodulated during a certain measurement time However for each symbol more than one sample may be captured so that the sample rate may be higher than the symbol rate The Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acquisition settings defines the number of samples to capture per symbol not to be confused with the estimation points per symbol or display points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 131 The resulting sample rate depending on the Sym bol Rate is indicated behind the parameter The number of samples to capture per symbol was referred to as the Capture Over sampling value in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers The resulting sample rate also referred to as the user or output sample rate is the rate at which the data is demodulated and analyzed The sample rate also affects the demodulation measurement bandwidth If the bandwidth is too narrow the signal is not displayed completely If the bandwidth is too wide interference from outside the actual signal to be meas
546. r gt CAPTure STATistics STATistics Returns the number of result ranges that have been evaluated CAPTure Returns the number of used capture buffers evaluated RST STATistics Configuring Bursts and Patterns The burst and pattern search settings can be configured and new patterns can be defined Manual configuration of bursts and patterns is described in chapter 5 7 Burst and Pat tern Configuration on page 192 BUNS ES SARC iieri uiv 370 e Pattern 8 0000000 372 PARGIS iei 374 Burst Search The burst search commands define when a burst is detected in the analyzed signal ISENS amp IDDEMoad SEARGRB RSEAU EQ scidit ree tta ae e pe aae heu p eh 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt CONFigure AUTO sisse nennen 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum eese 371 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMoc SEARchBURSEMODE etna uo ea ne Ie 371 5 372 5 1 11 02 02001 1101110 372 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO lt AutoBurstSearch gt Th
547. r several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of phase errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the Quadratur error measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt quadrature error for current sweep AVG Average quadrature error over several sweeps RPE Peak quadrature error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of quadrature error PCTL 95 percentile value of quadrature error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO lt type gt This command queries the results of the Rho factor measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Rho factor for current sweep AVG Average rho factor over several sweeps RPE Peak rho factor over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of rho factor PCTL 95 percentile value of rho factor Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR lt type gt This command queries the results of the SNR error measurement performed for digital demodulation Retrieving Results Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt RMS SNR value of display points of current sweep AVG Aver
548. r the statistical distribution Setting parameters lt StatNofColumns gt numeric value Range 2 to 1024 RST 101 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Quantize on page 178 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Configuring VSA Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 177 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 5 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 177 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe Unit This command selects the global unit for phase results Setting parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180 CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME Unit This command selects the uni
549. racterize the accuracy of modulation The default result type is Result Summary The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green 1 Result Summary Current EVM RMS ai Peak MER RMS 18 00 Peak 0 28 Phase Error RMS 6 62 Peak 44 67 Magnitude Error RMS Peak 48 74 Carrier Frequency Error 201 04 Rho 0 984 404 I Q Offset 40 15 170 Imbalance 57 56 Gain Imbalance 0 01 Quadrature Error 0 14 Amplitude Droop 0 000 53 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 423 Equalizer Filter characteristics of the equalizer used to compensate for channel distortion and parameters of the distortion itself The following result types are available chapter 3 2 18 Impulse Response Magnitude on page 38 chapter 3 2 19 Impulse Response Phase on page 39 chapter 3 2 20 Impulse Response Real Imag on page 39 chapter 3 2 16 Frequency Response Magnitude on page 36 chapter 3 2 17 Frequency Response Phase on page 37 chapter 3 2 15 Frequency Response Group
550. rator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device Input Output and Frontend Settings The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 338 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 338 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 337 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 337 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 337 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 337 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 335 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This function i
551. rder to obtain the correct reference signal For details on synchronization see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 98 If Auto mode is selected the detected data is used In manual mode you can select one of the following settings Data Default the detected data is used for synchronization i e unknown symbols Use this setting if no pattern is available or if the pattern is short or does not have suitable synchronization properties e g a pattern that consists of only one repeated symbol Pattern Known symbols from a defined pattern are used for synchronization Depending on the signal using the pattern can speed up your mea surement considerably and make it more robust against high carrier frequency offsets Make sure that the pattern is suitable for synchronization e g a GSM pattern Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO on page 388 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe on page 388 Fine Synchronization In addition to the coarse synchronization used for symbol decisions a fine synchroni zation is available to calculate various results from the reference signal e g the EVM However when the signal is known to have a poor transmission quality or has a high noise level false symbol decisions are more frequent which may cause spikes in the EVM results To improve these calculations the reference signal can be estimated from a smaller area th
552. red signal model for PSK QAM and MSK modulation is shown in fig ure 4 54 and can be expressed as MEAS t REF j 60 REF C c e emoe where REF t and REF t the and quadrature component of the reference signal gi and the effects of the gain imbalance the effects of an offset 9 the quadrature error a the amplitude droop Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors fo the carrier frequency offset the carrier phase offset C the timing offset n t a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power 4 5 1 2 Estimation The VSA application includes two synchronization stages The first stage has already been described in the context of the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions block see chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 103 The second stage is realized within the Synchronization block Here the measure ment signal is matched to the reference signal by minimizing the mean square of the error vector magnitude This is done by selecting the optimum parameter vector 5 arg 8 The minimization takes place at the sample instants specified by the Estimation Points Sym parameter i e t n Tg with Tg the sampling period used for estimation Subsequently the measurement signal is corrected with the determined parameter vector Note that with a subset of the parameters you
553. reference and per div Ref Value Ref Value 10 0 dBm Ref Position Ref Position Per Division Per Division 10 0 dB 75 3 Stat Mag CaptureBuffer Fig 5 2 Scaling settings for statistical evaluation For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 254 A visualization of the diagram scaling with the current settings is displayed at the right side of the dialog box Auto Scale Once Auto Scale WindOW i en 177 Defining Min and Max Valugs 177 Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions eiecti 177 L Y Axis Reference ValUC c ccccccssessscsesescscecscsseesesesescecscseseseesesestesssesseseenenees 177 L Y Axis Reference Position 177 L Range per DISON MN 177 AARS SCI 178 L Adjust Settings 178 L Pi eM CONDE eec NE RE 178 Loo tea E A 178 L X Axis Reference 178 L X Axis Reference Position titt nec cr ta tetra 178 BEC A o METRE QE 178 Input Output and Frontend Settings Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current mea surement results only once not dynam
554. remote 442 Polar Diagrams remote 441 22 1 cro reet ene 221 Result Summary remote 441 Retrieving data remote 436 Selecting n 220 Settings remote control Settings predefined teer c rettet denen 221 Symbols remote 441 Troubleshooting 287 Transmit filter 25 561 Alpha BT 148 iiie e od e tatit 485 doce ce 148 User defined c a reto Pent des oen epe to eae 148 Using as measurement filter 214 Trigger EE 183 DropzoUt rere naa 188 External niinc tic 367 189 188 od sss Reg ra io usa crit eR osa 188 COMMON 363 SNOPES 189 367 Trigger GV l eai 188 External trigger remote 366 VQ Power remote i nint abren 367 IF Power remote neenon Dre reete cotes 366 Trigger SOUCO eere etico eet iet a D ORDRE 185 BB hisses
555. rent column in the Result Sum mary in the eye diagram and in the symbol table Note Generally all Clear Write traces and the are affected by this selection 9 2 5 Averaging Several Evaluations By default all measurement windows are displayed with a single trace which is the Clear Write trace This trace displays the result of the current evaluation i e the high lighted blue area from the example in chapter 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer on page 265 However for most real world measurement tasks you need to obtain a result that is averaged over a certain number of evaluations or a worst case result of a certain number of evaluations This section explains how to achieve this To evaluate EVM vs Time 1 Configure window 1 such that it displays the EVM versus time measurement Source Error Vector Result Type EVM see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Dis play Configuration on page 264 Select the window to set the focus on it 2 To display the trace averaged over several measurements or the maximum hold trace over several measurements press the TRACE key 3 Add further traces by pressing the TRACE key and then either using the Trace 2 3 or the Trace Config softkeys Set the second trace to Average and the third trace to Max Hold Note that the configured traces appear in the window title mum PEINE HCM S User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 2066 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Start 0
556. reshold ertt tnter tnn een SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME SENSe DDEMod SEARch SY NO NS ccrte nter ere ent conr re ner eir e edes SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD esses nennen 5 5 5 SENS amp DDBEMod SEARch SY NO SELect iere A a ne t n 5 22 9 9 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT SENSe DDEMod SIGNaLPATTern ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod SIGNall VALue SENSe DDEMOd SRATe ttt SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete cssssssssssssssseesssssecsssssevesssssvssssssvesssssessssssueesssssessssiesesssseeesesseeseasees SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue 307 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE 5 5 5 5 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHA scsscssssssssessssssessssseessssssvessssssesssssivessssesessssssessssiieessstusesssieesssseessssseesen SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME
557. results in a reference deviation error Cis a carrier frequency offset in radians per second Dis a frequency drift in radians per second per second Tis a timing offset in seconds and is a phase offset in radians For the above phase model an equivalent frequency distortion model may be expressed as B fage t 0 fo fat with 15 the scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error f C 2 77 is a carrier frequency offset in Hz 0 2 is a frequency drift in Hz per second and Tis the timing offset in seconds The measured signal model in terms of the instantaneous frequency and all distortion parameters is given by t Srer u t du ft V f MEAS t e n t 4 5 2 2 Estimation The estimation of the distortion parameters listed previously is performed separately for the magnitude and phase frequency distortions as illustrated in figure 4 64 It is noted that the estimation of the timing offset is performed only on the frequency of the signal as the reference magnitude is assumed to be constant over the estimation range For details on the estimation range see Estimation ranges on page 111 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Compute Reference Waveform Estimate Timing Ref deviation Compute d Meas i Filter Carrier offset Carrier drift Signal Estimate Gain Amp droop Compute Magn
558. retical Modulation Baseband filter in analyzer used and Demodulation Filters for signal adapted filtering Transmit filter Transmitter Filter System Theoretical Modulation Digital impulse shaping filter in and Demodulation Filters signal processing unit of transmit ter VSA Vector Signal Analysis Measurement at complex modula ted RF carriers A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings In the Digital Standards menu predefined basic settings for standards can be selected and user defined standards stored see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 139 The most common measurements are predefined as standard settings for a large num ber of mobile radio networks The instrument comes prepared with the following set tings for those standards Capture length and result length Signal description e Modulation e Transmit filter and measurement filter e Burst Pattern search configuration Result range alignment Evaluation range settings Display configuration The standard settings are grouped in folders to facilitate selecting a standard s WIO ous e JO PJEPUE S SJOYIP si 104 425 991 x Predefined Standards and Settings _ 451 3903 WvoO9L 7 YSN 3903 2 0081 ASNS 3904 Wy GLivvl e weyed Srl 3903 WVO9
559. rfer ence free EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Narrow Pulse standard EDGE HSR Wide Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Wide Pulse standard Gauss Classic Gauss filter with an adjustable BT Low ISI Meas Filter Measurement filter implemented to retain a low intersymbol inferference Best suited for eye diagrams or vector dia grams Not necessarily suited for EVM evaluation due to amplifi cation in the pass band Low Pass Narrow Pass band up to Feymbo 2 Stop band starts at Fsymboi 40dB Low Pass Wide Pass band up to Fo Stop band starts at 1 5 F symbo1 40dB Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period integrate and dump effect RRC Root Raised Cosine Filter The roll off parameter Alpha is set according to the Transmit filter if the Auto according to Trans mit filter option is enabled see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 214 Otherwise it must be set manually If the Transmit filter is also a Root Raised Cosine filter with the same roll off parameter the resulting system is inter symbol interference free USER User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For details see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Fil
560. rking with Known Data files see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 249 Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided with the R amp S FSW free of charge See chapter 8 2 3 2 How to Create Known Data Files on page 250 The syntax for Known Data files is described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 489 When you use Known Data files as a reference some dependencies to other settings and restrictions for other functions apply R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics Modulation Order The Modulation Order selected in the Modulation settings in the VSA application must correspond to the modulation order value specified in the xml file lt ModulationOr der gt element Demodulation Demodulation using synchronization to the Known Data may increase the measure ment duration as each detected symbol must be compared to each possible sequence in the data file Result Length The Result Length specified in the Result Range dialog box in the VSA application must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element Result Range Alignment Bursted signals When you align the result range to a bursted signal due to the uncertainty of the burst search the determined result range might start up to 2 symbols befor
561. robabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars You can define the number of bars to be displayed i e the granularity of classifications Additionally you can specify whether absolute or percentage values are displayed For statistics measurements both the x axis and the y axis can be scaled to optimize the display The range of the displayed x axis for statistics diagrams can be defined in the following ways manually by defining reference values and positions automatically according to the current results The range of the displayed y axis can be defined in the following ways manually by defining the minimum and maximum values to be displayed automatically according to the current results After changing the scaling you can restore the default settings To define the number of bars 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt XScale Config gt X Axis Quantize 3 Enter the number of bars to be displayed The diagram is adapted to display the specified number of bars To define the x axis scaling manually using a reference point and divisions With this method you define a reference value on the x axis to be displayed at the Ref Position of the y axis The reference value is determined internally according to the displayed data and cannot be changed The beginning of the diagram is at the position 0 the end is at 100 Additionally you define the range to be displayed in each of the 10 divisi
562. rview e Select the Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu Then switch to the Trigger tab R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Signal Capture P Data Acquisition Trigger i Level Hysteresis Drop Out Time Slope Tus Holdoff Time Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym The TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW can only be used for input in the VSA application for use as external triggers No configuration settings are available for trigger input For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual MSRA MSRT operating mode 2 MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the VSA application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis See Capture Offset For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 184 _ Signal Capture TAGE SOUS MR DUE M ead ate 185 Mis olo NT RURRFKR
563. ry depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings gt 5 309 gt 5 309 ISENSe IDDEMOG APSIKCNST ete RE desee 309 8 5 5 309 SENSeTDDEMod FIETGIABPFA caa ttti ett ter eee aoreet atn aeta 310 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe ecce tentent 310 ISENSe DBDEMOS FORMIl ter ttn Eee eee un Pa x 310 SENSe DDEMod ESICNSTaAlGg 1 cre erepta reperto fac cc P aaka Ea 311 ISENSeTDDEMod MAPPing CATalpg tici ipee reta to Reed te dae Re 312 SENSeJDDEMod MAPPing VALue 2 2t i eate aae a oen eren 312 SENSeqgDDEMod MSKIEOfRISl ERR eek do PEE Dese 312 I SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMJal 2 nuoc edt pa rne tote nb cnp een 313 SENSe IDBEMod IPSKENSTale 1 erroe eie sed pero sue eo igs uus TE Pe PORE 313 SENSe DDEMOd QAM FORMABI XR ri at 313 SENSe DDE
564. s 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 9 1 9 2 9 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 Result Range nennen nennen nnn nennen 201 Demodulation Settings 1 cicieeiiu cerne inen ANNERON AANEREN ONNENN 203 Measurement Filter 65 213 Evaluation Range Configuration cesses nennen nnn 215 Adjusting Settings nnne 216 DL LI Me 219 Trace Settings 219 Trace Export 5 5 iciiiccccccccccececcvccccecccessccecescesscceeecessccecessessaeeccesescccesessteccecessesseers 222 223 Modulation Accuracy Limit 1 nennen nnn nns 228 Display and Window Configuration eene nnn 230 riu ncee 233 Analysis in MSRA MSRT 1 nennen nennen nennen nna 235 VQ Data Import and ans 236 Import Export FUNCOMS serseri un puru En nn Ape PESE RKRERRKRENERRR ERR RR REEF EUER ARRKRRRRR 236 How to Export and Import I Q
565. s all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples Conventions Used in the Documentation The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installatio
566. s Estimation Points per Symbol Estimation points per symbol During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated as well as the optional equalizer You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol Typi cally this is one point per symbol symbol rate or a factor of 4 sample rate Display points per symbol The number of points per symbol used for calculation may vary from the number of points used to display the results of the calculation If more points per symbol are selected than the defined sample rate the additional points are interpolated for the dis play The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes as illustrated in figure 4 71 IZQ Vector Meas amp Ref B IZQ Vector Meas amp Ref amp 1M Cirw Stop 2 91 1M Cirw 1M Cirw 2 Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 2 Stop 2 91 Fig 4 71 Result display with different numbers of points per symbol window 7 window 2 window C 4 window D 16 The displayed points per symbol also determine how many values are returned when the trace data is queried by a remote command see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 439 For results based on the capture buffer one display point is displayed for each sam ple taken i e the display points per symbol are always identical to the sample rate
567. s available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key The R amp S FSW application is dis played with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed 5 5 1 4 Input Output and Frontend Settings If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input Settings Frequency Digital IQ I Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband High Accuracy Ti
568. s estimated from the defined pattern This setting requires an activated pattern search see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 374 DDATa Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected data RST DDATa Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 211 SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe lt KnownDataState gt This command selects the Known Data state The use of known data is a prerequisite for the BER measurement and can also be used for the fine sync Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt KnownDataState gt OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Known Data on page 152 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME lt FileName gt This command selects the Known Data file Setting parameters lt FileName gt string Manual operation See Load Data File on page 152 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop lt CompAmptDroop gt This command switches the compensation of the amplitude droop on or off Setting parameters lt CompAmptDroop gt OFF 110 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 206 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift lt CarrFreqDrift gt This command defines whether the carrier frequency drift is compensated for FSK modulation Setting parameters lt CarrFreqDrift gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 207 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel lt TransmitChannel gt This command switches the ch
569. s filter Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 they can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 214 If RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and Gaussian filters are used the Alpha RC RRC filters or BT Gaussian fil ters parameters must be set in addition to the filter characteristic roll off factor Typi cally the Alpha BT value of the measurement filter should be the same as that of the transmission filter 4 1 4 Measurement Filters The measurement filter can be used to filter the following two signals in the same way the measurement signal after coarse frequency phase and timing synchronization have been achieved the reference signal i e the symbols that have been determined in the demodu lator and have already been filtered with the Transmit filter For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of the signal not the signal For MSK PSK QAM and User QAM the measurement filter filters the real part and imaginary part of these signals i e not the instantaneous frequency or magnitude of the signal The VSA application defines the error signal as the difference between the reference signal and the measurement signal Thus the measurement filter also shapes the spectrum of the error signal which is used to calculate the EVM for example In many appli
570. s in the result summary are based on the measurement results that are displayed in the Current column Hence the index m here repre sents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count If the measurement values are represented in the logarithmic domain the linear values are averaged The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain The linear values are indicated by the subscript lin in chapter A 6 2 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 494 Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSW Mean idx arg max x m 1 M 1 x n Xy a ty Hes with Xo 0 m Su xy if Burl with Xy if lt Il with 0 Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSW StdDev oy Bum I with E oy Dire M with 0 95 ile X95 M lt 0 95 Pr denotes the probability Sorting the values and giving the 95 ile A 6 4 Trace Averaging The index m represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count The index s represents the st sample within the trace If the measurement results are represented in logarithmic domain the average opera tion is performed on the line
571. s possible to add different traces such as maximum hold or aver age to each window When evaluating the measurement signal it is also possible to display the ideal reference signal as an additional trace This can be a significant help when troubleshooting since it allows for an immediate comparison 1 Start from the configuration described in chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 272 Select window 4 to set the focus on it Press the TRACE key and then the Trace 2 softkey Select Clear Write as the Trace Mode and Evaluation Ref This adds a sec ond trace to your result display This trace is the ideal reference signal that can now be compared to the measurement signal see figure 9 13 T User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 274 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples 5 To view the traces in more detail enlarge the window using the Split Maximize key and zoom into the display using the icon in the toolbar see the dot ted rectangle in figure 9 13 Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Att 24dB Freq 1 0 GHz BURST PATTERN D MagAbs Meas amp Ref 1M 2R Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Res Len 200 Stop 174 sym Start 26 sym Fig 9 13 Zooming Now you can compare the measured and the ideal reference signal aT 275 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea
572. s slower RST ON SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe lt State gt Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Option is active OFF 0 Option is disabled RST 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC ON Manual operation See 82000 State on page 162 Configuring VSA SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe Performs the alignment of the oscilloscope itself and the oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 The correction data for the oscilloscope including the connection cable between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo scope is recorded As a result the state of the alignment is returned Alignment is required only once after setup If alignment was performed successfully the alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope Thus alignment need only be repeated if one of the following applies e Anew oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW e Anew cable is used between the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope e Anew firmware is installed on the oscilloscope Return values lt State gt Returns the state of the second alignment step ON 1 Alignment was success
573. s the value for the current peak or mean frequency error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 mean 1 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean magnitude error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy 0OFFset CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the upper limit for the current peak or mean offset Note
574. s which have different bandwidths The filters described above are the ones that directly affect the bandwidth of the cap tured data and the final measurement signal and reference signal Note however that several other filters are also involved in the DSP section but are not mentioned above e Receive filter to prevent ISI intersymbol interference e filters necessary for various estimators others 4 1 4 I Q Bandwidth The bandwidth of the data used as input for the vector signal analysis is filtered as described in chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 59 Its flat usable bandwidth no considerable amplitude or phase distortion depends on the used sample rate which depends on the defined Symbol Rate see Symbol Rate on page 147 the defined Sample Rate parameter see Sample Rate on page 182 e the type of input used digital baseband input RF input etc For details on the maximum usable bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and 1 0 Bandwidth on page 66 played in the Signal Capture dialog see chapter 5 6 1 Data Acquisition 2 sample rate and the usable bandwidth achieved for the current settings is dis on page 180 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics 4 1 2 Demodulation Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Some modulation systems do not use a receive filter In these cases special care should be taken that no interfere
575. samples per symbol sample rate 4 symbol rate RST 4 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 182 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO lt RecLengthAuto gt If enabled the capture length is automatically adapted as required according to the current result length burst and pattern search settings and network specific character istics e g burst and frame structures Setting parameters lt RecLengthAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 181 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue lt RecordLength gt This command defines the capture length for further processing e g for burst search The record length is defined in time S default or symbols SYM Note that the maximum record length depends on the sample rate for signal capture see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 361 For the default value 4 the maximum is 64000 symbols For larger sample rates the maximum record length in symbols can be calculated as Recordlengthyax 256000 points per symbol Setting parameters lt RecordLength gt numeric value RST 2 083 ms Default unit s not symbols as in manual operation Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 471 Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 181 Configuring VSA SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded pairs should
576. scceseeseeseeeeeseageceseaseeeenees 466 lt gt 466 lt gt 466 lt gt 466 lt gt 466 lt gt 466 lt gt 1 466 lt gt 466 lt gt 466 5 5 466 5 5 5 4 466 5 5 466 STATus QUESHonable 21 iced venezia aia e
577. see e chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 283 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Spectrum VSA Modulation amp Signal Description Ref Level 4 00 Att 16 dB Modulation Signal Description SGL BURST PATTERN Signal Type A EVM Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 us Max Length 148 sym 546 462 us Run In 8 sym 11 077 us Run Out 8 sym 11 077 us Pattern Oo l _____ Start 13 sym Name 1 e C Mag CapBuf w Offset 58 sym 214 154 us Description K Burst Length Run In GES Offset Start 0 sym Stup 1300 Syiti Fig 10 9 The red circle shows the place where you can specify a pattern Solution Select an existing pattern or create a new pattern that you expect to be within the signal For more information see e Pattern Settings on page 150 chapter 8 2 2 How to Perform Pattern Searches on page 245 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range A pattern can only be found if it is entirely within the result range Therefore this error message always occurs with a Pattern Not Found error Solution Choose the pattern as reference of your result range alignment Then the pattern will be forcefully part of your result range and the patter
578. signal capture settings is used see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 361 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 210 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth lt FilterLength gt This command defines the length of the equalizer in terms of symbols Setting parameters lt FilterLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 256 RST 10 Default unit SYM Example DDEM EQU LENG 101 Sets the equalizer length to 101 symbols Configuring VSA Manual operation See Filter Length on page 208 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD lt Name gt This command selects a user defined equalizer The equalizer mode is automatically switched to USER see 8ENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 383 Setting parameters Name string Path and file name without extension Example DDEM EQU LOAD D MMyEqualizer Selects equalizer named MyEqualizer in directory D Manual operation See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 208 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE Mode Switches between the equalizer modes For details see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 107 Setting parameters Mode NORMal Switches the equalizer on for the next sweep TRACking Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in the pre vious sweep are considered to calculate the new filter FREeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer valu
579. sing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 351 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis e Amplitude erect c re c tex etta 169 e Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband 173 9 OGallfit carretera tate 175 179 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the signal power or error levels Input Output and Frontend Settings To configure the amplitude settings select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Con fig softkey The amplitude settings for Analog Baseband input are described in chapter 5 5 5 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 173 Ampli
580. solute result type sse 33 Formulae 491 Relative result type RMS peak formulae Frequency response Channel result type aoctor tte tet EDGE filte S rnt Low ISI filters Magnitude result type is Phase result type 2 rene etes Frequency Response Group Delay Channel result coerente 23 R s lt type irssi oret e 35 Frequency shift keying FSK Symbol MAPPING rn treten ees 87 Frontend Config l atio rettet ettet 152 Configuration remote 320 FSK Calculating errors rete rere 492 eres 492 Deviation error formula 495 Error model 1 terere Eire re 122 Estimatiofi tete neg 123 Measurement deviation formula 495 Modulation ype sisir dri ee trenes 145 Reference deviation terne 147 Signal model terree 120 FSK deviation error ComipensatiOrn 207 125 FSK reference deviation Formula RE 495 Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 340 341 Analog Baseband B71 Digital
581. st The message is given if Coarse Synchronization Non Data Aided User Pattern for Sync Off Estimation range shorter than 40 symbols see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 111 e Fine Synchronization Estimation range shorter than 10 symbols User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 285 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 111 Solution e signal contains a pattern set Coarse Synchronization Pattern see Coarse Synchronization on page 211 Example measurement of a GSM EDGE pattern that has a length of 26 symbols Mag CapBuf 1 Crw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 deBry 60 dBm Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 1 08 21 13 D Const 8 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 dBriy 60 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 2 91 Fig 10 11 User Pattern for Sync On e Choose a longer Result Range e signal is bursted and the bursts are short sure your Result Range comprises the entire burst Make sure that Run In Out is not chosen too large since the Run In Out ranges are excluded from the synchronization e signal is bursted and contains a
582. sults see 57 Remote command on page 433 Spectrum Capture Buffer Error This display combines two diagrams in one The first trace displays the spectrum of the real image data in the capture buffer The second trace displays the spectrum of the real image data of the error Optionally the data source of the traces can be switched Which source is currently displayed for which trace is indicated in the window title bar see also 1 Clrve Spec Capture vs 3 Spec Reallmag Error Y 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 52 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays ____________________________________________________________________________________________ _____________ Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MCOM to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 423 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM TCAP ERR to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC TRAC TCAP CALC TRAC2 ERR to define trace1 to be based on the capture buffer data and trace 2 on the error default see CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 401 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results for capture buffer data see TRACe n DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 4 Symbols on page 441 TRAC DATA TRACE2 to query the trace results for
583. sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the reference deviation of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the Gain Imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Retrieving Results Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Gain imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average gain imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak gain imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of gain imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of gain imbalance error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance type T
584. symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 180 45 90 45 90 45 0 45 Table 4 11 7 4 DQPSK Natural Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 180 45 90 45 Table 4 12 1774 DQPSK 25 APCO25Phase2 Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 4 3 5 Offset QPSK Offset QPSK differs from normal QPSK in the fact that the Q component is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain Hence the symbol time instants of the and the Q component do not coincide The concept of Offset QPSK is illustrated in the diagrams below R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics TE Derivation of OQPSK Table 4 13 diagram and constellation diagram QPSK OQPSK delayed Q component Inphase Quadratu re Quadratur e 4 Fme amb symbols symbols PSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 OQPSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 2 Quadrature Quadrature Inphase Inphase Offset QPSK reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal with respect to nor mal QPSK and therefore the demands on amplifier linearity by avoiding zero cross ings A distinction is made in the analyzer
585. sync pattern is found RST 0 Manual operation See Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 196 11 5 6 3 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect lt Select gt This command selects a predefined sync pattern file Setting parameters lt Select gt string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 475 Manual operation See Selected Pattern for Search on page 196 See Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern on page 198 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe lt PatternSearch gt This command switches the search for a sync sequence on or off Setting parameters lt PatternSearch gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on page 196 See Pattern Search On on page 199 Configuring Patterns New patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard Useful commands for configuring patterns described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC CATalog page 318 Remote commands exclusive to configuring patterns ISENSe IDDEMod SEARCh S YNO GOMMMBRnI 42 eraut 374 SENSe IDDEMod SEARch S YNG GOBY tta eon 375 ISENSeJDDEMod SEARGh SYNO DElgle a entes atat r
586. t 5 421 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 234 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF T User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 421 11 8 11 8 1 Configuring the Result Display Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 234 See Restore Original Display on page 234 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 234 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to config
587. t symbols or seconds for the x axis Setting parameters Unit S SYM RST SYM Configuring VSA Manual operation X Axis Unit on page 179 CALCulate lt n gt Y UNIT TIME Unit This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the y axis of equalizer group delay measurements Setting parameters lt Unit gt S SYM 5 SYM Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision lt PDiv gt This command defines the scaling of the x axis for statistical result displays For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Setting parameters lt PDiv gt numeric value Defines the range per division total range 10 lt PDiv gt Manual operation See Range per Division on page 178 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition lt RPos gt This command defines the position of the reference value for the X axis Setting the position of the reference value is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Setting parameters lt RPos gt numeric value lt numeric_value gt Example DISP TRAC X RPOS 30 PCT The reference value is shifted by 30 towards the left Manual operation See X Axis Reference Position on page 178 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue lt RVal gt This command defines the reference value for the x axis f
588. t Filter EDGE Measurement filters RC filter Alpha 0 25 single side band 6 dB bandwith 90 kHz Windowing by multi plying the impulse response according to the following equation 1 0 lt lt 1 5 10 5 5 1 57 2 257 1 57 lt lt 3 75 0 gt 3 75 The following figure shows the frequency response of the standard specific measure ment filters EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Magnitude dB 1 4 D 1 1 1 i 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 1B 2 Frequency in EDGE HSR Wide Pulse 20 gp 4 Ag eee 100 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in EDGE NSR 20 4 4 4 gp 100 fsymbol Frequency in w Narro Low Pass 20 1 4 D Hess 4 4 sali 1 4 2 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 3 BD L D 4 06 08 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 8 feymbol 0 2 100 Frequency in Low Pass Wide 20 4 4 4 ap apnyiubeyy 1
589. t Settings for Vector Signal Analysis on page 138 for details Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 305 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes Enable the Specifics for option The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window The indicated data flow is updated for the selected data source If the Specifics for option is not enabled the overview displays the default data flow and the general settings independently of the selected window Note The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the window specific overview Signal Description Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards See chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 139 5 4 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes burst and pattern detection and allows for the application to calculate an ideal ref erence signal The signal description consists of
590. t channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Continuous Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequen ces In this case trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 396 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count The mea surement stops after the defined number of evaluations has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Signal Capture Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Single Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an eff
591. t channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Activating Vector Signal Analysis Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K
592. t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 435 Configuring the Result Display Setting parameters lt Format gt MAGNitude PHASe UPHase RIMag FREQuency COMP CONS IEYE QEYE FEYE CONF COVF RCONStellation RSUMmary BERate GDELay MOVerview NONE MAGNitude Magnitude Absolute MOVerview Magnitude Overview Absolute entire capture buffer PHASe Phase Wrap UPHase Phase Unwrap RIMag Real Imag 1 FREQuency Frequency Absolute COMP Vector CONS Constellation IEYE Eye Diagram Real 1 QEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q FEYE Eye Diagram Frequency CONF Constellation Frequency COVF Vector Frequency RCONStellation Constellation Rotated RSUMmary Result summary BERate Bit error rate GDELay Frequency Response Group Delay Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 470 Manual operation See Result Type on page 231 Configuring the Result Display CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the measurement of the statistical distribution of magnitude phase or frequency values on or off Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 231 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE lt StatisticMode gt This command defines whether only the symbol points or all points are considered for the statisti
593. t marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Analysis Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Analysis
594. t the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed Input Output and Frontend Settings NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 353 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 354 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 213 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation
595. t value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF Activates a limit check for the selected result and limit type RST OFF Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON Switch limit check ON Manual operation See Check on page 230 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 413 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the limit for the current peak or mean center frequency error limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1000 0 mean 750 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt
596. tatus bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 427 Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow 2 for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt
597. te command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 356 Default Settings X Axis Scaling Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values for the current measurement window Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on 356 Quantize X Axis Scaling Defines the number of bars to be displayed in the graph i e the granularity of classifi cations Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt on page 356 X Axis Reference Value X Axis Scaling Defines a reference value on the x axis in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue on page 358 X Axis Reference Position X Axis Scaling Defines the position of the X Axis Reference Value on the x axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the beginning left side 100 96 refers to the end right side of the diagram The x axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition on page 358 Range per Division X Axis Scaling Defines the value range to be displayed per division on the x axis Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 lt Range per Division gt Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in width the range per division is increase
598. tellation Rotated The complex source signal as an X Y plot As opposed to the common Constellation display the symbol decision instants including the rotated ones are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal This result type is only available for signals with a rotating modulation User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 26 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 ConstRot I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 2 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1 859 1 859 Fig 3 4 Result display Constellation Rotated vs common Constellation I Q for 377 8 8PSK modulation Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 423 CALC FORM RCON to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 441 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM Displays the error vector magnitude as a function of symbols or time EVM t p with and duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 232 The normalization constant C is chosen according to the EVM normalization By default C is the mean power of the reference signal c FEY and durat
599. tern Searches Enables or disables pattern searches If Auto is selected pattern search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a pattern in the signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Pattern Settings on page 150 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO on page 373 Correlation Threshold The correlation threshold decides whether a match is accepted or not during a pat tern search see also chapter 4 4 2 Pattern Search on page 102 If the parame ter is set to 100 only patterns that match totally with the input signal are found This is only the case for infinite SNR If the threshold Auto option is enabled the default value of 9096 is used As long as the pattern is found there is no need to change this parameter However if the pattern is very short approximately 10 symbols or if the signal is highly distorted tuning this parameter helps the pattern search to succeed To define a threshold manually dis able the Auto option Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC IQCThreshold on page 373 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO on page 372 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid pattern has been found When measuring signals t
600. ters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 298 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data
601. the current measurement settings are stored in a standard file To delete standard files 1 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 2 Inthe Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings file you want to delete Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 3 Press the Delete button 4 Confirm the message to avoid unintentionally deleting a standard The standard file is removed from the folder 8 2 How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements To restore standard files 1 restore the predefined standard files do one of the following e Inthe Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey The Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box is displayed e Inthe Meas menu select the Restore Factory Settings softkey 2 Select Restore Standard Files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery are restored to the Standards folder How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements In addition to performing vector signal analysis strictly according to specific digital standards you can configure the analysis settings for customized tasks The general process for a typical VSA measurement is described here 1 Press the MODE key and select the VSA application 2
602. the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured e QGohfigurimg
603. thout having to start a new measurement As opposed to the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer application or other applications in VSA configuring the result display requires two steps 1 Display Configuration In the first step you select the data source for the evalua tion and the window placement in the SmartGrid The SmartGrid mode is activated automatically when you select the Display Con fig softkey from the main VSA menu or the Display Config button in the Over view Note however that this button is only displayed in the general Overview not for window specific configuration Specifics for must be disabled The default evaluation for the selected data source is displayed in the window Up to 16 result displays can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The VSA evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started man ual Display and Window Configuration 2 Window Configuration In a second step you can select a different evaluation method result type for the window based on the data source selected in the Dis play Configuration 6 5 1 Window Configuration For each window you can select a different evaluation method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further window settings are available for some result types The Window Configuration is disp
604. tion In the physical constellation diagram the constellation points at the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation are shown as with common PSK meth ods This diagram corresponds to the display on the analyzer The position of the con stellation points is standard specific For example some QPSK standards define the constellation points on the diagonals while other standards define the coordinate axes In table 4 5 the symbols are assigned to phase shifts The QPSK INMARSAT map ping corresponds to simple QPSK with phase differential coding Tables table 4 6 and table 4 7 show two types of differential BPSK modulation Differential coding according to VDL is shown in table 4 8 It can be used for modula tion types with 3 bits symbol e g 8PSK Other types of modulation using differential coding method are described in chap ter 4 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation on page 84 Fig 4 23 Constellation diagram for DQPSK INMARSAT and NATURAL including the symbol map ping Table 4 5 DQPSK INMARSAT Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 90 90 180 4 3 4 Symbol Mapping Fig 4 24 Constellation diagram for D8PSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 APCO25 Phase 2 GRAY NATURAL and TETRA Table 4 6 DBPSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica
605. tion is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 320 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 321 High Pass Filte
606. tional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process 1 0 data such as the Analyzer or optional applications and only if the optional Digital Base band Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital Q on page 187 RST IMMediate Configuring VSA Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 185 See Free Run on page 185 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 185 See External CH2 on page 186 See IF Power on page 186 See Baseband Power on page 186 See Power on page 187 See Digital on page 187 11 5 5 Configuring Sweeps The sweep commands define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated Manual configuration of the sweeps is described in chapter 5 6 3 Sweep Settings on page 190 SENSe IDDBEMod SEARGBIMBURSEGADLQO
607. to ee cox ee E epe Rte plo ERE SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP FALLing innen ttt rn netter ten SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP RlSing 2 tenth nid SENSE DDE MOH SEARCH BURSES LAT Co leenena EEE ER EAE e AET ATN EN EEEE EE SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSE TOLSAN Ce viesas ias SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBU RSEGCAL Q tenen thia Ie ERR ER EXE Re ER RR Edad SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURSEtSTARt 5 5 5 1 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PAT Tern SYNG AUT O i cccccssisesscssscescesssecsassersvicvscrncsnecattectoesastencenaseinessatesseveedeas SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe essent SENSe DDEMod SEARch SY NG AU TO rrr reet rn nr t eR epe Rena AE SENSe DDEMod SEARch S YNO CA Talog 2 retten SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNG GOMMASTIL iicet top serere eR EHE PERS RE EEEO RETANA nEs SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY A SENSe DDEMod SEARCh S ocaeca ren recu toot their tea rro SENSe DBEMod SEARGIU SY NO DELETE EHE Rer SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQC Th
608. tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the R amp S FSW VSA application is provided in the instrument free of charge See chapter 8 2 3 2 How to Create Known Data Files on page 250 If such a file is loaded in the application the BER result display is available Available for source types Modulation Accuracy Note that this measurement may take some time as each symbol decision must be compared to the possible data sequences one by one The BER measurement is an indicator for the quality of the demodulated signal High BER values indicate problems such as inadequate demodulation settings e poor quality the source data false or missing sequences in the Known Data file result range alignment leads to a mismatch of the input data with the defined sequences A BER value of 0 5 means that for at least one measurement no matching sequence was found See also chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 103 2 Bit Error Rate Current Accumulative Bit Error Rate 0 499 021 530 0 499 Total of Errors 510 Total of Bits 1022 The following information is provided in the BER result display Bit Error Rate error bits number of analyzed bits Total of Errors number of detected bit errors known data compared to symbol decisions Total of Bits number of analyzed bits For each of these results the following values are provided BER Res
609. tor IF2 The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz This setting is only available if the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector or the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is available It is automatically set if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and Input User Manual VIDeo The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal 200mV is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequen cies at the output RSI IF OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector See IF VIDEO DEMOD Output on page 165 Configuring VSA 11 5 2 8 Frequency SENSe FREQUENCY GENTE edidi rper 350 GENTBESFEP aed 350 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO cette tette tentent 351 SENSeTFREOUSncU OFFS taiii a Ege eren 351 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP
610. tricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 438 Export Export Opens file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note that the data in the entire capture buffer is exported For the maximum of 200 000 000 samples you require several Gigabytes of free space on your storage device How to Export and Import I Q Data Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe on page 456 MMEMory STOR
611. ttings as in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indicated in the window header for each result display Exception Equalizer In the Equalizer displays do not indicate the analysis interval in MSRA MSRT mode Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e the line lies outside the interval User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 135 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode DECT
612. ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER stt SENSe DDEMod TFILter S TATe ttti boss SENSe DDEMod TIME SENSe DDEMOG USER NAME to ctp etes te tci a D ut vp ce Eo xd cds pg va en d d e SENSe FREQuUuency GENTSL rn rnnt ere ence rm iu SENSe FREQ ency CEN Ter STEPA TO nririnig rhet tei rn trc er E pne SENSE FREQUENCY iini iin emet peret ye ease ce her adi a P eds SENSE MIX ei BIAS AG elas ceca ces cae SENSe MIXer BIAS EOW ctt Hotte ayers p ri n e d e rp SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDOVSr in encre retia rr SENSe MIXer FREQuenCy STARU csscsescsrcesccasscsesnecsnsacsateesssosaanonctacerveatessandsenetssetinatenbscssansencencanceansesas 325 SENS amp MIXer FREQUSRGY STOB3 acts ett r a e ariaa a a aiaa ea we en ep yep 325 SENSe MIXer HARMoniGBAND PRESet ip cente iere i 326 5 87 326 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGEES FATO oae rt ce ep t e ro te pr e dcn 327 SENSe MIXer HARMon
613. tude L vas Amplitude Scale Unit Reference Leve Value 10 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Impedance RF Attenuation lectronic Attenuation Mode Auto Value 20 0 dB Note that amplitude settings are not window specific as opposed to the scaling and unit settings Reference evel e OT 170 L Shifting the Display Offset cesses entente 171 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 171 IU SOUINGS 171 171 B de 172 FRE ota E 172 L Attenuation Mode ValUe c ccccccsssscssesescesesesesescecscssesessseseseseccecaeenseeees 172 Using Electronic Atlemuallgli nh 173 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio
614. ualizer Settings Deletes the data of the currently selected equalizer After deletion averaging and tracking starts anew This is useful in the rare case that calculation takes a wrong symbol decision into con sideration and distorts the signal such that the original signal can no longer be deter mined Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 384 Store Load Current Equalizer Equalizer Settings Saves the current equalizer results to a file or loads a user defined equalizer The equalizer Mode must be set to USER in order to load a file Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE on page 384 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD on page 383 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization You can influence the synchronization process and calculation of error values during demodulation R amp S FSW K70 Configuration The Advanced Demodulation settings are displayed when you do one of the follow ing e Select the Demodulation button from the Overview Select the Demod Meas Filter softkey from the main VSA menu Then switch to the Demodulation Advanced tab A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Advanced Normalize EVM to Mean Ref Power Optimization Minimize RMS Error Estimation Points Sym Auto C
615. ude Overview Absolute You can scroll through the different ranges using the Select Result Rng function When the selected result range moves outside the current capture range the right edge of the current result range is displayed in the center of the next capture range Overview vs details While the Magnitude Absolute and other result displays based on the capture buffer Real Imag I Q Vector I Q chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 can only display a single capture range at a time the Magnitude Overview Absolute dis plays the entire capture buffer at once However the overview trace is restricted to 25 000 points If necessary the captured samples are mapped to 25 000 display points using an autopeak detector for display in the Magnitude Overview Absolute diagram Thus this result display is not suitable to detect transient effects or analyze individual symbols closely For these purposes the Magnitude Absolute result display is suited better where one display point can be displayed for each sample taken Restrictions Trace modes that calculate results for several sweeps Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual ranges in the capture buffer diagrams and thus may not provide useful results For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display these trace 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions modes are not available at all Furthermore only one trace can be configured in the Magnitud
616. ul results Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA Configuring the mixer band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode Configuring VSA INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wa
617. ult Description Current Value for current result range Minimum Minimum Current value during the current measurement Maximum Maximum Current value during the current measurement Accumulative Total value over several measurements for BER Total of Errors Total of Bits similar to average function User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 22 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 2 Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FORM BER to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 CALC BER to query the results see CALCulate lt n gt BERate on page 443 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay The Frequency Response Group Delay of the channel is the derivation of phase over frequency for the original input signal It is a measure of phase distortion 4 ChanGroupDelay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 423 CALC FEED XFR DDEM IRAT to define the channel frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 430 CALC FORM GDEL to define the group delay result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 431 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA
618. ur result to the pattern or to check whether the pattern is transmitted correctly Does your signal consist of ranges with different modulation types no omm EDGE MSR arsi pattern coni 0 05 Make sure your Signal in the Signal Description dialog is a Burst Signal Make sure the pattern is indicated in the Signal Description dialog se the Offset and Result Length parameters in the Result Range dialog to move your result range to the desired point in the capture buffer Make sure the burst search is switched on in the Burst Search dialog Make sure the pattern search is switched on yes Is Burst Not Found displayed in the status bar you see a Pattern Not Found Message se an external trigger and appropriate trigger offset Go back to Make sure your Make sure your Result Range Alignment Result Range Alignment reference is Burst reference is Pattern Waveform Range Settings dialog Range Setting Dialog Go back to 10 2 Explanation of Error Messages The following section describes error messages and possible causes Message Burst Not Found estie ameet Ru adorare datae Message Pattern Not 2 2 1 22 1221
619. urces Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Configuring VSA Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed I
620. ure the result display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 230 e General Window Commands ssssssesssesenee eene nnns 422 e Working with Windows the 423 VSA Window irent cete ee eren 429 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 305 leidet ear 422 DISPlay F WINDOW D p 422 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on 426 11 8 2 Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are sti
621. ured can distort the result Thus for signals with a large fre quency spectrum e g FSK modulated signals a higher sample rate may be neces sary For further details see chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Process ing on page 59 For an indication of the required sample rate view the Real Imag I Q display of the capture buffer with a Spectrum transformation If the complete signal is displayed within the usable bandwidth the selected value is suitable Spec RealImag CaptureBuffer 1 Clrw usable 1 0 Bandwidth 7 68 MHz 7 68 MHz Fig 4 5 Determining the I Q bandwidth Real Imag I Q display of the capture buffer with a spectrum transformation User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 66 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Basics ee ee ee a If the signal is cut off increase the sample rate if it is too small decrease the sample rate by changing the Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings or the Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acquisition settings As described above the sample rate is determined by the number of samples to cap ture per symbol Thus the maximum sample rate depends on the maximum number of symbols to be captured the symbol rate and vice versa The maximum sample rate for the R amp S FSW is 10 GHz see below Thus the maximum symbol rate is Table 4 1 Maximum symbol rate depending on sample rate parameter Sample rate parameter Ma
622. urns all values listed in the result table from top to bottom i e Retrieving Results lt EVM_RMS gt lt EVM_Peak gt lt MER_RMS gt lt MER_Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt lt Phase Error Peak gt lt MagError_RMS gt lt MagError_Peak gt lt Carrier Frequency Error Rho I Q Offset gt lt I Q Imbalance gt lt Gain Imbalance gt lt Quadratue Error gt Amplitude Droop gt lt Power gt lt Symbol Rate Error gt Note that the Symbol Rate Error was appended at the end to provide compatibility to previous versions and instruments For each result type both the current and statistical values are provided The order of the results is as follows result1 current result mean lt result1_peak gt lt result1_stddev gt result1 95 ile gt result2 current lt result2_mean gt Empty cells in the table return nothing The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected PSK MSK and QAM modulation returns 85 values FSK modulation returns 55 values The unit of each value depends on the par ticular result For more details on the Result Summary see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 11 9 2 6 Equalizer For Equalizer diagrams the command returns the y axis values of the equalizer trace The number of returned values depends on the result type e For impulse response diagrams filter length sample rate 1 e For frequency response channel and group d
623. ut settings 156 Output settings 166 Output settings information 167 Sample rates ec pi ora es 75 M 187 Digital input Bandwidtlis eit te rn 76 Connection information 167 tee rtr nr retient 76 Digital output Enabling re t e rte 167 a cijigenio m 76 Digital standards Assigned patterns 198 Assigning patterns 198 tenes 4 139 Performing measurement according to 241 Predefined 478 eee 205 Removing assigned patterns w 198 140 SO IKGy E ee ee 140 VSA measurements 2 tern 139 Direct path Input configuration ac Display efe U rz 230 12 Points per symbol 131 232 491 493 Drop out time Rr v 188 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 302 E EDGE Filters frequency response 499 Measurement example 267 Electronic input attenuation 172 173 Enhanced mode Digital OY
624. valuation It can be queried with commands Status Reporting System STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Phase Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 5 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt Status Reporting System
625. ver the limit check can be enabled individually for cur rent or peak values 5 Enable the Check option for each result type to be included in the limit check 6 If necessary define limits and enable the limit check for the mean values of the dif ferent result types on the Mean tab 7 f necessary enable the limit check for the peak values of the different result types on the Peak tab 8 Toreset the limits to their default values press Set to Default 9 Enable the Limit Checking On option or press the ModAcc Limits On softkey in the Limits menu The limit check is performed immediately on the current modulation accuracy mea surement results and for all subsequent measurements until it is disabled The results of the limit check are indicated by red or green values in the result sum mary 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File The measured data can be stored to an ASCII file either as raw data directly from the capture buffer or as displayed in the diagrams evaluated trace data Optionally a header can be included with additional information on the used measurement settings User Manual 1173 9292 02 14 257 How to Analyze the Measured Data 1 Press the TRACE key and select the Trace Export Config softkey 2 Define which type of data to export raw or trace By default trace data is expor ted 3 Optionally enable the header information to be included 4 To export the traces in
626. vo9 edeug esind 8908 usu wy 5221 wened LLL V epmaoaa 2 09 3503 asing 7961 VOS MOJJEN MSH 3503 on 2 edeus 49 U99 0051 Wvo9 asind 8908 usu wv 5221 wened LLL V zHisze 3903 271081 YSH 3904 esind 9pIM 7 3903 esingepiM _ 0081 Sd edeug esind 3909 usH s 52241 wened LL 3903 epmaoaa gt dO 3933 asind 4720817484 ROLEN BD S 7 edeus esingMoue 41089 _ 0081 Sd asind 3903 usH ys 5221 Y wened LLL 3903 zHisze dO 3603 _ 451 a907 Wvoze 7 YSN 3903 00517 ASNO 3903 wayed 3903 wvoze pezueeury 2 228 022 WvOZE v L 026 3903 soy seo y 6us sang 191114 9je1 Budde 1426 uonenjeag ynsey uleyged 10 Jojuojeeg 1g eudiv joquiAg uonejnpo _ JopJoJ Predefined Standards and Settings s WIO ous e Jo pJepueis OU sJeyllp si Jo 425 991 x V 9
627. which you can select the storage loca tion and file name You can also add an optional comment to the file e Otherwise reset the tool to start a new recording possibly after changing the demodulation settings or input data 7 Close the tool window to return to normal operation of the VSA application The created xml file can now be loaded in the VSA application as described in chap ter 8 2 3 1 How to Load Known Data Files on page 249 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range You can define which part of the source signal is analyzed Result Range with refer ence to the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern For details on the functions see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 201 1 In the Overview select Range Settings 2 Select the Result Range tab 3 Define the Result Length i e the number of symbols from the result that are to be analyzed Note that when you use Known Data files as a reference the Result Length specified here must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element See chapter 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 133 4 Define the Reference for the result range i e the source to which the result will be aligned The reference can be the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern How to Analyze the Measured Data 5 Define the Alignment of the result ra
628. wn conversion Real Baseband If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 341 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended data only Differential and inverse data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 340 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing e
629. x Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option B320 U320 Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 400 MHz proportional up to maximum 320 MHz 400 MHz to 10 GHz 320 MHz Digital Baseband output If Digital Baseband output is active see Digital Baseband Output on page 167 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable bandwidth Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Usable bandwidth bandwidths for RF input ctivated option B320 U320 HN J 12 LE 3 NAI TL LA NL LIN N nae E 4 41 ON NER tt A Output sample 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 10000 rate MHz Fig 4 7 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B320 4 2 1 10 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option B500 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 provides measurement bandwidths up to 500 MHz Digital Baseband output Digital Baseband output see Digital Baseband Output on page 167 is not available for an active R amp S FSW B500 bandwidth extension Real Time measurements and MSRT operating mode Real Time measurements and thus the entire MSRT operating mode are not availa ble if the R amp S FSW B
630. x symbol rate 4 symbol rate 2500 MSymbols 8 symbol rate 1250 MSymbols 16 symbol rate 625 MSymbols 32 symbol rate 312 5 MSymbols 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable I Q Bandwidth for RF Input Definitions e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the device connected to the input of the R amp S FSW e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output Usable Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW Record length Number of I Q samples to capture during the specified measure ment time calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate For the data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally in the R amp S FSW The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable 1 0 bandwidth In consequence signals within the usable bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable I Q bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this
631. x sample 1 11111 0111111 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 21121 1111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01121 0101121 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11191 Peay Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21121 0121121 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10at32 Data File Format iq tar fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands VSA SENSe JADIJUSt CONFigure DURatiOn 2 cot nere tet een entere rra he 392 SENSe JADJust CONFIgure DURaltion MODE cent cer lta i tnr de he xk ee 392 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWer eere netter thee rnt 393 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Tleresis UPPBer sie ttn tr er etr eo Ee ada 393 SENSe ADJUSEGONFigUresTRIG deinen idan eee 394 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENS CORRection CVL BAND ott ian ants eap bti HU eg aided 329 SENSe ICORRSction GVE BIASZ iir ecciesia c crecer deer ut ica eae 330 SENSe ICORRSction GVIEGATAIOG
632. y GSM VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 322 Preamplifier If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 353 INPut GAIN VALue on page 352 5 5 1 2 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the External Mixer tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey From the Overview select Input then switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode Automatic signal identification is not available in the R amp S FSW VSA application For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual Input Output and Frontend Settings 5 5 1 3 Digital I Q In
633. y moving a marker to the symbol number When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the off set defined for the signal structure into consideration see Offset on page 151 If you define an offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst in the signal description and align the result to the pattern the Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the useful part of the burst not the first symbol of the pat tern Run In Run Out Time The parameter Run In Out can be used to influence the range over which the EVM is minimized The internal synchronization range is the overlapping area of the result range and the burst excluding its Run In Out areas Hence this parameter also allows for demodulation of bursts with mixed modulations e g Bluetooth because it can be used to explicitely exclude symbols from influencing the synchronization Useful length The burst excluding its Run In Out areas is sometimes referrred to as the useful part The minimum length of the useful part Min Length Run In Run Out must be 210 Remote commands A remote command is provided to determine the position of the current result range within the capture buffer SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst STARt on page 439 Evaluation Range In some scenarios the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to be con sidered for the EVM or other calculated param
634. y the connected device to be ignored Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done to be ignored for future use currently OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 CODER 1 IN 0 200000000 Passed Done 0 0 See Output Settings Information on page 167 See Connected Instrument on page 168 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed Configuring VSA For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW Ana lyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 322 SENSe FREQuency CENTer page 350 SENSe SWAPiq 362 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPutiI BALancegESTATe i iet t ee i e Red eee et eae ect eqs 340 INPut IQ UL Escale AUTO ette 340 putt eraot eit 341 ljznded5i
635. ymbol MAPPING ipee ett et rti ei aes 95 Optimization Demod ulation aei 210 Options Bandwidth extension naa Electronic attenuation High pass filter Preamplifiers OQPSK Constellation diagram 86 Oscilloscope 00 82 Us 162 Oscilloscopes sie etate ex oreet verde bern ek Connections B2000 Remote commands B2000 344 Output Pp M 349 AN 152 Configuration softkey sse 165 Digital Baseband Interface settings 166 167 Digital Baseband Interface status 338 Digital remote 338 IF frequency remote 349 IF SOURCE remote tein 349 Sample rate definition 67 75 Sae TP 165 165 349 Overload RE inpu t remote 320 Oversampling iii D 233 Overview Configutatioti eere rtt rn t nere 142 P Parameters e t tene rende 57 58 j 58 PSK QAM MSK scot Retrieving results remote 443 S
636. you make the capture length long enough to ensure that in each capture buffer at least one entire burst is included The maximum capture buffer length is 50 Msymbols for a sample rate of 4 or 200 million samples If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active the capture buffer is restricted to 256 000 samples e Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer that are to be demodulated and analyzed together For example bursted signals have intervals between the bursts that are not of interest when analyzing peaks or overshoots Thus the result range usually coin cides with the range of the capture buffer in which the burst is located 4 6 1 Measurement Ranges The maximum result range length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 samples e Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines the symbols from the result range that are to be included in the evaluation of specific parameters e g error vectors For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range Capture lengh iui Fig 4 67 Schematic overview of Capture Length Result Range and Evaluation Range The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the d

R&S FSW K70 VSA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW K70 VSA User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW K70 VSA User Manual